Home

HAAS SERVICE AND OPERATOR MANUAL ARCHIVE SL

Contents

1. M21 M22 M23 M24 M25 M26 P43 P30 P39 P67 rs E p7s 1 el em Se Te Qa9 040 12 Pas Big P82 R86 AA P34 P14 B B U 3222 1 P35 1 40 _ LE35 _ LE18 Q1 pel ute e 61 8 WH fu Lese R4 32 Us 12 LE10 0 e em uu o Len e EC E gt P18 eel es d LE41 5 Ze 0561 1 9 e RC EA E oe
2. sss b e Ol lol lolol DESIGNATES PARTS AVAILABLE FROM HAAS SERVICE DEPT SL 30 Spindle Assembly 222 ll _____ 96 8710 January 1999 Series 30 3630 SPINDLE ASSEMBLY SL30 ITEM QTY P N 1 1 20 8563B 2 1 20 8564B 3 1 20 8565A 4 1 20 8567B 5 1 20 8568 6 2 20 8572 7 1 20 8751 8 1 20 8800 9 1 20 8804 10 1 22 2717 11 1 22 8562B 12 1 40 16391 13 4 40 1663 14 8 40 1697 15 2 40 1712 16 4 40 1805 12 40 1959 18 2 45 1599 19 4 45 1656 20 2 46 1720 21 4 49 4110 22 1 51 7100 23 1 54 3090 24 1 54 3101 25 4 54 3110 26 1 57 2989 27 1 58 3105 28 1 60 1810 DESIGNATES REMOVED PART 96 8710 DESCRIPTION SHAFT SPINDLE RING CLAMP INNER SPINDLE SPACER BEARING PULLEY TIMING SPINDLE RING RETAINER SPINDLE NOZZLE OIL MIST SPINDLE HOUSING PULLEY DRIVE SPINDLE 9ADAPTER CYL DRAWTUBE LOCATING PIN FLANGE PULLEY TIMING SHCS 3 8 16 x 1 2 SHCS 1 2 13 x 1 3 4 SHCS 1 4 20 x 3 4 SHCS 5 16 18 x 1 2 SHCS 8 32 x 5 8 SHCS 3 8 16 x 1 3 8 WASHER FLAT 5 16 1 0
3. 3 7 2 555 DESIGNATES PARTS AVAILABLE FROM HAAS SERVICE DEPT d 51 20 Wedge Assembly 216 A J ll F F P F 96 8710 SERVICE MANUAL January 1999 a A Sp re es ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS IT QTY PART TITLE IT QTY PART NO TITLE 1 1 20 7008F HOUSING LD SCREW ASSY 35 45 0040 WASHER BLK HARD 1 4 2 1 20 7185 BUMPER Z AXIS MTR END 36 45 1600 WASHER SPLIT LOCK 5 16 MED 3 1 20 8502 CARRIAGE MACHINED 37 45 1620 WASHER SPLIT LOCK 10 MED 4 1 20 8535 PLATE ACCESS T C 38 45 1800 WASHER SPLIT LOCK 1 4 MED 5 1 20 8545 COVER HOUSING T C 39 4 48 0045 PIN PULL 3 8 x 1 1 2 6 1 20 8723 BUMPER SUPPORT END X AXIS 40 2 50 8549 LINEAR GUIDE 7 1 22 2629 KEY 0 1875 0 1870 SQ 41 1 57 0075 O RING 2 021 BUNA 8 18 22 7458 CAM SCREW LINEAR GUIDE 42 1 57 0080 O RING 2 023 BUNA 9 4 24 7325 STR FIT METRIC LINEAR GUIDE 43 1 57 8546 GASKET PLATE ACCESS 10 1 25 7042 COVER PLATE LD SCREW 44 1 2 58
4. tr gt m fi 8 8 lt in gt 21 ol 70 m 2 s 70 38 u 4 ed n a a 8 k gt aA 2 n gt big 5 9 8 51 ZS ES 5 5 A TRANSMISSION P S HYDRAULIC C B PCB P N 32 4095 A 168 T v h Oo h 96 8710 January 1999 96 8710 Series CABLE LOCATIONS KR TRANSMISSION P S HYDRAULIC C B PCB CABLE 880B 90 410 350 340 70 P N 32 4095A CABLE CONNECTIONS gt HAAS LOCATION PLUG IO PCB P12 POWER PCB P8 GEAR BOX 10 PCB P54 HYDRAULIC MTR MAIN TRANSFORMER VECTOR DRIVE UNIT 169 SERVICE MANUAL 2 CABLE LOCATIONS 7 1999 Y DELTA SWITCH ASSEMBLY P N 32 5850A Hm E CH coi 29 2 2 TO 5 COIL TO SPINDLE MOTOR TO K4 COIL TO IO PCB P12 5 E M 50 5 G9 TO IO PCB P58 ER K5 1 L E
5. 27222773 dee ei y ES 5 E ITEM DESCRIPTION PAGE A RELAY COIL DRIVERS IOPCB 8 11 B C SPINDLE DRIVE UNIT 12 D AXIS MOTOR amp ENCODER 13 14 CABINET CONNECTORS 15 2 3 TOOL CHANGE MOTORS 16 CHIP CONVEYOR 17 OPERATOR PENDANT 18 6 7 ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS 19 CONTROL LAYOUT DIAGRAM 1 99 HAAS AUTOMATION HL SERIES PAGE A AAS January 1999 968710 SERVICE MANUAL ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS January 1999 Series INPUT VOLTAGE 195 260 VAC 115 VAC MAIN MAIN OPERATOR POWER TRANSFORMER PENDANT DISTRIBUTION 115 VAC 115 230 230 i 9 5 VIDEO KEYBOARD AND JOG g g 5 S 2 e PLE BRUSHLESS VECTOR DRIVE SERVO MICRO PE AMPLIFIERS PROCESSOR CNC CMDS 320 VDC FAULTS m SPINDLE COMMANDS 52 SPINDLE ENCODER 5 FE 8 murs SERVO REGEN SPINDLE MOTOR MOTORS ASSY DISCRETE INPUTS TOOL TURRET AND OUTPUTS HEAT SENSOR 5 8 SENSORS CMDS HOME LIMIT SWITCHES TOOLCHANGER OVE
6. Y n 4 d e fiii ad p a d Lo 88 ER 38 58 58 82 amer al EE 52 59 62 4 38 58 6384 47 57 2649 2 DESIGNATES PARTS AVAILABLE FROM HAAS SERVICE DEPT SL 30 Casting Assembly AAAA T ___ 96 8710 210 January 1999 30 1630A MACHINE CASTING ASSEMBLY SL30 ITEM QTY PART No 1 1 20 7185 2 1 20 8750 3 1 20 8843 4 6 20 8877 5 1 20 9007 6 1 22 2629 7 34 22 7458 8 1 22 8048 9 1 22 8064 10 1 22 8780 11 1 22 8793 12 1 22 8795 13 1 22 8796 14 1 22 8797 15 1 22 8841 16 1 25 7042 17 1 25 7080 18 1 25 7267 19 2 25 7485 20 1 25 8653 21 1 25 8656 22 1 25 8792A 23 1 25 8807 24 1 25 9746 25 1 26 7233A 26 1 26 8011 27 1 30 8863 28 1 32 2040 29 2 40 1500 30 4 40 1
7. e gt 4 lo 5 lo giis i 83801888 80908 63 i 6 63 J 8 E l DESIGNATES PARTS AVAILABLE FROM HAAS SERVICE DEPT DESIGNATES REMOVED PART SL 20 Casting Assembly 206 P ll _____ _ 96 8710 SERVICE MANUAL January 1999 Sp es PO ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS ITEM QTY PART TITLE ITEM QTY PART TITLE 1 1 20 7185 BUMPER Z AXIS MOTOR END 56 72 40 1667 SHCS 5 16 18 x 1 1 4 2 1 20 8035 TS ENCODER STRIP ATTCH BRKT 57 2 40 1675 SHCS 5 16 18 x 2 1 4 3 1 20 8500 BASE MACHINED 58 11 40 1697 SHCS 1 4 20 x 3 4 4 1 20 8504 TAIL STOC
8. BRUSHLESS SERVO VECTOR AMPLIFIER DRIVE POWER SUPPLY LV HV HV 320 VDC gt gt BRUSHLESS MTR PWR 1 4 T MTR CMD X u SERVO YT 490X x SERVO ENCODER CABLE MOTOR 660 660 ENCODER HV BRUSHLESS MTR PWR MTR CMD LV SERVO ABC 490Y Y SERVO 620 J2 LIVE TOOLING ENCODER CABLE 670 ENCODER BRUSHLESS MTR PWR gt 9 _ MTRCMD Z LV SERVO A B C 4902 2 SERVO 5 630 J ENCODER J2 ZAXIS MOTOR a 680 0 680 ENCODER o lt HV BRUSHLESS LV MTR PWR 490A TOOL xm MTR CMD A jp SERVO AMP SE TURRET gt ENCODER CABLE 690 MOTOR 690 ENCODER 6501 6908 660 MTR CMD CURRENT COMMAND CABLE 690C ENCODER USED BY SPINDLE MOTOR ENCODER SERVO SYSTEM 1 99 HAAS AUTOMATION HL SERIES PAGE 1 meng 185 SERVICE MANUAL ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS y fi
9. L r EN 2 5 10 45 54 62 20 43 so 71 DA 5 7 049 2 21 9 89 65 81 72 47 86 DESIGNATES PARTS AVAILABLE FROM HAAS SERVICE DEPT SL 20 Casting Assembly 96 8710 AAS 204 January 1999 ITEM QTY PART NO 1 1 20 7185 2 1 20 8500 3 1 20 8617 4 1 20 8618 5 1 20 8720 6 1 20 8721 7 1 20 9007 8 1 20 9096 9 1 22 2629 10 64 22 7458 11 1 22 8052 12 1 22 8624 13 1 22 8722 14 6 22 8877 15 1 22 8901 16 1 22 8902 17 1 22 8904 18 1 22 8905 19 4 24 7325 20 1 25 7042 21 1 25 7080 22 1 25 7266 23 2 25 7485 24 1 25 8653 25 1 25 8656 26 1 25 8923 27 1 25 8925 28 1 25 8950 29 3 25 9746 30 1 26 8010 31 1 26 8623 32 1 30 8717 33 1 32 2040 34 8 40 1500 35 4 40 1609 36 4 40 16091 37 11 40 1632 38 6 40 1639 39 2 40 16413 40 10 40 16435 41 2 40 16438 42 1 40 1654 43 16 40 16583 44 1 40 16627 45 36 40 1667 96 8710 TITLE BUMPER Z AXIS MOTOR END BASE MACHINED CONDUIT STRAIN RELIEF CONDUIT STRAIN RELIEF SWING ARM SPRING BUSHING SWING ARM SPRING NUT HOUSING MACHINED BUMPER Y AXIS KEY 1875 1870 SQUARE CAM LINEAR GUIDE GUIDE Z WAYCOVER BOTTOM SEAL RAIL BACKING BAR BRACKET SPRING T C BUSHING ISOLATOR HYD SUPPORT LEFT MIDDLE SUPPORT LEFT REAR SUPPORT LEFT FRONT SUPPORT
10. 650 TO HAAS VECTOR DRIVE 10 2 96 8710 Series 9 CABLE LIST January 1999 CABLE LIST CNC WIRING OVERALL 6 98 THE FOLLOWING IS A SUMMARY OF THE CABLES USED IN THE WIRING OF THIS CONTROL WIRE TERMINAL FUNCTION NAME NUMBER INCOMING POWER 195 260 VAC 354 488 VAC OPTIONAL L1 INCOMING 195 260VAC PHASE 1 TO CB1 1 L2 INCOMING 195 260VAC PHASE 2 TO CB1 2 L3 INCOMING 195 260VAC PHASE 3 TO CB1 3 71 PROTECTED 195 260VAC CB1 4 TO K1 1 72 PROTECTED 195 260VAC CB1 5 TO K1 2 73 PROTECTED 195 260VAC CB1 6 TO K1 3 74 195 260VAC FROM K1 4 TO XFORMER 1 75 195 260VAC FROM K1 5 TO XFORMER 1 76 195 260VAC FROM K1 6 TO XFORMER 1 77 230VAC PHASE 1 FROM XFORMER 1 TO VECTOR DRIVE CHIP CONV 78 230VAC PHASE 2 FROM XFORMER 1 TO VECTOR DRIVE CHIP CONV 79 230VAC PHASE 3 FROM XFORMER 1 TO VECTOR DRIVE CHIP CONV 90 115VAC FROM TB2 CB2 OUTPUT TO IOPCB P33 SHIELD 3 91 115VAC FROM TB2 1TO IOPCB P33 PIN 1 92 115VAC FROM TB2 2 TO IOPCB P33 PIN 2 93 115VAC FROM TB2 3 TO IOPCB P33 PIN 3 94 SHIELD DRAIN 115VAC FROM XFORMER T1 TO TB1 CB2 INPUT 94 STEPPED DOWN 115 VAC FROM XFORMER T1 95 STEPPED DOWN 115 VAC FROM XFORMER T1 96 STEPPED DOWN 115 VAC FROM XFORMER T1 90A 115 VAC TO CRT SHIELD 2 91A 115VAC 16 92A RETURN 716 93A SHIELD DRAIN
11. ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Ser jes January 1999 o TO MOCON 17 640 HAAS VECTOR DRIVE TO IOPCB P18 OVER VOLTAGE TO IOPCB P20 NC OVERHEAT POWER a SPINDLE TO SERVO AMPS REGEN DC BUS n RESISTOR ER A A WW ae 12345 6 7 8 91011 R JAB C R S T G GU VW SPINDLE MOTOR U v v dor 230 VAC i HAAS VECTOR DRIVE UNIT 1 99 HAAS AUTOMATION HL SERIES PAGE 12 AAS 968710 196 SERVICE MANUAL January 1999 7 y di ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS 17 PINCONNECTOR H RED 5VDC RED WHITE LOGIC GND TO MOCON PCB THROUGH CABLES 32 1425B TO 32 1430B WHITE YELLOW A CHANNEL X AXIS 660 Y AXIS 670 Z AXIS 680 AAXIS 690 B AXIS 690B WHITE BROWN B CHANNEL TM T 1 mE BLACK 2 CHANNEL NOT USED ENCODER YELLOW ACHANNEL BROWN B CHANNEL WHITE ORANGE C CHANNEL WHITE BLACK Z CHANNEL NOT USED Oo 06 A gt o TO BRUSHLESS SERVO AMPLIFIERS THROUGH cABLEs PIN CONNECTOR 32 14258 TO RED MOTOR A 32 1430B 491 492 493 494 BRUSHLESS 5 o MOTOR D WHITE MOTOR B MOTOR C CHASSIS GREEN YELLOW CONNECTS TO LUBE RACK A amp B AXES ONLY Y AXI
12. gt 1 E 9 Che 2541 68 d ETT o cH c a zog 22 91 UE NE T AE 41 lo e o o T ER LEE P 124 E EU Uol 7 SW Lt J 1 4083 ing 6718562163 788 es c za 670 EE ENN 82 8752 de 08 5986 65 34135 8 78 86 52 8 60 33 20 73 25 49 mrm L 79 86 89 110 0 Yee ee 12 31 47 2 76 13 63 93 64 12 90 1 44 54 DESIGNATES PARTS AVAILABLE FROM HAAS SERVICE DEPT SL 30 Casting Assembly 208 A Nsm ALLA T o v 96 8710 SERVICE MANUAL January 1999 Sp re ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS IT QTY PART NO DESCRIPTION IT QTY PART NO DESCRIPTION 1 1 20 7185 BUMPER 59 1 40 1654 SHCS 1 2 13 x 1 2 1 20 8035 TS ENCODER STRIP ATT BRKT 60 16 40 16585 MSHCS M10 x 100 3 1 20 8617 CONDUIT STRAIN RELIEF FRT 61 35 40 1660 SHCS 1 2 13 x 1 1 2 4 1 20 8618 CONDUIT STRAIN RELIEF RR 62 1 40 166
13. 1 VECTOR DRIVE 230 VAC MOTOR SPINDLE 230V gt Nol 3PHS SERVO AMP 320 VDC _ XZAAXIS 1 1HP 850W 7 6A 230 Iu CB1 K1 FAN VECTOR DRIV lt gt Glo FAN PENDANT Ew 12VDC eech LINE FAN CPU 6 20 PROC P S a WORKLIGHT POWER FUB p49 FAN SPINDLE MOTOR CB4 SPT SOLENOIDS 2 O P28 115VAC 1PH LED SERVO AMP P8 P36 MOTOR LUB PUMP CB2 D FAN REGEN 115V 579 5 55 233 FAN DOOR CB3 230V STO 230V lt p MOTOR COOLANT 1PHS gt gt 4 2 230V 3 7A P31 F2 230V F3 230V hao 3PHS TP MOTOR CHIP CONVEYOR HYDRAULIC POWER 230V E HYDRAULIC 3PHS 7 2HP 230V 6A G6 0 1 99 HAAS AUTOMATION 968710 HAAS 201 SERVICE MANUAL ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS 202 January 1999 CIRCUIT BREAKER VARISTOR o SINGLE NEON BULB W RESISTOR PUSH BUTTON SWITCH CIRCUIT BREAKER NORMALLY CLOSED MULTI MTM amp ao ES PUSH BUTTON SWITCH NORMALLY OPEN COIL v DIODE s N e RELAY CLOSED RELAY OPEN GROUND opo RELAY SINGLE POLE DOUBLE THROW gt LAMP Ka NM RESISTOR VVVV AN LED Vr LIGHT EMITTING DIODE 4 SOLENOID
14. 00000000 00000000 unun 0000 0000 0000 lsooooooo P47 PM P22 7 32 4023H 9 9 j 5 1 MOCON PCB P N 32 4023H AMS January 1999 P16 P33 P32 P5 P4 P3 P2 P15 96 8710 January 1999 MOCON PLUG P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P32 P33 P6 P7 P8 P9 P30 P31 P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 P15 P16 P17 P18 P19 P20 P21 P22 P24 P33 96 8710 CABLE 610 620 630 640 640B 640C 660 670 680 690 690B 690C 550 510 520 530 540 860 720 640C 750 1000 980 730B 990 640C Series MOCON PCB P N 32 4023H CABLE CONNECTIONS SIGNAL NAME gt DATA BUSS X DRIVE SIGNAL Y DRIVE SIGNAL Z DRIVE SIGNAL A DRIVE SIGNAL B DRIVE SIGNAL C DRIVE SIGNAL X ENCODER INPUT Y ENCODER INPUT Z ENCODER INPUT A ENCODER INPUT B ENCODER INPUT C ENCODER INPUT MOTIF INPUTS 1 0 OUTPUTS 1 0 RELAYS 1 8 1 0 RELAYS 9 16 1 0 RELAYS 17 24 RELAYS 25 32 LOW VOLTAGE SP DRIVE LOAD VCTR DR CUR CMD JOG INFO ADDRESS BUSS SP ENCODER INPUT VOLTAGE MONITOR SPARE HOME SENS
15. 69 49 67 60 10 76 43 75 27 H 5 07 o o o o SS o o deh k RP ra 8 E T ea 1 y ca Ex s J I a T a 47 73 17 73 4 09 6 3 74 220 6 74 DESIGNATES PARTS AVAILABLE FROM HAAS SERVICE DEPT SL 40 Wedge Assembly ANAS January 1999 96 8710 January 1999 ITEM QTY PART NO TITLE 20 7185 2 20 7186 3 20 8202 4 1 20 8204 5 2 20 8289 6 1 20 8535 7 1 20 8545 8 2 20 8721 9 1 20 9007 10 1 22 2629 11 22 22 7458 12 1 22 8280 13 4 24 7325 14 25 7042 15 25 7080 16 1 25 7267 17 1 25 7459 18 1 25 7485 19 1 25 7486 20 1 26 7233A 21 1 30 0057 22 1 30 0451 23 1 30 8330 24 1 32 2063 25 13 40 1610 26 40 1632 27 3 40 1639 28 2 40 16413 29 16 40 16548 30 2 40 16627 31 8 40 1500 32 2 43 16011 33 7 40 1697 34 5 40 1705
16. ALMA 5 105 SERVICE IVIANUAL TECHNICAL REFERENCE P22 P23 P24 P25 P26 P27 P28 P29 P30 P31 P33 P34 P35 P36 P37 P38 P39 P40 P43 P44 P45 P46 P47 P48 P49 P50 P51 P52 P53 P54 P55 P56 P57 P58 P59 P60 106 Series M FIN input 100 Footswitch 190 Spare 2 Spare 3 Spare terminals for M21 to M24 Door lock 1040 115V AC from CB4 910 A axis brake solenoid output 390 Tool changer shuttle motor output 810A 230 VAC for Chip Conveyor 160 115V AC three phase input from power supply assembly 90 115V AC to CRT 90A 115V AC to heat exchanger 90B 115V AC to CB4 90C 115V AC spare 870 Door open 1050 Tool changer turret motor output 810 770A A B Ground fault sense signal input 1060 Axis Brake 5TH axis brake 319 HTC Shuttle Chip Conveyor 140 Skip input signal 1070 spare 1 spare 2 Spigot Motor 200 16 PIN Relay drivers 17 24 530 spare 1 Spigot Sense 180 Servo Brake 350 Red green lights 280 Thru spindle coolant pump 940A 115V spare 115V spare Gear Box 370B TSC 230 IN 930A HAAS January 1999 96 8710 SERVICE MANUAL January 1999 n N n O N a lt Ge rie TECHNICAL REFERENCE 5 5 CONTROL PANEL The JOG handle is actually a 100 line per revolution encoder We use 100 steps per revolution to move one of the servo axes If no axis is selected f
17. Series 82 p gt oO 96 8710 January 1999 SERVICE MANUAL ELECTRICAL SERVICE Series 4 ELECTRICAL SERVICE 4 1 SOLENOIDS 96 8710 Please read this section in its entirety before attempting to replace any solenoid assem blies Pneumatic CLAMP UNCLAMP SOLENOID REMOVAL 1 Turn machine power off and remove the air supply from the machine 2 Disconnect the two air hoses from the pneumatic chuck clamp unclamp solenoid see Figure 4 1 3 Unplug the solenoid electrical lead at the switch bracket located on the rear of the lube air panel 4 Remove the two SHCS holding the assembly to the bracket and remove the assembly Turret clamp unclamp solenoid Pnuematic clamp solenoid 2 Hose barb Figure 4 1 Front view of lube air panel 1 Replace the air solenoid assembly and attach to the bracket with the two SHCS Tighten securely 6 Reconnect the electrical connection to the solenoid at the switch bracket 7 Reconnect the two air lines ensuring that all connections are tight and do not leak 8 Restore the air supply to the machine Turret CLAMP UNCLAMP SOLENOID REMOVAL 1 Turn machine power off and remove the air supply from the machine 2 Disconnect the three air hose
18. 17 January 1999 SERVICE MANUAL EZ TROUBLESHOOTING Series lt Remove the Data amp or Address buss from the Video amp Keyboard PCB e Processors LED s Normal then Run goes out lt Remove the Data 8 or Address buss from the MOTIF PCB e Processors LED s Normal then Run goes out lt Remove the Data amp or Address buss from the Micro Processor PCB e Processors LED s CRT and Run are out DiaGnostic 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 SETNG OFSET GRAPH T 2 PARAM posit DGNOS PRGRM ALARM cuar aux CONVRS MESGS bow F L PART ZERO 100 F4 SET Y x RAPID UP TOOL JOG 50 RESTART RELEASE 2 LOCK Z 10 10 RAPID B NEXT 25 TOOL A aX aY 100 100 stop RAPID F2 TOOL OFSET CHIP CHIP CHIP 5 MESUR FWD STOP REV cw RAPID CURNT PAGE PAGE COMDS HELP UP DOWN MDI HANDLE ZERO LIST EDIT DNC JOG RET PROG J DRY ORIENT 2001 ALTER RUN SPNDLE 1 7 ZERO opt wc o SINGL DELETE stop Fwo 10 Axes RS232 8 01 ERASE REV 100 PROG PERIOD warre KEYBOARD GRID BLOCK DELETE AUTO SINGLE 0001 ALL SELECT INSERT BLOCK COOLNT 1 AXES PROG 18 e P e n nA 5 96 8710 January 1999 SERVICE MANUAL TROUBLESHOOTING Series The following is an example of h
19. 1199 2 KE o o LIMIT SWITCH CLOSED TRANSFORMER lt lt LIMIT SWITCH OPEN capacitor NN 4M MOTOR OPTO ISOLATOR FU2 FUSE ELECTRICAL SYMBOLS HAAS AUTOMATION HL SERIES PAGE 18 AAS 96 8710 96 8710 EE ooo ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS AND PARTS LISTS A44 203 SERVICE MANUAL ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS Se rie January 1999 438 46 Ic 68 0000000 i 8 e E b 5 8 8 7 7 P M 816767 4406784 076062 La P n IL Per 1 O 9 62 89 DESIGNATES PARTS AVAILABLE FROM HAAS SERVICE DEPT e WEI n Gm
20. CABLE LOCATIONS SERVICE MANUAL Series January 1999 J1 E Lj ET oo E DO oo 99 7 BEEPER Ly HI EB oo U9 DISCRETE INPUTS UM U9 J12 J5 J7 3 oooooooo 83 1072 0000 KEYBOARD o Hu Y1 n D 93 1072 B oo d P1 Ze oo 2 oo Li 5 0 n Hu P5 n ELE 0000000 0000 EE E E n P6 P3 P4 SERIAL KEYBOARD INTERFACE PCB WITH HANDLE J0G P N 93 1072 158 T gt lt 968110 January 1999 sI Series CABLE LOCATIONS SERIAL KEYBOARD INTERFACE PCB WITH HANDLE JOG P N 93 1072 CABLE CONNECTIONS PLUG CABLE gt LOCATION PLUG P1 700 PROCESSOR 850 P2 KEYPAD 700A CYCLE START HOLD SWITCHES 720 SP LOAD METER P4 P5 705 SPEAKER P5 P6 750A JOG HANDLE J2 150 REMOTE JOG HANDLE J3 750 MOCON P18 J5 MIKRON ONLY J7 EXTERNAL KEYBOARD J12 860C FT PANEL FAN See Keyboard Diagnostic section of this manual for Troubleshooting information 9 8102 6 159 January 1999 SE
21. 6 137 Al 138 e PARAMETERS RED BEACON CONVY DR OVRD RESERVED TC FWD CW RESERVED FLOPPY ENABL UNDEFINED MCD RLY BRD UNDEFINED AUX JOG NACC UNDEFINED RAPID EXSTOP HYDRAULICS STALL DETECT SPNDL NOWAIT Parameter 214 Parameter 215 Parameter 216 Parameter 217 Series When 1 user relay M26 is used to flash a beacon The beacon flashes if the control is experiencing an alarm or emergency stop condition When 1 the conveyor will continue to run with the door open When 0 the conveyor will stop when the door is open but will resume when the door is closed For safety it is recommended that the bit be set to 0 Not presently used Determines the direction that the turret moves as viewed from the spindle when the turret is commanded forward When 1 the turret will rotate clockwise for a forward command and when 0 it will rotate counterclockwise The default is 1 Not presently used Enables an installed floppy disk drive Not presently used If set to 1 adds 16 additional relays for a total of 56 Not presently used Does not allow accumulation on auxiliary axis jog If the jog handle is moved rapidly tha auxillary axis will not develope extremely large lags Not presently used Default is 1 When this bit is set to 1 the control will execute an exact stop after all rapid motions regardless of the next motion When set to ze
22. OVDC PIN 1 PIN 1 i 0 12VDC PIN 2 PIN2 1 1 PIN3 PIN3 i 7 12VDC PIN4 PIN4 1 2 4 PIN 5 PIN 5 i V 0 12VDC PIN 6 PING LE3 4 7 7 i x 7 S 12VDC PIN 8 PINS LE4 PIN 9 9 12VDC PIN 10 PIN10 LES H PIN 11 PIN 11 i 2 12VDC PIN 12 PIN12 LE6 4 PIN 13 PIN 13 x amp 12VDC PIN 14 PIN14 LE7 7 PIN 15 PIN 15 i 527 amp 12VDC PIN 16 PIN16 LE8 P11 CABLE 1 12VDC MOCON PCB 510 PCB x x 522 Gef s N us NOTE ANY RELAY K1 HL SERIES PAGE 8 K35 CAN BE REPLACED WITH A SOLID STATE EQUIVALENT RELAY COIL DRIVERS K1 THROUGH K8 1 99 HAAS AUTOMATION SERVO POWER ON SPINDLE FORWARD SPINDLE REVERSE SPINDLE RESET A DOOR COOLANT ON AUTO POWER OFF SPINDLE LUBE SPINDLE FAN GEAR BOX OIL PUMP WAY LUBE PUMP REGEN BOX FAN AAS 96 8710 SERVICE MANUAL January 1299 p T y di T ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS 4 PIN 1 PIN 1 N Z A e SPARE 3 0VDC 1 Z 2 1 PIN 5 PIN 5 H V e SPARE 4 PIN7 PIN 7 0VDC Z Kei ES SPARE 1 P
23. 96 8710 20 7008F 20 7185 20 8502 20 8535 20 8545 20 8723 22 2629 22 7458 24 7325 25 7042 25 7266 25 7459 25 7485 25 7486 26 7233A 30 1290A 30 8716 30 9700 32 2051 40 1610 40 1632 40 1636 40 16385 40 1639 40 16413 40 16582 40 16583 40 1667 40 1697 40 1705 40 1715 40 1750 40 1850 40 1976 NUT HOUSING LD SCREW ASSY BUMPER Z AXIS MTR END CARRIAGE MACHINED PLATE ACCESS T C COVER HOUSING T C BUMPER SUPPORT END X AXIS KEY 0 1875 0 1870 SQ CAM SCREW LINEAR GUIDE STR FIT METRIC LINEAR GUIDE COVER PLATE LD SCREW X AXIS MOUNT BRACKET TRIP BRACKET TABLE BRACKET OIL LINE CARRIER LEFT BRACKET OIL LINE CARRIER RIGHT GASKET DEFLECTOR SHEILD REMOVED LEAD SCREW ASSY X AXIS OIL LINE ASSEMBLY TOOL CHANGER ASSEMBLY LIMIT SWITCH X HOME SHCS 1 4 20 x 1 SHCS 1 4 20 x 1 2 SHCS 3 8 16 x 1 1 4 SHCS 5 16 18 x 3 4 SHCS 3 8 16 x 1 MSHCS M3 x 5 SHCS M10 x 35 SHCS M10 x 45 SHCS 5 16 18 x 1 1 4 SHCS 1 4 20 x 3 4 REMOVED FHCS 10 32 x 1 SHCS 5 16 18 x 1 1 2 BHCS 10 32 x 3 8 SHCS 10 32 x 3 8 BHCS 1 4 20 x 3 4 Series ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS IT QTY PART NO TITLE 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 DESIGNATES REMOVED PART dx k ex z ie x gt N 0 8 18 0 05 A P PB AAAS 45 0040 WA
24. Series CABLE LIST KR 9 DIGITAL GROUND FAULT RETURN ANALOG GROUND 230VAC THREE PHASE POWER TO SPINDLE MOTOR SHIELD 3 PHASE 1 PHASE 2 PHASE 3 SHIELD DRAIN 230VAC THREE PHASE POWER CONTACTOR TO SPINDLE MOTOR WYE TO DELTA OPTION PHASE 1 PHASE 2 PHASE 3 SHIELD DRAIN 230VAC THREE PHASE POWER CONTACTOR TO VECTOR DRIVE WYE TO DELTA OPTION PHASE 1 PHASE 2 PHASE 3 X AXIS ENCODER CABLE ALL 24 LOGIC RETURN D GROUND ENCODER A CHANNEL ENCODER B CHANNEL 5 VDC ENCODER Z CHANNEL OR C HOME LIMIT SWITCH OVERHEAT SWITCH ENCODER A ENCODER B ENCODER Z OR C X HALL A NOT USED X HALL B NOT USED X HALL C NOT USED X HALL D NOT USED SHIELD DRAIN NOT USED Z AXIS ENCODER CABLE SAME AS 660 1 THRU 660 16 A AXIS ENCODER CABLE SAME AS 660 1 THRU 660 16 KEYBOARD CABLE 34 WIRE RIBBON WITH IDC FROM VIDEO P4 TO KBIF P1 ANALOG SIGNAL FROM MOCON TO SPINDLE DRIVE LOAD MONITOR 0 TO 10 VOLTS SPINDLE LOAD COMMON SHIELD DRAIN 175 sy CABLE LIST 740 744 742 743 744 745 750 750 1 750 2 750 3 750 4 750 5 750 6 750 7 750 8 750 9 750 10 750 11 750 12 750 13 750 14 750 15 750 16 750A 751A 752A 753A 754A 755A 760 770 771 772 773 770A 771A 772A 773A 790 791 792 793 794 820 821 822 823 176 Series POWER ON OFF CABLE TO FRONT PANEL SHIELD 4 POWER ON SWITCH LEG 1 24 VAC 20 POWER ON SWITCH LEG 2
25. 259 260 262 263 265 268 270 271 272 Empty Prog or No E0B Invalid Code No End Bad Number Missing Unknown Code String Too Long Cursor Data Base Error Number Range Error Prog Data Begins Odd Program Data Error Prog Data Struct Error Memory Overflow Electronics Overheat Program Data Error Invalid DPRNT Format Bad Language Version Bad Language CRC Parameter CRC Missing Lead Screw CRC Missing Macro Variable File CRC Error DOOR OPEN M95 START C Servo Error Too Large C Servo Overload C Motor Overheat Series DNC program not found or no end of program found January 1999 RS 232 load bad Data was stored as comment Check the program being received Check input file for a number that has too many digits Data entered is not a number Comment must end with a Check input line or data from RS 232 This alarm can occur while editing data into a program or loading from RS 232 Input line is too long The data entry line must be shortened Software Error Call your dealer Number entry is out of range Possible corrupted program Save all programs to floppy disk delete all then reload Same as alarm v249 Same as alarm 249 Same as alarm 249 The control box temperature has exceeded 145 degrees F This can be caused by an electronics problem high room temperature or clogged air filter Same as alarm 249 Macro DPRNT statement not structured properly C
26. Parameter 226 EDITOR CLIPBOARD This parameter assigns a program number nnnnn to the contents of the clipboard for the advanced editor Parameter 227 FLOPPY DIR NAME When the floppy drive is enabled and a floppy directory is read The directory listing is placed into a program as comments The program is then made the current program so the user can read the contents of the floppy drive This parameter designates what program is used to write the directory listing to Program 08999 is the default value Parameter 228 QUICKCODE FILE This parameter set the program numbers to store in the Quickcode definition Parameter 229 X LEAD COMP 10E9 This parameter sets the X axis lead screw compensation signed parts per billion Parameter 230 Y LEAD COMP 10E9 This parameter sets the Y axis lead screw compensation signed parts per billion Parameter 231 Z LEAD COMP 10E9 This parameter sets the Z axis lead screw compensation signed parts per billion 96 8710 wll 139 Al 140 e PARAMETERS Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter 232 233 234 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 Series January 1999 A LEAD COMP 10E9 This parameter sets the A axis lead screw compensation signed parts per billion B LEAD COMP 10E9 This parameter sets the B axis
27. nM P29 P28 5 p27 93 1085 84 C4 C5 9 c1 e P3 211 729 10A 115V 115 10A 230V 10 115 P9 TSC Solenoids Coolant Main Transformer CH Coolant Pump Pumps e TB1 5 CB4 CB3 CB2 D P17 P31 P23 P24 P8 P7 P30 P14 P6 P45 TB2 Figure 4 9 Power supply board fuse locations 5 Using a flat tip screwdriver turn the fuse s counterclockwise to remove and replace the blown fuse s with ones having the same type and rating 7 amp type AGC 250 96 8710 CAUTION When the left fuse is blown it is still possible to operate the machine thereby making an overvoltage situation possible VERIFY absolute voltage to the machine does not exceed 260 volts HAAS 91 SERVICE MANUAL ELECTRICAL SERVICE 92 January 1999 Series 4 4 PCB REPLACEMENT Please read this section in its entirety before attempting to replace any PCBs Microprocessor MOCON MOTIF amp VipEo KEYBOARD WARNING An anti static strap should be worn when changing any PCB Note The arrangement of these boards may differ from the order of replacement that follows The steps for replacement will only differ in which board may need to be removed before getting to the necessary board WARNING The electrical panel will have residual voltage even after power has been shut off and or disconnected Never work inside this cabinet until the small red CHARGE light on the servo amplifiers servo driv
28. 1 Remove the sliding tool changer cover 2 Go to Setting 7 and turn off the Parameter Lock 3 Go to Parameter 43 and change Z CH ONLY to 1 4 Loosen the turret motor coupling clamp screw closest to the motor Refer to Figure 3 1 5 Press the ZERO RET key then the A key and the ZERO SINGL AXIS key This will cause the motor to go to the first encoder Z pulse 6 With the servos on move the turret motor coupling back and forth to find the center of it s backlash and tighten the clamp screw as close to the center of the backlash as possible HAAS 41 SERVICE MANUAL MECHANICAL SERVICE Pn 42 January 1999 Series Note If it is tight no backlash it will be necessary to force it in one direction or the other until it pops into it s backlash area If it gets tighter when it is turned STOP this is the wrong direction Change Parameter 43 Z CH ONLY back to 0 zero Press the ZERO RET key A key and ZERO SINGL AXIS key This will home the turret at tool 1 Press the EMERGENCY STOP button and turn the turret motor coupling back and forth to verify that the backlash is centered 10 Go to Setting 7 and turn on the Parameter Lock 11 Replace the sliding tool changer cover Clamp screw Figure 3 1 Turret motor adjustment TURRET ALIGNMENT VERIFICATION X Axis TOOLS REQUIRED MAGNETIC INDICATOR BASE V DIAL INDICATOR 0 0005 OR LESS RESOLUTION 1 2
29. 3 Press the OFSET key then scroll down to G110 or any unused offset Cursor to X and press the PART ZERO SET key This will set XO at this position 4 Enter a program that will start at the new zero position rapid a certain distance in the X direction feed the final 25 inches slowly and then repeat the X movement 5 Inorderto setup the indicator run the program in SINGLE BLOCK mode and stop it when X is at the end of it s settravel Setthe magnetic base on the spindle retainer ring or other rigid surface with the indicator tip touching the turret in the X axis and zero it 6 Exit SINGLE BLOCK mode and run the program for a few minutes Enter SINGLE BLOCK mode again stop the program when X is at the end of it s set travel and take a final reading on the indicator If the problem is thermal growth the indicator will show a difference in the X position Note Ensure the indicator setup is correct as described in Accuracy section Errors in setup are common and often incorrectly appear to be thermal growth 7 Asimilar program can be written to test for thermal growth in the Z axis SOLUTIONS Since there are many variables that affect thermal growth such as the ambient temperature of the shop and program feed rates it is difficult to give one solution for all problems Thermal growth problems can generally be eliminated by running a warm up program for approximately 20 minutes before machining parts The most effective war
30. Ge rie TECHNICAL REFERENCE 5 TECHNICAL REFERENCE Spindle speed functions are controlled primarily by the S address code The S address specifies RPM in integer values from 1 to maximum spindle speed Parameter 131 NOT TO BE CHANGED BY USER Two M codes M41 Low Gear and M42 High Gear can be used for gear selection Spindle speed accuracy is best at the higher speeds and in low gear The spindle is hardened and ground with a A2 6 A2 8 A2 11 spindle nose 5 2 TWO SPEED GEAR TRANSMISSION SL 30 AND 40 The spindle head contains a two speed gear transmission The spindle motor is directly coupled to the transmission and the transmission is cog belt coupled to the spindle pulley An electric motor drives the gearbox shifter into high or low gear LuBRICATION The gearbox is lubricated and cooled with Mobil DTE 25 oil OPERATION High gear and low gear are selected by programming an M41 Low Gear or M42 High Gear The spindle will not change gears automatically The spindle will come to a complete stop when changing gears The machine will remain in it s current gear until changed with an M41 or M42 even after the machine is powered off When the machine is powered up it will be in the same gear or between gears as when it was powered off The current gear status is monitored by discrete outputs SP HIG Spindle High and SP LOW Spindle Low 0 zero in either of these outputs indicates it is the curr
31. K30 GREEN BEACON K29 lt BL FAN FUSE N SPINDLE LUBE i SPINDLE FAN WAY LUBE PUMP REGEN BOX FAN V V 4 5 9 115 VAC CIRCUITS 1 99 HAAS AUTOMATION HL SERIES PAGE 5 189 ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS 190 Series January 1999 Wax xv _L P13 1 07 10 L Wix xv Lei P13 2 rs 6 12V xv Lei 13 3 m 6 L 12V xv 14 1 07 10 zi 12V xv Y P134 6 Waw _L P15 1 0 10 L 12V Lei 15 2 6 12V xV Y P40 2 E Q 415 12V P38 1 12V gt Lg 22 1 p LY P18 1 WW xv Ley P19 1 07 10 WW xv 17 1 07 10 Was xv 20 1 L 12V et 7 P15 3 O Jo zz 12V xv 15 4 6 IOPCB CABLE 550 DISCRETE INPUTS 1 THROUGH 16 1 99 HAAS AUTOMATION INPUT NUMBER TURRET UNLOCK 01 TURRET LOCK 02 SPARE 03 LOW COOLANT 04 A DOOR 05 IN HIGH GEAR 06 IN LOW GEAR 07 EMERGENCY STOP 08 DOOR OPEN 09 M CODE FINISH 10 971 11 OVERVOLTAGE 972 LOW AIR PRESSURE 12 SENSOR LOW WAY LUBE OIL 13 OVERHEAT SERVO REGEN 14 DRAW BAR OPEN 15 DRAW BAR CLOSED 16 NOTE SWITC
32. M FUNCTION SPARE COOLANT SPARE ITEM DESCRIPTION PAGE CNC LAYOUT SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM CABLE INTERCONNECT DIAGRAM SERVO SYSTEM MAIN TRANSFORMER CNC UNIT 115VAC CIRCUITS INPUTS IOPCB CONTROL CABINET SPINDLE REGEN RESISTORS REAR OF MACHINE GROUNDING BAR 2 2 u o o PROCESSOR ASSEMBLY lt CT CNC UNIT o o MOCON BOARD P 68030 PROCESSOR BOARD cae VIDEO BOARD a a He pa pe sre M5 sr 2 Y 3 Drive 81 14 WE Jo a LIBI fel a u SE TE 529 Z i E usa UI CHISI Be a i PRS SI o NM 7 r1 B 8 d Hee OO e i
33. P N 93 1010 150 January 1999 96 8710 PROC PLUG 31 32 33 36 J4 J5 Series MICRO PROCESSOR PCB P N 93 1010 CABLE 860 N A 850 850A CABLE CONNECTIONS SIGNAL NAME gt ADDRESS BUSS DATA BUSS LOW VOLTAGE EXTERNAL BATTERY SERIAL PORT 1 SERIAL PORT 2 HAAS TO gt LOCATION VIDEO MOTIF PCB POWER SUPPLY PCB EXT BATTERY SERIAL PORT 1 SERIAL PORT 2 CABLE LOCATIONS KR 151 Service CABLE LOCATIONS VI n y SERVICE MANUAL Series January 1999 SERVO DRIVE SIGNAL 1 1 FAULT POWER ON n IE LOW VOLTAGE INPUT 93 5550B Lr TO SERVO MOTOR m 325VDC FROM HAAS VECTOR DRIVE 92 S S 9 CH FUSE OPEN BRUSHLESS SERVO AMPLIFIER P N 93 5550B 152 96 8710 January 1999 SERVICE MANUAL Series BRUSHLESS SERVO AMPLIFIER P N 93 5550B CABLE CONNECTIONS MOCON PLUG X AXIS AMP TB HV HV Y AXIS AMP P TBA B C P TB HV HV Z AXIS AMP P TBA B C P TB HV HV A AXIS AMP P B C P TB HV HV 96 8710 CABLE 570 610 490 570 620 490 570 630 490 570 640 490 SIGNAL NAME LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR DRIVE X DRIVE SIGNAL 320VDC
34. Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 Series P GAIN See Parameter 2 for description D GAIN See Parameter 3 for description GAIN See Parameter 4 for description RATIO STEPS UNIT See Parameter 5 for description MAX TRAVEL STEPS See Parameter 6 for description ACCELERATION See Parameter 7 for description MAX SPEED See Parameter 8 for description MAX ERROR See Parameter 9 for description FUSE LEVEL See Parameter 10 for description BACKEMF See Parameter 11 for description STEPS REVOLUTION See Parameter 12 for description BACKLASH See Parameter 13 for description DEAD ZONE See Parameter 14 for description TURRET SWITCHES January 1999 See Parameter 1 for description Turret parameters take effect if Setting 30 TURRET ENABLE is on TURRET P GAIN See Parameter 2 for description TURRET D GAIN See Parameter 3 for description TURRET I GAIN See Parameter 4 for description TURRET RATIO STEPS UNIT See Parameter 5 for description HAAS 96 8710 January 1999 Parameter 48 Parameter 49 Parameter 50 Parameter 51 Parameter 52 Parameter 53 Parameter 54
35. Parameter 55 Parameter 56 SERVICE MANUAL TURRET MAX TRAVEL STEPS See Parameter 6 for description TURRET ACCELERATION See Parameter 7 for description TURRET MAX SPEED See Parameter 8 for description TURRET MAX ERROR See Parameter 9 for description TURRET FUSE LEVEL See Parameter 10 for description TURRET BACK EMF See Parameter 11 for description TURRET STEPS REVOLUTION See Parameter 12 for description TURRET BACKLASH See Parameter 13 for description TURRET DEAD ZONE See Parameter 14 for description Parameters 57 through 128 are used to control other machine dependent functions They are 96 8710 Parameter 57 REV CRANK DISABLET C DISABLE G B POF ATE STP RIGID TAP REV SPIN SYNC THREADS EX ST MD CHG SAFETY CIRC SP DR LIN AC PH LOSS DET UNDEFINED OVER T IS NC SKIP OVERSHT NONINV SP ST SP LOAD MONI SP TEMP MONI UNDEFINED ENABLE DNC ENABLE BGEDT COMMON SWITCH 1 Parameter 57 is a collection of general purpose single bit flags used to turn some functions on and off The left and right cursor arrows are used to select the function being changed All values are 0 or 1 only The function names are Reverses direction of jog handle Disables tool changer operations Disables gear box functions Stops spindle then turns the power off at EMERGENCY STOP Indicates hardware option for rigid tap Reverses sense direction of spindle encoder Threads will repeat between passes
36. Remove all tool holders and fittings from the turret Jog the X axis to the center of its travel Place the magnetic indicator base on the spindle retainer ring Position the indicator tip on the turret face so there is at least 3 5 of travel in each direction from the center of the X axis and 1 4 below the center cap Refer to Figure 3 2 Jog the X axis so the indicator is at one end travel then zero the indicator Jog the X axis to the other end of travel and check your reading tolerance 0 0003 TIR If the reading is greater than the tolerance specified the turret needs to be realigned 5 96 8710 SERVICE MANUAL January 1999 MECHANICAL SERVICE 96 8710 Series Sweep Indicator Along Face of Turret Figure 3 2 Turret alignment verification X axis Turret ALIGNMENT X Axis It is recommended that you read the following sections in their entirety before starting the alignment procedures 1 Remove the rear cover 2 Remove the sliding toolchanger cover Note Be sure to remove the 4 SHCS located behind the turret The X axis wiper may also need to be replaced if damaged 3 Remove top plate cover to the turret housing Be sure to check the gasket and See if it needs replacement 4 Remove the SHCS that mount the coolant adapter block to the turret housing The turret must be in the unclamped position
37. Selects exact stop in moves when mode changes This enables safety hardware if machine is so equipped Selects linear deceleration for rigid tapping 0 is quadratic When enabled will detect a phase loss Not presently used Selects control over temp sensor as N C Causes Skip 031 to act like Fanuc and overshoot sense point Non inverted spindle stopped status Spindle load monitor option is enabled Spindle temperature monitor option is enabled Not presently used Enables DNC selection from MDI Enables BACKGROUND EDIT mode 12 ma 25 PARAMETERS 552 272 128 ENA GRND FLT M19 SPND ORT ENABLE MACRO INVERT SKIP HANDLE CURSR NEG WORK OFS UNDEFINED ENA QUIKCODE OILER ON OFF NC OVER VOLT VEC DRV ENC DOOR STOP SP Parameter 58 Parameter 59 Parameter 60 Parameter 61 Parameter 62 Parameter 63 Parameter 64 Parameter 65 Parameter 66 Series Enables ground fault detector This bit makes the P and R codes a protected feature which can only be enabled with an unlock code The unlock code will be printed on the parameter listing of all new machines If this bit is set to 0 an M19 will orient the spindle to 0 degrees regardless of the value of any P or R code in the same block If this is set to 1 a P code in the block will cause the spindle to be oriented to the specified angle such as P180 Alternately a decimal R code can be used such as R180 53 Note that the P and R codes only work on a
38. The ALARMS DISPLAY can be selected at any time by pressing the ALARM MESGS button When there are no alarms the display will show NO ALARM If there are any alarms they will be listed with the most recent alarm at the bottom ofthe list The CURSOR and PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN buttons be used to move through a large number of alarms The CURSOR right and left buttons can be used to turn on and off the ALARM history display Note that tool changer alarms can be easily corrected by first correcting any mechanical problem pressing RESET until the alarms are clear selecting ZERO RET mode and selecting AUTO ALL AXES Some messages are displayed while editing to tell the operator what is wrong but these are not alarms See the editing topic for those errors The following alarm list shows the alarm numbers the text displayed along with the alarm and a detailed description of the alarm what can cause it when it can happen and how to correct it Alarm number and text Possible causes 101 Comm Failure During a self test of communications between the MOCON and main processor the main processor does not respond and is suspected to be dead Check cable connections and grounding 102 Servos Off Indicates that the servo motors are off the tool changer is disabled the coolant pump is off and the spindle motor is stopped Caused by EMER GENCY STOP motor faults tool changer problems or power fail 103 XServo Error Too much load
39. 1 P3 170 5 6 930 910 P8 90 860 P10 860 P11 860 P12 860 P13 860 P14 800A P15 70 P16 17 860 19 290 20 P21 PORT 1 amp 2 P22 P24 SPARE P26 860 P27 860 P30 800 P31 860A TB1 TB2 POWER 96 8710 Series CABLE CONNECTIONS SIGNAL NAME gt gt 190 260VAC INPUT K1 COIL AUTO OFF PRISEC T5 230VAC COOLANT PUMP 115VAC CB SOLENOID 115 1 LOW VOLTAGE LOW VOLTAGE LOW VOLTAGE LOW VOLTAGE LOW VOLTAGE OP LAMP TO SWITCH 230VAC K1 CONTACTORS LOW VOLTAGE FROM POWER SUPPLY 1 0 12VDC 230VAC TA 115 VAC TO LOW VOLT POWER SUPPLY 12VDC PORT 1 amp 2 12VDC SPARE LOW VOLTAGE LOW VOLTAGE 12VAC OP LAMP 12VDC 115VAC IN 115VAC OUT 740 POWER ON OFF HAAS CABLE LOCATIONS KR POWER PCB P N 93 1085 LOCATION CB1 K1 CONTACTOR 1 0 PCB T5 I O PCB 1 0 PCB 1 0 PCB POWER POWER POWER POWER POWER OP LAMP SWITCH K1 CONTACTOR 1 0 PCB POWER T4 I O PCB PROCESSOR PCB SPARE POWER POWER OPERATORS LAMP POWER T1 SECONDARY ON OFF SWITCH PLUG 155 Series 1 CABLE LOCATIONS January 1999
40. DESIGNATES PARTS AVAILABLE FROM HAAS SERVICE DEPT 1 di E el Go EE BALL SCREW ROTATED 90 January 1999 D 32mm Ball Screw Assembly ANAS Tm 96 8710 SERVICE MANUAL January 1999 Be rie P ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS ITEM QTY PART NO TITLE 1 1 30 0153 SUPPORT BEARING ASS Y 2 1 30 0154 MOTOR HOUSING BEARING 3 1 30 0156 BSREW FSTNR KIT VF E 4 H BALL SCREW ASS Y A BALL SCREW SNAP LOCK RING BMPR MOTOR MOUNT COUPLING ASS Y APPLICATION 30 0157 BS ASS Y 32mm 1 26 X 25 650 24 7146 BALLSCR 32mm 1 26 X 25 650 NONE 20 7010A 30 0211 VF 1 30 0615 BS ASS Y 32mm 1 26 X 33 268 24 9013 BALLSCR 32mm 1 26 X 33 268 20 0142 SNAP LOCK RING BMPR 6 00 20 7010A 30 0211 SL20 Z 30 0617 BS ASS Y 32mm 1 26 X 48 228 24 9012 BALLSCR 32mm 1 26 X 48 228 20 0143 SNAP LOCK RING BMPR 7 00 20 7010A 30 0211 SL30 Z 30 0451 BS ASS Y 32mm 1 26 X 25 650 24 7146 BALLSCR 32mm 1 26 X 25 650 20 0141 SNAP LOCK RING BMPR 4 00 20 7010A 30 0211 SL40 X 30 0192 BS ASS Y 32mm 1 26 X 25 650 24 7146 BALLSCR 32mm 1 26 X 25 650 NONE 20 7010 30 1220P VF 2 OEB X 30 0193 BS ASS Y 32mm 1 26 X 35 650 24 7147 BALLSCR 32mm 1 26 X 35 650 NONE 20 7010 30
41. Internal Program Error Queue Advance Error Queue Allocation Error Queue Cutter Comp Error Insufficient Memory SERVICE MANUAL January 1999 Series Same as alarm 182 Same as talarm 82 Same as alarm 182 Trying to feed while spindle is in the stopped position Same as alarm 103 Same as alarm 108 Same as alarm 135 Same as alarm 139 Same as alarm 145 Same as alarm 153 Same as alarm 161 Same as alarm 165 Same as 182 Call your dealer Control senses that no spindle fault has occurred the spindle is at speed yet the spindle is not turning Possibly the belt between the spindle drive motor and spindle has slipped or is broken Internal software error call your dealer Parameters lost maybe by low battery Check for a low battery and low battery alarm Settings lost maybe by low battery Check for a low battery and low battery alarm Lead screw compensation tables lost maybe by low battery Check for CRC Error low battery and low battery alarm Offsets lost maybe by low battery Check for a low battery and low battery alarm Users program lost maybe by low battery Check for a low battery and low battery alarm Possible corrupted program Save all programs to floppy disk delete all then reload Check for a low battery and low battery alarm Software Error Call your dealer Software Error Call your dealer Software Error Call your dealer Not enough memory to store users program Check the s
42. MAINTENANCE PERFORMED 555555 Check coolant level Check way lube lubrication tank level Clean chips from way covers and bottom pan Clean chips from turret and housing Check hydraulic unit oil level DTE 25 ONLY Capacity 8 gallons Grease chuck with the included grease gun Check for proper operation of auto drain on filter regulator Check air gauge regulator for 85 psi Clean exterior surfaces with mild cleaner DO NOT use solvents Clean out small chip catch pan in coolant tank Inspect way covers for proper operation and lubricate with light oil if necessary Remove coolant pump form the coolant tank Clean sediment from inside the tank Reinstall the pump CAUTION Be careful to disconnect the coolant pump from the controller and to POWER OFF the control before working on the coolant tank Dump the oil drain bucket Check gearbox oil level if applicable If oil is not visible at the bottom edge of the sight gauge remove the end panel and add DTE 25 through the top filler hole until it is visible in the sight gauge Replace coolant and thoroughly clean the coolant tank Replace hydraulic unit oil filter Check all hoses and lubrication lines for cracking Replace gearbox oil With the air pressure OFF disassemble and clean the small filter at end of lubricator right side of machine Clean oil filter and remove residue from the bottom of filter Replace air filter on control box every 2 years The filter b
43. The maximum delay time control will wait for spindle to get to commanded speed or to get to zero speed Units are milliseconds M MACRO CALL 09000 M code that will call 09000 Zero causes no call M MACRO CALL 09001 same as 81 M MACRO CALL 09002 same as 81 M MACRO CALL 09003 same as 81 M MACRO CALL 09004 same as 81 M MACRO CALL 09005 same as 81 M MACRO CALL 09006 same as 81 M MACRO CALL 09007 same as 81 M MACRO CALL 09008 same as 81 M MACRO CALL 09009 same as 81 G MACRO CALL 09010 G code that will call 09010 Zero causes no call G MACRO CALL 09011 same as 91 G MACRO CALL 09012 same as 91 G MACRO CALL 09013 same as 91 G MACRO CALL 09014 same as 91 G MACRO CALL 09015 same as 91 G MACRO CALL 09016 same as 91 G MACRO CALL 09017 same as 91 G MACRO CALL 09018 same as 91 G MACRO CALL 09019 same as 91 IN POSITION LIMIT X How close motor must be to endpoint before any move is considered complete when not in exact stop 009 or G61 Units are encoder steps IN POSITION LIMIT Y Same definition as Parameter 101 IN POSITION LIMIT Z Same definition as Parameter 101 IN POSITION LIMIT A Same definition as Parameter 101 XMAX CURRENT Fuse level in of max power to motor Applies only when motor is stopped Y MAX CURRENT Same definition as Parameter 105 Z MAX CURRENT Same definition as Parameter 105 A CURRENT Same definition as Parameter 105 HAAS January 1999 96 8710 January 1999 96 8710 Paramete
44. pressure switch Figure 4 3 Top view of spindle lube air solenoid assembly INSTALLATION 6 Reattach the solenoid assembly at the T fitting 7 Reattach the pressure gauge onto the solenoid assembly 8 Reconnect the lube line to the assembly 9 Reconnect the electrical leads to the main air line pressure switch 10 Restore the air supply to the machine 96 8710 2 85 January 1999 SERVICE MANUAL ELECTRICAL SERVICE Series 4 2 LINE VOLTAGE ADJUSTMENTS Please read this section in its entirety before attempting to adjust the line voltage TOOLS REQUIRED v LARGE FLAT TIP SCREWDRIVER v DIGITAL VOLTMETER ADJUSTING VOLTAGE Note The machine must have air pressure at the air gauge or an interlock will prevent it from powering up CAUTION Working with the electrical services required for the lathe can be extremely hazardous The electrical power must be off and steps must be taken to ensure that it will not be turned on while you are working with it In most cases this means turning off a circuit breaker in a panel and then locking the panel door However if your connection is different or you are not sure how to do this check with the appropriate personnel in your organization or otherwise obtain the necessary help BEFORE you continue WARNING The electrical panel should be closed and the three screws on the door should be secured a
45. the LED s on the processor PCB will or will not be lit If the machine powers up but has a fault in one of its power supplies it may not be possible to flag an alarm condition If this happens all motors will be kept off and the top left corner of the CRT will have the message POWER FAILURE ALARM and all other functions of the control will be locked out When the machine is operating normally a second push of the PARAM DGNOS key will select the diagnostics display page The PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN keys are then used to select one of two different displays These are for diagnostic purposes only and the user will not normally need them The diagnostic data consists of 32 discrete input signals 32 discrete output relays and several internal control signals Each can have the value of 0 or 1 In addition there are up to three analog data displays and an optional spindle RPM display Their number and functions are 96 8710 119 SERVICE MANUAL TECHNICAL REFERENCE lt rie ag January 1999 5 16 DISCRETE INPUTS OUTPUTS DISCRETE INPUTS Name Description 1000 Tool Turret Unlock 1016 Spindle Lock Vector Drive Spare 1001 Tool Turret Lock 1017 Spindle Fault Vector Drive Spare 1002 spare 1018 Spindle Stopped Vector Drive Spare 1003 Low Coolant 1019 Spindle At Speed Vector Drive Spare 1004 Automatic door 1020 Low hyd pressure 1005 Spindle In Hi Gear 1021 T S Foot Switch 1006 Spindle In Lo
46. u X 2 5 N Se N ANN CS N 5 LA AS LXX L4 Sekt 2X l3 cx p DESIGNATES REMOVED PART Series DESCRIPTION SHCS 3 8 16 x 1 SSS CUP PT 10 32 x 1 4 SHCS 3 8 16 x 2 1 2 SHCS 5 1 6 18 X 1 1 4 FHCS 10 32 x 1 2 SHCS 5 16 18 x 1 3 4 SHCS 8 32 x 3 4 SHCS 8 32 x 3 8 SHCS 10 32 x 3 8 BHCS 1 4 20 X 1 1 2 HHB 1 2 20 x 1 1 2 HHB 5 16 18 x 1 WASHER BLK HARD 1 4 A 325 WASHER SPLIT LOCK 10 MEDIUM WASHER ARBOR BEARING NUT N 13 PIN PULL 1 2 x 1 SHOULDER BOLT 3 8 x 1 1 2 WASHER STEEL BEARING LOCK NUT BH 04 THRUST WASHER THRUST WASHER BEARING THRUST NEEDLE ASSY BALL BEARING RETAIN RING RR 300 RETAIN RING N5100 150 O RING 422 109 BUNA SEAL C R 29841 O RING BUNA 2 258 O RING 2 021 BUNA O RING 2 023 BUNA SEAL TURRET SHAFT O RING 2 150 BUNA SEAL WORM SHAFT O RING 2 172 PARKER O RING 240 ALL SEALS O RING 2 130 BUNA O RING 2 039N525 60 PRKR GASKET PLATE COOLANT T H TUBING COOLANT FRONT 3 4 STEEL BALLS 5 16 STEEL BALL SPRING TURRET COUPLING SERVO MOTOR YASKAWA ELECTRICAL GREASE 3 OZ TUBE PIPE PLUG NPT HAAS January 1999 96 8710 SERVICE MANUAL January 1999 Sp re es n ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS 65 10 68 15 55 33 54 40 2814642085 170 71 39 32 75 63 K4 5 145 73 67 1 47 83 60 66 23 64
47. 1 Remove the chuck or collet nose from the Lathe and the necessary covers to gain access to the spindle assembly 2 Disconnect oil return hose and coolant drain hose after powering OFF machine 3 Loosen the clamp and unclamp hoses then remove 4 Loosen the SHCS from the adapter and detach the hydraulic cylinder 5 Loosen the eight SHCS on the inside of adapter and detach from spindle shaft Hydraulic cylinder Test Indication Coolant collector Coolant drain hose Figure 3 8 Hydraulic cylinder 6 Unplug the encoder Unscrew the encoder bracket remove the encoder then remove the belt 7 Loosen the four SHCS holding the spindle motor Slide the motor up by squeezing the belts Tighten the SHCS and remove the drive belts from the spindle assembly 8 Loosen the six SHCS and remove the spindle drive pulley 9 Disconnect the two lubrication hoses and unscrew the fittings from the spindle housing Note the di rection of the flat sides of the fittings for lubricating the spindle bearings 10 Unscrew the six SHCS holding the spindle retaining ring and remove Also remove the O ring 11 Remove Spindle Carefully For SL 40 spindle removal contact HAAS Service for removal tool O F o hMh 96 8710 SERVICE MANUAL January 1999 NOo gt oD Os TLPP ss MECHANICAL SERVICE 96 8710 Series Tools Required V 1 Blue Loctite V 1 1 2
48. 1000 P20 720 660 P16 SP DRIVE LOAD XENCODER P6 670 640 YENCODER P7 hae VECTOR DRIVE CURRENT CMDS ZENCODER 680 ao NOT USED ON LATHES 850 A DRIVE SIG AENCODER BOARD P4 630 Z DRIVE SIG 90B 620 BENCODER 690 P3 510 Y DRIVE SIG LIVE TOOLING ENCODER 690 2 DRIVE SIG P15 ADDRESS BUS DATA BUS 860 P19 P4 LOW VOLTAGE POWER VIDEO FLOPPY BOARD 5232 USER SERIAL PORT FLOPPY J12 J3 700 DRIVE KEYBOARD TO OPERATOR PENDANT FLOPPY POWER 0 P13 760 VIDEO TO OPERATOR PENDANT SPARE J11 P1 ADDRESS BUS DATA BUS 860 LOW VOLTAGE POWER J4 J5 EXT BAT s2 6 J5 J4 1 850 RS 232 BATTERY 290A INDEXER P3 ADDRESS BUS DATA BUS 860 J1 J2 LOW VOLTAGE POWER CNC UNIT 1 99 HAAS AUTOM ATION HL SERIES PAGE 4 AHAS 96 8710 January 1999 SERVICE MANUAL ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Series 115 VAC 3 PHASE FROM T1 m THESE RELAYS OPERATOR ARE SOLID STATE PENDANT EQUIVALENT C HEAT EXCHANGER REAR OF CONTROL CABINET HIGH GEAR ds Sv S LOW GEAR C K14 SPINDLE UNCLAMP 15 RUE SPINDLE LOCK K16 DOOR LOCK EUROPE Ke TOOL TURRET OUT K21 SPARE DOOR K5 SPARE T BRAKE K23 RED BEACON
49. 1220P VF 3 Y 0 30 0194 BS ASS Y 32mm 1 26 X 35 650 24 7147 5 32mm 1 26 X 35 650 NONE 20 7010A 30 0211 VF O E 30 0195 BS ASS Y 32mm 1 26 X 48 228 24 9012 BALLSCR 32mm 1 26 X 48 228 NONE 20 7010A 30 0211 VF 3 30 0196 BSASS Y 32mm 1 26 X 33 268 24 9013 BALLSCR 32mm 1 26 X 33 268 NONE 20 7010A 30 0211 VF 3 4 5 30 0197 BSASS Y 32mm 1 26 X 58 485 24 9306 BALLSCR 32mm 1 26 X 58 485 NONE 20 7010A 30 0211 VF 4 5 30 0618 BSASS Y 32mm 1 26 16 475 24 8765 BALLSCR 32mm 1 26 X 16 475 NONE 20 7010A 30 0211 SL30 30 0616 85 ASS Y 32mm 1 26 X 13 525 24 9548 BALLSCR 32mm 1 26 X 13 525 NONE 20 7010A 30 0211 SL20 X DESIGNATES REMOVED PART 96 8710 237 SERVICE MANUAL ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS Se rie January 1999 COUPLING ASSY B 6 A 5 SEE TABLE M dM 1 4 3 SEE TABLE DESIGNATES PARTS AVAILABLE FROM HAAS SERVICE DEPT ITEM QTY PART NO TITLE 1 1 20 0151 MOTOR MOUNT 40 50mm BS MACH 2 1 20 9213 SPACER RING 40mm BALL SCREW 3 1 30 0472 SUPPORT BEARING ASSY 4 1 30 1222 BALL SCREW SUPPORT BEARING ASSY 5 2 51 0008 BEARING LOCKNUT TCN 06 F Js 6 1 20 0142 SNAP LOCK RING BMPR 7 1 20 0146 SNAP LOCK RING BMPR FOR 30 0450 ONLY 40mm Ball Scre
50. 20 N O POWER OFF SWITCH LEG 1 24 VAC 20 POWER OFF SWITCH LEG 2 20 N C SHIELD DRAIN January 1999 JOG CRANK DATA CABLE REM JOG SIDE CONNECTION ALL 24 LOGIC RETURN D GROUND 0 VDC ENCODER A CHANNEL ENCODER B CHANNEL 5 VDC JUMPER TO 750 1 0 VDC X AXIS Y AXIS ENCODER A CHANNEL ENCODER B CHANNEL JUMPER TO 750 4 5VDC Z AXIS A AXIS X 10 X1 SHIELD DRAIN NOT USED JOG HANDLE DATA CABLE SHIELD 4 ALL 24 5 VDC 0 VDC ENCODER A CHANNEL ENCODER B CHANNEL SHIELD DRAIN MONITOR VIDEO DATA CABLE SHIELD 7 ALL 24 FROM VIDEO P3 TO CRT EMERGENCY STOP INPUT CABLE SHIELD 2 SIGNAL 20 RETURN D GROUND 20 SHIELD DRAIN SECOND E STOP BARFEEDER OPTION SIGNAL 20 RETURN D GROUND 20 SHIELD DRAIN SPARE INPUTS FROM IOPCB P24 PROBE HOME OPTION SPARE 1 SPARE 2 COMMON SHIELD DRAIN TOOL CHANGER STATUS SHIELD 7 ALL 20 TURRET UNCLAMPED TURRET CLAMPED UNUSED ATMA 5 TOS 7 968710 January 1999 824 825 826 830 831 832 833 850 850A 860 861 862 863 864 865 860A 861 865 863 860B 8600 870 871 872 880A 881 882 883 884 885 886 887 880B 881 882 883 890 891 892 893 894 895 896 897 96 8710 Series CABLE LIST KR 9 PART LOAD DATA GROUND SHIELD DRAIN OVERHEAT THERMOSTAT SHIELD 2 OVERHEAT SIGNAL 20 OVERHEAT RETURN D GROUND 20 SHIELD DRAIN SERIAL PORT 1 INTERFACE CABLE 16 WIRE
51. 317 318 319 320 321 322 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 332 333 334 335 No Code In M97 M98 or G65 Subprogram or Macro Not In Memory Invalid P Code In M97 M98 or M99 X Over Travel Range Y Over Travel Range Z Over Travel Range A Over Travel Range No Feed Rate Specified Auto Off Alarm Sub Prog Without M99 Delay Time Range Error Queue Full G04 Without P Code No Loop For M Code Except M97 M98 Invalid Tool Number Undefined M Code Undefined Macro Call Range Error H and T Not Matched X Axis Disabled Y Axis Disabled Z Axis Disabled Series Must put subprogram number in P code January 1999 Check that a subroutine is in memory or that a macro is defined The P code must be the name of a program stored in memory without a decimal point for M98 and must be a valid N number for M99 G70 71 72 and 73 X axis will exceed stored stroke limits This is a parameter in negative direction and is machine zero in the positive direction This will only occur during the operation of a user s program Same as alarm 316 Same as alarm 316 Not normally possible with A axis Must have a valid F code for interpolation functions A fault turned off the servos automatically occurs in debug mode only Add an M99 code to the end of program called as a subroutine P code G04 is greater than or equal to 1000 seconds over 999999 milliseconds Control proble
52. 35 20 40 1715 36 6 40 1750 37 2 40 1850 38 18 40 1960 96 8710 REMOVED BUMPER REMOVED BUMPER CARRIAGE MACHINED HL 5 6 X RISER MACHINED LINK ROTATING SPRING T C PLATE ACCESS T C COVER HOUSING T C BUSHING SWING ARM SPRING NUT HOUSING KEY 1875 1870 SQUARE CAM LINEAR GUIDE BRACKET SPRING T C STR FIT METRIC LINEAR GUIDE REMOVED COVER PLATE LEAD SCREW REMOVED BUMPER BRACKET Y AXIS MOUNTING BRACKET USED ON X LIMIT SWITCH TRIP BRACKET TABLE BRACKET OIL LINE CARRIER LFT BRACKET OIL LINE CARRIER RGT GASKET DEFLECTOR SHIELD TOOL CHANGER ASSEMBLY BL LEAD SCREW ASSEMBLY X AXIS OIL LINE ASSEMBLY LIMIT SWITCH X HOME SHCS 1 4 20 x 1 REMOVED SHCS 1 4 20 x 1 2 SHCS 3 8 16 x 1 MSHCS M3 x 5 MSHCS M12 x 50 SHCS 1 2 13 x 3 1 2 SHCS 5 16 18 x 1 HHB 1 2 13 x 1 SHCS 1 4 20 x 3 4 FHCS 10 32 x 1 SHCS 5 16 18 x 1 1 2 BHCS 10 32 x 3 8 SHCS 10 32 x 3 8 SHCS 3 8 16 x 1 3 4 Series ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS O ITEM QTY PART NO TITLE 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 NN A bh 4 NON N Si et xoci Ky N N m gt AAAS 40 1976 45 0040 45 1600 45 1620 45 1740 45 1800 46 1720 48 0045 50 9011 57 0075 57 0080 57 8546 57 8576 58 2010 58 2130 58 3031 59 6150A 5
53. 4 20 x 1 2 HHB 5 16 18 X 4 WASHER 5 16 USS STANDARD WASHER SPLIT LOCK 5 16 MED WASHER SPLIT LOCK 10 MED WASHER BLK HARD 3 8 PTHS 1 4 20 x 3 4 BLK OX HEX BLK OX 1 4 20 NUT HEX 1 2 13 PLATED NUT HEX 3 8 16 PIN PULL 3 8 X 1 1 2 LINEAR GUIDE O RING 2 021 BUNA O RING 2 023 BUNA O RING 2 318 BUNA 1 8 NPT CONN NYLON TUBING 1 4 IN CL NYLON TUBING 5 32 SLEEVE LUBE ASSEMBLY SLEEVE NUTS LUBE ASSEMBLY SLEEVE COMP NYLON TUBING FITTING MANIFOLD 2 WAY BANJO ELBOW 5 16 F x M6 M ELBOW 5 16 24 TO 5 16 24 HOSE BARB 1 2 X 3 8 NPT MALE TEE 3 8 FPT X 38 FPT X 1 4 FPT 1 4 NPT MALE 1 8 FEMALE REDUCER FOOT SWITCH W FLEX COND PLASTIC CARRIER SEALED PLASTIC CARRIER ENDS GUIDE WHEEL PLUG GUIDE RAIL GROMMET RUBBER 330 SPRING CROSS SLIDE HL 1 2 SERVO MOTOR YASKAWA CABLE CLAMP 1 4 HPU NO T S EXT GUAGE ELECTRICAL GREASE 3 OZ TUBE 205 SERVICE MANUAL ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS Se rie 1999 43148 68 67 5 6 542782 rei 1 free kaa
54. 62 9 46 1720 63 6 46 1730 64 4 48 0045 65 2 50 9010 66 1 57 0075 67 1 57 0080 68 1 57 0100 69 4 58 1560 70 25FT 58 2000 71 58 2010 72 2 58 2100 73 2 58 2110 74 1 58 2111 75 4 58 2130 76 1 58 2760 77 1 58 3031 78 1 58 3045 79 1 58 8850 80 6 6F 59 6150 81 2 59 6153 82 1 59 6400 83 34 59 6655 84 6 59 7201 85 1 59 8779 86 1 62 0013 87 8 70 0020 88 1 90 7000 89 0 05 99 4521 DESIGNATES REMOVED PART AAAS ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS DESCRIPTION SHCS 5 16 18 x 1 1 2 SHCS 3 4 10 x 3 1 4 SHCS 10 32 x 3 8 FBHCS 1 4 20 x 1 2 SHCS 10 32 x 1 1 4 SHCS 1 4 20 x 1 3 4 HHB 1 2 13 x 6 WASHER 5 16 USS STANDARD WASHER BLK HARD 1 4 WASHER SPLIT LOCK 5 16 MED WASHER SPLIT LOCK 10 WASHER SPLIT LOCK 3 4 MED WASHER BLK HARD 3 8 WASHER BLK HARD 1 2 PTHS 1 4 20 x 3 4 BLK OX NUT HEX BLK OX 1 4 20 NUT HEX 1 2 13 NUT HEX 3 8 16 PIN PULL 3 8 x 1 1 2 LINEAR GUIDE O RING 2 021 BUNA O RING 2 023 BUNA O RING 2 318 BUNA ADPT 1 8 M BSPT TO 5 16 NYLON TUBING 1 4 CL NYLON TUBING 5 32 CL SLEEVE SLEEVE NUT COMPRESSION NUT SLEEVE COMP NYLON TUBING FITTING MANIFOLD 2 WAY BANJO ELBOW 5 16 F x M6 M ELBOW 5 16 24 TO 5 16 24 TUBE Z AXIS CONNECTION PLASTIC CARRIER PLASTIC CARRIER END GUIDE WHEEL PLUG GUIDE RAIL GROMMET RUBBER 330 SPRING CROSS SLIDE SERVO MOTOR YASKAWA PLT1 5M CABLE TIES HI LO HYDRAULIC PWR UNIT ELECTRICAL GREASE
55. 8557 BUSHING FRONT TURRET 24 2 22 8543 KEY TURRET T C 25 1 22 8544 KEY GEAR SPUR T C 26 1 22 8550 SPACER BELLEVILLE 27 2 24 4010 BELLEVILLE WASHER 28 1 25 7459 TRIP BRACKET TABLE 29 1 25 8534 BRACKET HOME SWITCH 30 1 25 8536 BRACKET LIMIT SWITCH T C 31 10 25 8731 PLATE COVER COOLANT 32 1 30 0211 COUPLING ASSEMBLY 33 1 30 3650 AIR CYLINDER ASSY 34 1 30 3655 XFER COOLANT LINE ASSY 35 1 30 3660 XFER COOLANT TIP ASSY 36 1 32 2010 TELEMECH 24 IN CABLE ASSY 37 1 32 2153 LIMIT SWITCH UNCLAMP 38 1 32 2154 LIMIT SWITCH CLAMP 39 10 40 0014 SHCS 7 16 14 X 1 3 4 40 10 40 0015 SHCS 7 16 14 X 2 1 4 41 14 40 1500 SHCS 5 16 18 x 1 42 8 40 1610 SHCS 1 4 20 x 1 43 2 40 1631 SHCS 1 4 20 x 3 8 44 13 40 1632 SHCS 1 4 20 x 1 2 45 1 40 16372 SHCS 3 8 16 x 1 1 2 46 2 40 16385 SHCS 5 16 18 x 3 4 DESIGNATES REMOVED PART 96 8710 229 ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS ITEM 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 230 PART NO 40 1639 40 16403 40 1643 40 1667 40 1703 40 1716 40 1800 40 1801 40 1850 40 1978 43 1614 43 7006 45 0040 45 1620 45 2001 46 7016 48 0049 49 1010 49 4115 51 2042 51 2983 51 2984 51 3001 51 7001 56 2090 56 9057 57 0026 57 0029 57 0030 57 0075 57 0080 57 1045 57 2022 57 2129 57 2150 57 2154 57 2831 57 2994 57 8970 58 8657 59 2056 59 2057 59 3011 62 0013 99 4521 58 3105 zx gt 225
56. 90B 115 VAC TO HEAT EXCHANGER SHIELD 2 91B 115VAC 16 92B RETURN 716 93B SHIELD DRAIN 68710 171 41 CABLE LIST 90 91 920 93 110 140 141 142 143 144 145 140 141 142B 143B 160 161 162 163 164 170 171 172 173 180 181 182 190 191 192 193 200 201 202 210 230 231 232 233 240 241 242 243 244 172 Series 115 TO 084 SHIELD 2 115VAC 20 RETURN 20 SHIELD DRAIN SPARE 115 VAC SERVO POWER 230VAC 3PH POWER TO CHIP CONVEYOR MOTOR PHASE A 230VAC PHASE B 230VAC PHASE C 230VAC STARTING WINDING 230VAC STARTING WINDING 230VAC 230VAC 3PH POWER IN CONDUIT TO CHIP CONVEYOR PHASE A 230VAC PHASE B 230VAC PHASE C 230VAC 3PH 230VAC TO CHIP CONVEYOR CONTROLLER PHASE A 230VAC PHASE B 230VAC PHASE C 230VAC SHIELD DRAIN AUTO OFF FUNCTION SHIELD 2 UNSWITCHED LEG 1 20 SWITCHED LEG 2 20 SHIELD DRAIN SPARE SIGNAL COMMON UNCLAMP FROM SPINDLE HEAD TO IOASM INPUT 25 DIGITAL RETURN SHIELD DRAIN SPARE 12VDC RETURN DATA CABLE TO 3 FLOPPY DISK DRIVE 34 PINS TAILSTOCK FORWARD OPTION 115VAC 115VAC RETURN SHIELD DRAIN BARFEEDER OPTION END OF BAR 20 LOADER OK 20 COMMON 20 SHIELD DRAIN HAAS January 1999 96 8710 January 1999 250 251 252 253 260 270 271 272 273 280 281 282 283 284 290 291 292 293 300 301 302 303 330 331 332 333 340 341
57. ALL 24 LOGIC RETURN D GROUND ENCODER A CHANNEL ENCODER B CHANNEL 5 VDC ENCODER Z CHANNEL NOT USED NOT USED ENCODER A CHANNEL ENCODER B CHANNEL ENCODER Z CHANNEL NOT USED NOT USED NOT USED NOT USED SHIELD DRAIN NOT USED SPINDLE TEMPERATURE SENSOR CABLE SHIELD 3 SIGNAL ANALOG RETURN 5 VOLTS TO SENSOR SHIELD GROUND SPINDLE LOAD RESISTOR SHIELD 2 REGEN LOAD RESISTOR FOR SPINDLE DRIVE B1 14 REGEN LOAD RESISTOR FOR SPINDLE DRIVE B2 14 SHIELD DRAIN 115VAC TO MIKRON DOOR INTERLOCK SWITCH SHIELD 2 115VAC 20 RETURN 20 SHIELD DRAIN DOOR SWITCH INPUT SHIELD 2 DOOR OPEN SIGNAL 20 DOOR OPEN RETURN D GROUND 20 SHIELD DRAIN 179 SERVICE MANUAL CABLE LIST January 1999 Series 1060 GROUND FAULT DETECTION SENSE INPUT 1061 INPUT FROM SENSE RESISTOR 1062 INPUT FROM SENSE RESISTOR 1070 SKIP INPUT FROM SENSOR SHIELD 2 1071 LOGIC COMMON 1072 SKIP SIGNAL 1073 SHIELD DRAIN 180 Ga 96 8710 SERVICE MANUAL January 1999 vF m x y di ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS ELECTRICAL WIRING DIAGRAMS meng Af ff 181 ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Series 182 SIDE VIEW FLOPPY DRIVE LABEL OPTIONAL RS 232 INDEXER PORT D 82 2 z XAXIS 29 TW OPERATOR PENDANT ZAXIS TURRET 2 SPARE gt TAILSTOCK 2 LIMIT SWITCHES i CHIP CONVEYOR
58. CONTROL BOX STR FIT METRIC LINEAR GUIDE COVER PLATE LEAD SCREW BUMPER BRACKET X AXIS MOUNTING BRACKET BRACKET OIL LINE CARRIER L BRACKET SUPPORT ROLLER EXT BRACKET SUPPORT ROLLER BASE COVER SUPPORT BACK COVER RAIL INTERFACE CABLE CLAMP BASE LONG COOLANT TANK SEAL SEAL RAIL WIPER Z AXIS LUBE LINE ASSY TELEMECHANIQUE 85 IN Z AXIS SHCS 5 16 18 x 1 BHCS 10 32 X 1 2 BHCS 10 32 X 1 SHCS 1 4 20 x 1 2 SHCS 3 8 16 X 1 MSHCS M3 x 5 SHCS 3 8 16 x 3 SHCS 3 8 16 x 4 SHCS 1 2 13 X 1 SHCS M10 x 45 SHCS 1 2 13 X 3 1 2 SHCS 5 16 18 x 1 1 4 Series ITEM QTY PART NO 46 2 40 1675 47 11 40 1697 48 6 40 1705 49 10 40 1715 50 9 40 1750 51 8 40 1850 52 23 40 1981 53 2 43 7011 54 12 45 0008 55 4 45 1600 56 8 45 1620 57 6 45 1730 58 1 45 1860 59 1 46 1625 60 1 46 1720 61 6 46 1730 62 4 48 0045 63 2 50 3400 64 1 57 0075 65 1 57 0080 66 1 57 0100 67 1 58 1550 68 10 58 2000 69 18 58 2010 70 2 58 2100 71 2 58 2110 72 8 58 2130 73 1 58 2760 74 1 58 3031 75 1 58 3045 76 2 58 3048 77 1 58 3084 78 1 58 3670 79 2 59 1054 80 0 916 59 6150 81 2 59 6153 82 1 59 6400 83 68 59 6600 84 6 59 7201 85 1 59 8508 86 1 62 0013 87 4 63 1031 88 1 90 7001 89 0 05 99 4521 DESIGNATES REMOVED PART AAAS ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS TITLE SHCS 5 16 18 X 2 1 4 SHCS 1 4 20 x 3 4 FHCS 10 32 x 1 SHCS 5 16 18 x 1 1 2 BHCS 10 32 x 3 8 SHCS 10 32 x 3 8 FBHCS 1
59. Call your dealer Indicates that the probe arm was pulled down while a program was running Error occurred in phasing initialization of brushless motor This can be caused by a bad encoder or a cabling error Same as alarm 217 Same as alarm 217 Same as alarm 217 Same as alarm 217 Same as alarm 217 In machines equipped with safety interlocks this alarm occurs when the control senses the door is open but itis locked Check the door lock circuit Illegal transition of count pulses in X axis This alarm usually indicates that the encoder has been damaged and encoder position data is unreliable This can also be caused by loose connectors at the MOCON or MOTIF PCB Same as alarm 224 Same as alarm 224 Same as alarm 224 Same as alarm 224 Same as alarm 224 Same as alarm 224 Same as alarm 224 Cable from jog handle encoder does not have valid differential signals Cable from spindle encoder does not have valid differential signals Same as alarm 139 This alarm is generated in machines equipped with a Haas vector drive if the spindle motor becomes overloaded The error between the commanded spindle speed and the actual speed has exceeded the maximum allowable as set in Parameter 184 HAAS 27 e ALARMS oOVp r T 28 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 257 258
60. FLAT WASHER 1 2 SAE NUT HEX 1 2 13 WASHER 8 SEALING BALL BEARING 120 mm I D TIMING PULLEY TIMING BELT 340XL037 1 5P V BELT 5VX670 O RING 265 N 70 PIPE PLUG 1 4 NPT ENCODER 2000 LINE AAAS ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS 225 January 1999 SERVICE MIANUAL ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS Series 24118111 FARSIDE DESIGNATES PARTS AVAILABLE FROM HAAS SERVICE DEPT SL 40 Spindle Assembly 226 __ ___ ALLA 96 8710 January 1999 ITEM QTY PART NO 1 1 20 8201 2 1 20 8222 3 1 20 8223 4 1 20 8224 5 1 20 8225 6 1 20 8226 K 1 20 8227 8 1 20 8229 9 1 20 8230 10 1 20 8290 11 2 20 8314 12 16 40 16372 13 1 40 16391 14 4 40 1661 15 8 40 1667 16 4 40 1805 17 4 45 1740 18 2 46 1720 19 4 49 4110 20 1 51 0016 21 1 51 0009 22 4 54 0011 23 1 57 0035 24 2 58 3050 25 1 58 3105 26 1 60 1820 Series TITLE SPINDLE HOUSING MACHINE SHAFT SPINDLE SPACER BEARING SPINDLE RING CLAMP BEARING RING RETAINER SPINDLE ADAPTER CYL HYD PULLEY DRIVE SPINDLE PULLEY TIMING SPINDLE PULLEY TIMING ENCODER BUTTON DRIVE 8 NOZZLE OIL MIST SHCS 3 8 16 X 1 1 2 SHCS 3 8 16 X 1 2 SHCS 1 2 13 X2 SHCS 5 16 18 X 1 1 4 SHCS 8 32 X 5 8 WASHER BLK HARD 1 2 NUT HEX 1 2 13 PLATED WASHER 8 SEALING S S BALL BEARING 170MM I D TIMING BELT 480L V
61. Grid Offset The Ratio steps unit for the X Z and A axes are the values in Parameters 5 33 and 47 respectively 4 ZERO RET the axis again to use this offset Note If X axis grid offset is reset Parameter 254 should be checked and adjusted accordingly g aga 567 SERVICE MANUAL MECHANICAL SERVICE 68 Series 3 6 LUBE AIR PANEL gt gt 4 9 7 00 O e k Figure 3 19 Lube Air Panel Front View Air PANEL COMPONENTS The following is a list of the Lube Air Panel Assembly components each with a description of its specific function 1 2 Oil Pressure Gauge Indicates the pressure in psi at which the oil is pumped from the reservoir Oil Pump Pumps the oil from the reservoir to various parts of the lathe Every 30 minutes the pump cycles and pumps 2 8 to 3 8 cc of oil at approximately 20 psi Oil Reservoir Stores the oil Vactra 2 that is used for lubrication in the linear guides and lead screws Oil is also mixed with air and sent to the spindle bearing for lubrication and cooling Oil Filter Filters the oil from the reservoir before it is pumped to the necessary areas Air Pressure Gauge Indicates the pressure in psi at which the air is being regulated Air Filter Filters the air and
62. If the noise occurs the motor has failed and the transmission must be replaced Gears Witt CHANGE Machine will not execute a gear change e Check the voltage to the gear shifter motor The voltage between pins 2 and 3 should be approximately 28V when high gear is commanded and 28V when low gear is commanded If these voltages correct the gear shifter motor has failed and the transmission must be replaced If these voltages are incorrect the cabling or transmission power supply is at fault INCORRECT GEAR SELECTED OR SENSED Spindle speed is not consistent with selected gear e Monitor the discrete inputs and outputs SP HIG and SP LOW on the Diagnostics display while commanding high and low gear The output SP HIG should be 1 when high gear is selected and SP LOW should be 1 when low gear is selected The inputs SP HIG and SP LOW should be 0 when that gear is engaged and should both be 1 when the transmission is between gears These inputs should never read 0 at the same time If any of these inputs outputs are incorrect either the gear change limit switches or the wiring to the I O PCB is at fault The limit switches are located inside the transmission and cannot be replaced 958710 11 January 1999 SERVICE MANUAL EZ TROUBLESHOOTING Series 1 4 SERVO MOTORS LEADSCREWS Not OPERATING All problems that are caused by
63. January 1999 195 260 VAC IN 195 260 VAC 24VCT MN Wooo 23 CB1 4 POWER SUPPLY PCB 741 4 FUSES ON POWER SUPPLY POWER ARE 1 2A FAST BLOW ONLY ON 742 ON THEY WILL OPEN IF VOLTAGE D o EXCEEDS 285 VAC ON INCOMING 5 3 PHASE POWER DROPPING POWE OUT K1 D 743 0 FU1 OPERATOR FU2 V 744 PENDANT OFF 172 FU3 171 67 K7 d 66 PCB AUX K1 Ain VECTOR Bin DRIVE 198 4 UNIT o 214V 115V PH1 230V PH1 246V PART OF POWER SUPPLY PCB CB2 198 214 115V E auo PH2 230V PH2 246V 198V 214V 15V PH3 230V PH3 246V PART OF POWER SUPPLY PCB CB3 zT K6 COOLANT MOTOR beo ue 220 240 VAC MAIN TRANSFORMER LOW VOLTAGE 1 99 HAAS AUTOMATION HL SERIES PAGE 2 186 n 5 968710 SERVICE MANUAL January 1999 gt B gt y di ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS 354 480 VAC IN 24 usss 460V 400V 360V 4 CB1 32 x POWER SUPPLY PCB 741 5 FUSES ON POWER SUPPLY POWER ARE 1 2A FAST BLOW ONLY e sus on THEY
64. LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR DRIVE X DRIVE SIGNAL 320VDC LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR DRIVE X DRIVE SIGNAL 320VDC LOW VOLTAGE MOTOR DRIVE X DRIVE SIGNAL 320VDC c TO gt HAAS LOCATION L V POWER SUPPLY X SERVO MOTOR MOCON PCB SPINDLE DRIVE L V POWER SUPPLY X SERVO MOTOR MOCON PCB SPINDLE DRIVE L V POWER SUPPLY X SERVO MOTOR MOCON PCB SPINDLE DRIVE L V POWER SUPPLY X SERVO MOTOR MOCON PCB SPINDLE DRIVE PLUG CABLE LOCATIONS 153 154 41 CABLE LOCATIONS P13 P12 P11 P10 P21 P22 SERVICE IVIANUAL Series E 20 PR1 MOVs 1 5 oooooojloooooo FUA C de s Y V P4 P29 P28 e fis P27 93 1085 1 P2 c4 E en INE P26 j P3 10A 115V 7A 115V 10A 230V 10A 115V 00000000000 TSC Solenoids Coolant Main Transformer e Coolant Pump Pumps 68 TB1 CB5 CB4 CB3 CB2 65 P17 P31 P23 P24 P8 P7 P30 P14 P6 P15 TB2 POWER PCB P N 93 1085 96 8710 January 1999 PLUG CABLE
65. Lock Turret The Turret Clamp switch should be tripped at this point and discrete input TT LOK should be 1 Place a 0 160 gage block between the Turret Unclamp switch and the side of the cam ensuring it is flat against the cam The Turret Unclamp switch should trip and discrete input TT UNL should read 1 Remove the gage block If either switch does not trip when the gage block is in place the switches need to be adjusted Adjust the switches by loosening the two SHCS and moving the entire switch bracket DO NOT move the individual switches unless absolutely necessary Refer to Figure 3 6 AAS _ _ ___ _ ______ 49 January 1999 SERVICE MANUAL MECHANICAL SERVICE Series Section Il a In MDI enter an M43 Unlock Turret The Turret Unclamp switch should be tripped at this point and discrete input TT UNL should read 1 If this does not occur the lower air cylinder mounted reed switch needs to be adjusted by loosening the worm drive clamp retaining the sensor and moving it into position until this discrete input appears consistently Retighten sensor When the turret is in any other position than Unlock Turret the discrete input should read 0 Turret Unclamp Out Switch Clamp Unclamp Switch Bracket Turret Clamp In Switch Figure 3 6 Turret Clamp Unclamp switches b In MDI enter an M44 Lock Turret The Turret Clamp switch should be tripped at this point and dis
66. O P OvoO O Gi 7 MECHANICAL SERVICE 4 X Axis Spindle Low 5 270deg Tool Pocket Figure 3 3 Turret Pocket Alignment TURRET ALIGNMENT VERIFICATION PARALLELISM OF X Axis TOOLS REQUIRED MAGNETIC INDICATOR BASE V DIAL INDICATOR 0 0005 OR LESS RESOLUTION V ABAR APPROXIMATELY 12 x 4 x 1 GROUND TO WITHIN 0 0001 ON THE 1 WIDTH SIDE 1 Remove all tool holders and fittings from the turret 2 Clean the turret pockets and tool holders then command tool 1 to the cutting position 3 Place a clean and undamaged tool holder loosely do not thread nuts in the nearest pocket to the spindle and the other in the opposite tool holder 4 Place the 12 x 4 x 1 bar across the small diameter of the two tool holders ground side down 96 8740 45 SERVICE MANUAL MECHANICAL SERVICE January 1999 46 8 9 Series Figure 3 4 Turret Bar Sweep Jog the X axis to the center of it s travel Mount the indicator to the spindle retainer ring Position the indicator tip at the bottom edge of the bar Jog the X axis so the indicator is at one end of the bar and zero the indicator Jog the X axis to the other end of the bar and check your reading tolerance is 0 0003 TIR If the reading is not within tolerance loosen all 10 turret bolts the turret in the clamped position 10 Rotate the turre
67. P 1351 jus ous mm E Po ui nc uli BP ou I Pss P15 1 LET P29 mit 5 21 H 1 US4 50 Ei Fuso 1516 ate pss 2 Il P52 m d T Een og pulje 2 H a30 1 u44 In LE20 P81 Ps 23 N dit ii 539 5 3 Usa Ce Fl 25 SE P77 26 Pe P47 d 28 1 0 C Hise 19 d LE37 S pes 7D PUB a294 0 55 LES Ae LE20 P54 ii LE19 E e e Q36 a P68 H 027 5 a s P56 peo E 17 poe Q6 supe GE WDe 5 eri Peo d P ku d B 8 p71 8 ii jur R19 ni d 2 ti o Pe P72 p KH LE23 93 3080N RevE4 p7 P73 H it HL a ind K18 o o o er P10 T T et os Fus VW pao P27 m isi I pod 022 021 020 019 023 zu HHH ch o o o o o b o o o coco x P31 FU4 l P44 P45 P48 P49 P50 P55 P79 P46 05 03 Q4 1 0 PCB P N 93 3080N 156 sfAf 968110 Series 1 0 PCB P N 93 3080N CABLE CONNECTIONS January 1999 CABLE LOCATIONS KR 1 0 PLUG CABLE gt gt LOCATION PLUG P1 510 MOCON PCB 11 2 520 MOCON PCB P12 P3 540 MOCON PCB P14 P4 550 MOCON PCB
68. P10 P5 110 SERVO POWER ON P6 930 POWER PCB P6 940 COOL PUMP P8 170 POWER PCB P4 P9 710 SPINDLE DRIVE P10 300 SP FAN GEAR BOX 11 SPIN LOCK 12 880 SPINDLE HEAD P13 820 TOOL CHANGER P14 900 TSC PUMP P15 890 SPINDLE HEAD P16 770 E STOP SWITCH 17 960 AIR OIL 18 970 NOT USED N A P19 950 AIR OIL P20 830 REGEN RESISTORS 21 780 SPINDLE DRIVE 22 100 EXTERNAL 23 190 SHOT P24 790 SPARE 2 N A P25 200 SPARE 3 N A P26 M21 24 EXTERNAL 27 1040 DOOR LOCK P28 910 POWER PCB P7 P29 390 EXTERNAL P30 810A SHUTTLE MOTOR P31 160 CHIP CONVEYOR P33 90 1 P34 90A CRT P35 90B FANS P36 90C POWER PCB P8 P37 870 115 VAC SPARE P38 1050 DOOR SWITCH 9 810 TURRET MOTOR P40 770A HYD PRESSURE TANK P42 300 LUBE OIL PUMP P43 1060 NOT USED N A P44 349 5TH BRAKE P45 P46 140 CHIP CONVEYOR P47 1070 EXTERNAL P48 SPARE 1 P49 SPARE 2 P50 200 COOLANT TANK 51 530 MOCON PCB P13 P52 SPARE 1 P53 180 SPIGOT SENSE P54 350 SERVO BRAKE 55 280 RED GREEN LTS P56 940A TSC PUMP P57 SPARE 115 VAC SPARE P58 SPARE 115 VAC SPARE P60 930A TSC 230 IN P61 770B E STOP C 96 871 p V V 157 Service
69. SWITCH T C PLATE CVR COOLANT COUPLING ASSEMBLY AIR CYLINDER ASSY XFER COOLANT LINE ASSY XFER COOLANT TIP ASSY TELEMECHANIQ 30 IN CABLE ASSY LIMIT SWITCH UNCLAMP LIMIT SWITCH CLAMP SHCS 5 16 18 x 1 SHCS 1 4 20 x 1 SHCS 1 4 20 x 3 8 SHCS 1 4 20 x 1 2 SHCS 3 8 16 x 1 1 2 Series ITEM QTY PART NO 44 2 40 16385 45 4 40 1639 46 2 40 16403 47 1 40 1643 48 12 40 1675 49 12 40 1703 50 12 40 1715 51 5 40 1716 52 6 40 1800 53 2 40 1801 54 6 40 1850 55 1 43 1614 56 2 43 7006 57 2 45 1620 58 2 45 2001 59 1 46 7016 60 12 48 0049 61 4 49 1010 62 1 49 4115 63 1 51 2042 64 4 51 2983 65 12 51 2984 66 2 51 3001 67 1 51 7001 68 12 56 2090 69 1 56 9057 70 1 57 0075 71 1 57 0080 72 1 57 1045 73 1 57 2022 74 1 57 2104 75 1 57 2129 76 1 57 2150 77 1 57 2154 78 1 57 2831 79 12 57 2994 80 12 57 8874 81 1 58 8657 82 3 59 2056 83 1 59 2057 84 4 59 3011 85 1 63 0013 86 0 05 99 4521 AAS January 1999 DESCRIPTION SHCS 5 16 18 x 3 4 SHCS 3 8 16 x 1 SSS CUP PT 10 32 x 1 4 SHCS 3 8 16 x 2 1 2 SHCS 5 16 18 x 2 1 4 FHCS 10 32 x 1 2 SHCS 5 16 18 x 1 1 2 SHCS 5 16 18 x 1 3 4 SHCS 8 32 x 3 4 SHCS 8 32 x 3 8 SHCS 10 32 x 3 8 HHB 1 2 20 x 1 1 2 HHB 5 16 18 x 1 WASHER SPLIT LOCK 10 MEDIUM WASHER ARBOR 1 5 002 THK BEARING NUT N 13 PIN PULL 1 2 x 1 SHOULDER BOLT 3 8 x 1 1 2 WASHER STEEL BRNG LOCKNUT BH 04 THRUST WASHER THRUST WASHER BEARING
70. Torque Wrench Up to 250 ft lbs V 1 HAAS Belt Tensioning Tool P N T1510 SL 20 P N T1537 SL 30 and 40 1 Install spindle into housing Check location of oil holes for proper alignment 2 Place the retainer ring on the spindle with the O ring toward the spindle Ensure that the drain holes are at the bottom of the retainer ring and that the O ring remains in place 3 Apply blue Loctite to the six retainer ring mounting bolts and install them Place a 001 shim between the spindle and retainer ring Torque the mounting bolts to 50 FT LBS Note The bolts should be torqued in a star pattern and in increments of 10 20 30 40 and finally 50 FT LBS Check alignment of the spindle and retaining ring with a 001 shim at each torque value Spindle retainer bolts 6 Figure 3 9 Spindle retaining bolts 4 Ensure that the spindle can spin freely and the spindle and housing oil mist holes are aligned If not remove the retainer ring and spindle and reinstall 5 Screw the oil mist nozzles in by hand until they bottom Then back off the nozzles 1 5 2 turns ensuring that the holes on the nozzles and spindle housing are aligned correctly and pointed towards the bearings Make sure the nozzles do not come into contact with spindle shaft 6 Tighten the hex nut on the nozzles ensuring the nozzles do not spin After tightening the nuts verify the nozzle oil mist holes are still positioned correctly 7 Attach the two 1 4 nylon t
71. Turret Unlock Fault Turret Lock Fault Turret Rotate Fault Spindle Orientation Fault Spindle High Gear Fault Spindle Low Gear Fault Over Voltage Low Air Pressure Low Lub or Low Pressure Regen Overheat Series Same as alarm 108 Same as alarm 108 Same as alarm 108 Electronics fault Call your dealer The turret took longer to unlock and come to rotation position than allowed for in Parameter 62 The value in Parameter 62 is in milliseconds This may occur if the air pressure is too low the tool turret clamp switch is faulty or needs adjustment or there is a mechanical problem The turret took longer to lock and seat than allowed for in Parameter 63 The value in Parameter 63 is in milliseconds This may occur if the air pressure is too low the tool turret clamp switch is faulty or needs adjust ment or there is a mechanical problem Tool motor not in position During a tool changer operation the tool turret failed to start moving or failed to stop at the right position Parameters 62 and 63 can adjustthe time out times This alarm can be caused by anything that jams the rotation of the turret A loss of power to the tool changer can also cause this so check CB5 and relays 1 8 2 3 and 2 4 Spindle did not orient correctly During a spindle orientation function the spindle is rotated until the lock pin drops in butthe lock pin never dropped Parameters 66 70 73 and 74 can adjust the time out times This c
72. WILL OPEN IF VOLTAGE CN EXCEEDS 570 VAC ON INCOMING 3 PHASE POWER DROPPING POWER OUT Kt 743 FU1 SS OPERATOR Ax 744 PENDANT Rus TT 172 AY m N 2803 67 K7 m 66 PART OF QD 10 PCB o AUX 2 in VECTOR 230 Bin DRIVE Cin 357 376V UNIT 377 400V 401 425V 115v 426 451V PH1 452 480V PART OF POWER SUPPLY PCB 230 VAC m 357 376V 377 400V PH2 2 401 425V 115V 21 42 426 451V PH2 452 480V lt 230 VAC 357 376V 377 400V PHS u gt 401 425V 115V 426 451V PH3 452 480V PART OF POWER SUPPLY PCB CB3 Ke bas COOLANT MOTOR 220 240 MAIN TRANSFORMER HIGH VOLTAGE 1 99 HAAS AUTOMATION HL SERIES PAGE 3 meng Y Y 37 188 ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Series January 1999 MOCON INPUTS 550 640C 2059 7 VOLTAGE MONITOR 0 5V HOME SWITCHES 510 530 IOPCB RELAYS 1 8 IOPCB P24 P10 P17 P22 RELAYS 9 16 P11 P13 520 750 INPUTS RELAYS 25 32 540 JOGINFO P18 4THRU32 RELAYS 17 24 42 IOPCB SPINDLE ENCODER
73. X Zero Ret Margin Too Small Y Zero Ret Margin Too Small Z Zero Ret Margin Too Small A Zero Ret Margin Too Small Spindle Direction Fault Phase Loss Spindle Ref Signal Missing Tool Load Exceeded Ground Fault Detected Overheat Shutdown Over voltage Shutdown Divide by Zero X Cable Fault Series The line voltage to control is too low This alarm occurs when the AC line voltage drops below 190 when wired for 230 volts or drops below 165 when wired for 208 volts Current in X servo motor beyond limit Possibly caused by a stalled or overloaded motor The servos are turned off This can be caused by running a short distance into a mechanical stop It can also be caused by a short in the motor or a short of one motor lead to ground Same as alarm 161 Same as alarm 161 Same as alarm 161 This alarm will occur if the home limit switches move or are misadjusted This alarm indicates that the zero return position may not be consistent from one zero return to the next The encoder Z channel signal must occur between 1 8 and 7 8 revolution of where the home switch releases This will not turn the servos off but will stop the zero return operation Same as alarm 165 Same as alarm 165 Not normally enabled for A axis Problem with rigid tapping hardware The spindle started turning in the wrong direction Problem with incoming line voltage between legs L1 and L2 This usually indicates that there was a tran
74. alignment bar along the Z axis Level the spindle head assembly by adjusting the jack screws up or down and jogging the indicator along the alignment bar in the Z axis The tolerance reading should be 0001 within 10 Spindle housing Adjustment bolts 2 Figure 3 11 Adjustment bolts HAAS 57 SERVICE MANUAL MECHANICAL SERVICE Series 6 Once the spindle head assembly is level setup dual indicators on the large magnetic base and place on the base casting to the rear Indicate them at the machined bosses to maintain the spindle head level See Figure 3 12 Wi P 7 Figure 3 12 Indicator setup Note 1 This setup is to ensure the spindle remains parallel in the Z axis plane while raising the spindlehead It is recommended to only turn the jackscrews a quarter turn each time so that the spindle head does not become positioned too high above the turret pocket Should this happen you will have to start the procedure again Note 2 If the boss on the spindle head casting is not machined then an alternate method to set up the indicators is to retract the B axis waycover from the left side and mount the mag base to the base casting Then position two indicators on the machined surface beneath the spindle head casting 7 Place the tenths indicator at the end of the spindle alignment bar and jog tool turret in t
75. an UNDEFINED value i e 0 Return True or False Multiple use of a DO that has not been closed by and END in the same subroutine Use another DO number ALMA 5 n n 968710 January 1999 96 8710 535 536 537 538 539 540 600 601 602 603 604 605 606 607 609 610 Illegal DPRNT Statement Command Found On DPRNT Line RS 232 Abort On DPRNT Matching END Not Found Illegal Goto Macro Syntax Not Allowed Code Not Expected In This Context Maximum PQ Blocks Exceeded Non Monotonous Blocks in X Non Monotonous Blocks in Z Non Monotonous Arc In PQ Block Invalid Tool Nose Angle Invalid A Code Invalid W Code Tailstock Restricted Zone G71 G72 Domain Nesting Exceeded e ALARMS Series gt DPRNT statement has been formatted improperly DPRNT does not begin block A G code was included on a DPRNT block Make two separate blocks While a DPRNT statement was executing the RS 232 communications failed A WHILE DO statement does not contain a matching END statement Add the proper END statement Expression after GOTO not valid A section of code was interpreted by the control where macro statement syntax is not permitted In lathe controls PQ sequences describing part geometry cannot use macro statements in the part path description During program interpretation the control found code out of context This may indicate an inv
76. and stops are absolutely rigid and mounted to machined casting surfaces Check a suspected error with another indicator or method for verification Ensure that the indicator is parallel to the axis being checked to avoid tangential reading errors Center drill holes before using jobber length drills if accuracy is questioned Once machining practices have been eliminated as the source of the problem determine specifically what the machine is doing wrong Diameters are out of round e Check that tooling and machining practices are correct Bores will be out of round due to tool deflection much more frequently than due to spindle bearing problems Diameters are incorrect in X axis e Ensure the tool probe is set up correctly settings etc e Ensure tool offsets are correct Note that the coordinate system FANUC YASNAC HAAS must be selected before setting tools e Ensure Parameter 254 Spindle Center is set correctly e Check for thermal growth of the X axis leadscrew see Thermal Growth section Center holes are malformed e Ensure tooling is tight e Ensure Parameter 254 Spindle Center is set correctly e Check spindle to turret pocket alignment It may be out of alignment due to a crash or misadjustment e Check for thermal growth of the X axis leadscrew see Thermal Growth section Part faces are conical e Wedge may be out of alignment due to a crash e Check tooling setup Turning long unsupported parts
77. and then the POSIT key to get into the Position Display and Jog mode The A axis should be displayed below the X and Z axes Press the letter A then HANDLE JOG and then a jog speed other than 1 A message should indicate that the A axis is being jogged Turn the JOG handle until the obstruction is cleared and the turret rotates freely If an OVERCURRENT alarm is received press RESET and turn the JOG handle in the opposite direction Move to Parameter 43 on the Parameter Display and change INVIS AXIS back to 1 Change Setting 7 back to ON Turn the control power off and then back on The turret can now be positioned by pressing either POWER UP RESTART or AUTO ALL AXES 96 8740 59 SERVICE MANUAL MECHANICAL SERVICE January 1999 40 Series Note If alarms 111 or 164 occur after the obstruction is cleared you may need to adjust the turret motor coupling IMPORTANT After a crash the following procedures should be performed in order to verify proper turret alignment 1 Turret alignment verification X Axis 2 Spindle alignment verification 3 Turret alignment verification Spindle TURRET REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT 1 Remove the sliding tool changer and turret assembly covers 2 Change Parameter 76 from 500 to 50000 so you will not trip on a low air pressure alarm 3 Remove the air line 4 Put a 3 4
78. assembly remove the four hex nuts on the top row of the CRT bracket along with the washers CAUTION Take extreme care to not drop or damage the CRT assembly when removing from the control panel CAREFULLY pull the CRT assembly out toward the rear until it is clear of the control panel and all wiring Set CRT assembly down in a Safe place so as not to damage Replace by sliding the new assembly onto the eight bolts four each on top and bottom Starting with the bottom right place the washers and hex nuts on the bolts to hold in place Refer to Fig 5 1 for the order of replacement Once all washers have been attached and nuts have been hand tightened tighten down completely with the socket Figure 4 11 Interior of control panel rear 96 8710 January 1999 96 8710 SERVICE MANUAL ELECTRICAL SERVICE Series 8 Plug the black cable and white cable into the matching cables Feed the white cable through the opening in the top of the control panel 9 Replace the back cover panel and attach with the four screws previously removed Joc HANDLE REPLACEMENT The JOG handle is actually a 100 line per revolution encoder We use 100 steps per revolution to move one of the servoaxes If no axis is select
79. assembly to the collector door 8 Slide the inner shaft of the tray assembly into outer shaft of pivot assembly Locate tray assembly far back enough to catch the part and clear chuck 9 Rotate the tray position to open the sliding door of the collector Tighten the shaft collar to the parts catcher shaft Step through MDI program and check tray operation 10 Install necessary panels that were removed 3 11 LATHE TOOL PROBE 1 Power off the machine and unfasten the forward end panel on the left side of the machine 2 Loosen all fasteners and set screw on the mounting block 3 Lower tool setter arm to horizontal position Install a turning tool in the cutting position pocket on the turret and jog the Z axis in slow motion until the tool tip touches the square tip of the probe 4 By tightening 1 4 20 set screw on the mounting block adjust the height of probe so the tip of the turning tool touches the middle of the side of square tip After proper alignment tighten all four 3 8 16 screws on mounting block and torque them to 50 ft Ib Also tighten the 1 4 20 nut on the set screw against the mounting block 5 Install 0001 indicator on a safe place on the turret align the tip of probe within 0005 to X and 7 axes by loosening the four 4 40 clamping screws and rotating the probe body Tighten the clamping screws 6 Rotate tool setter arm to vertical position home position and check the alignment of probe bal
80. be nested Refer to the explanation of G71 for a description of trough nesting 7145 37 e ALARMS 38 611 612 613 614 615 616 620 621 G71 G72 Type Alarm G71 G72 Type II Alarm Command Not Allowed In Cutter Comp Invalid Q Code No Intersection to Offsets in CC Canned Cycle Using amp Qis Active C Axis Disabled C Over Travel Range Series When G71 or G72 is executing and the control detects a problem in the defined PQ path It is used to indicate which method of roughing has been selected by the control It is generated to help the programmer when debugging G71 or G72 commands The control often selects Type roughing when the programmer has intended to use Type 11 roughing To select Type Il add R1 to the G71 G72 command block in YASNAC mode or add aZ axis reference to the P block in FANUC mode This alarm is similar to Alarm 611 but indicates that the control has selected Type 11 roughing A command M96 for example in the highlighted block cannot be executed while cutter comp is invoked A Q address code used a numeric value that was incorrect in the context used Q used to reference tip codes in G10 can be 0 9 In M96 can reference only bits 0 to 31 Use an appropriate value for Q While cutter comp was in effect a geometry was encountered whose compensated paths had no solution given the tool off
81. belt tension Run the motor with the drive belt disconnected If the noise persists the problem lies with the motor If it disappears go on to the next step Check for the correct amount of lubrication to the spindle bearings 1cc per hour in an air mist lubricated spindle AAAS 96 8710 SERVICE MANUAL January 1999 y 7 TROUBLESHOOTING EZ 1 3 TRANSMISSION SL 30 AND SL40 The transmission cannot be serviced in the field and must be replaced as a unit Never remove the motor from the transmission as this will damage the transmission and void the warranty Q Excessive or unusual noise coming from transmission Operate the machine in both high and low gears Monitor for noise in both gear positions and determine if the noise varies with the motor or output shaft speed e lf the noise only occurs in one gear throughout the entire RPM range of that gear position the problem lies with the transmission and it must be replaced e If the noise occurs in both gear positions disconnect the drive belts see Transmission section Mech Service and repeat the previous step If the noise persists the transmission is damaged and must be replaced e Disconnect the drive belts see Transmission section Mech Service and run the machine in high gear Command a change of direction and listen for a banging noise in the transmission as the machine slows down to zero RPM and speeds back up in reverse
82. continually tests itself and a self test failure will generate Alarm 152 Microprocessor PCB 68ECO30 The Microprocessor PCB contains the 68ECO30 processor running at 40 MHz one 128K EPROM between 256K and 8MB of CMOS RAM and between 512K and 1MB of FAST STATIC RAM It also contains a dual serial port a five year battery to backup RAM buffering to the system buss and eight system status LED s Two ports on this board are used to set the point at which an NMI is generated during power down and the point at which RESET is generated during power down HAAS 96 8710 SERVICE MANUAL January 1999 s b s a v3A A TECHNICAL REFERENCE 96 8710 Series The eight LED s are used to diagnose internal processor problems As the system completes power up testing the lights are turned on sequentially to indicate the completion of a step The lights and meanings are 51 5V logic power supply is present Normally On If this light does not come on check the low voltage power supply and check that all three phases of 230V input power are present HALT Processor halted in catastrophic fault Normally Off If this light comes on there is a serious problem with the processor PCB Check that the EPROM is plugged in Test the card with the buss connectors off POR Power on reset complete Normally On If this light does not come on there is a serious problem with the processor PCB Check that the EPRO
83. for description Z PHASE OFFSET See Parameter 121 for description A PHASE OFFSET See Parameter 121 for description X GRID OFFSET This parameter shifts the effective position of the encoder Z pulse It can correct for a positioning error of the motor or home switch 6 131 Al 132 e PARAMETERS Series January 1999 Parameter 126 Y GRID OFFSET See Parameter 125 for description Parameter 127 Z GRID OFFSET See Parameter 125 for description Parameter 128 A GRID OFFSET See Parameter 125 for description Parameter 129 GEAR CH SETTLE TIME Gear change settle time This is the number of one millisecond samples that the gear status must be stable before considered in gear Parameter 130 GEAR STROKE DELAY This parameter controls the delay time to the gear change solenoids when performing a gear change Parameter 131 MAX SPINDLE RPM This is the maximum RPM available to the spindle When this speed is programmed the D to A output will be 10V and the spindle drive must be calibrated to provide this Parameter 133 SPIN Z TEMP COEF This parameter controls the amount of correction to the Z axis in response to heating of the spindle head It is 10 times the number of encoder steps per degree F Parameter 134 X EXACT STOP DIST Parameter 135 Y EXACT STOP DIST Parameter 136 Z EXACT STOP DIST Parameter 137 A EXACT STOP DIST These parameters control how close each axis mu
84. from machine and change parameter 76 to 50 000 Pull the turret air cylinder all the way forward unclamp with a wrench Go to Parameter 43 and change the INVIS AXIS to zero Then go to the Alarms page type DEBUG and press the WRITE key Press the HANDLE JOG key Press the key in the lower right corner of the jog keys it s unmarked and directly below the Z jog key Note This can only be done while the turret is unclamped Loosen then lightly retighten all 10 inner coupling bolts jogging the A axis for access and center the coupling to the bolt holes Clamp the couplings by pushing the turret air cylinder back to it s original position Return to Step 1 of the Turret Alignment Verification section and verify your readings When coupling is in place unlock the turret as in Step 2 F s 47 SERVICE MANUAL MECHANICAL SERVICE V _ January 1999 48 Series 9 Tighten all 10 inner coupling bolts jogging the A axis for access and torque them to the required specifications Refer to torque chart at beginning of section 10 Replace the 1 4 brass plug 11 Relock the turret 12 Connect air to machine and change parameter 76 back to original value default 500 13 Repeat Step 6 14 When the turret alignment is complete go to the Alarms page and type DEBUG then press the WRITE key Change Parameter 43 INVIS AXIS to 1 Note All alignments d
85. function requires an X B Z or A move Skip G31 function cannot be used with cutter compensation Graphics mode cannot simulate skip function Skip signal check code was included but skip was found when it was not expected Skip signal check code was included but skip was not found when it was expected G20 was specified but settings have selected metric input G21 was specified but settings have selected inches G10 was used to changes offsets but L P or R code is missing or invalid An address A Z was used improperly If block buffering has been limited Cutter comp cannot be used 96 8710 AHAS January 1999 96 8710 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 403 404 405 406 407 408 409 410 Allowed With G10 G17 G18 G19 Illegal in G68 No Spindle Speed Feature Disabled B Axis Disabled Invalid Motion In G84 or G184 B Over Travel Range Invalid Code In Canned Cycle Conflicting Axes Invalid D Code Aux Axis Servo Off Invalid U Code RS 232 Too Many Progs RS 232 No Program Name RS 232 Illegal Prog Name RS 232 Missing Code RS 232 Invalid Code RS 232 Number Range Error RS 232 Invalid N Code RS 232 Invalid V Code e ALARMS Series 2 Coordinates cannot be altered while cutter comp is active Move G10 outside of cutter comp enablement Planes of rotation canno
86. halfway down This light is at the top of the circuit card at the center of the assembly Until this light goes out there are dangerous voltages in the assembly EVEN WHEN POWER IS SHUT OFF 1 Turn machine power off 2 Turn the main switch upper right of electrical cabinet to the off position Figure 4 8 Unscrew the two screws to open the cabinet door Control cabinets require a key 3 Using a large flat tip screwdriver loosen the two screws on the cabinet door and then open the door enough to safely work on the electrical panel Wait until at least the red CHARGE light on the servo drive assembly goes out before beginning any work inside the electrical cabinet 4 Onthe POWER SUPPLY board there are three fuses located in a row atthe upper right of the board these are the overvoltage fuses An orange light will be on to indicate the blown fuse s 90 K gll n y gr rr NeV 96 8710 January 1999 P13 P12 P11 P10 P21 P22 Series OVERVOLTAGE FUSES ELECTRICAL SERVICE P20 PR1 P1 P5 Fut O O J rus O o ooccooo oocooo Fu 1 vu di d Y A 1
87. has moved return to Step 11 and recheck the pocket position 16 Test the other pockets in the same way as pocket 1 Step 11 without moving the x axis position The tolerances for the other pockets are 0 003 inch from the centerline k 7 Reinstall the following sheet metal pieces if removed The front left panel The front bottom panel The drain rail The front door Note 5 All alignments done could change spindle centerline Verify and enter new spindle centerline position in Parameter 254 Refer to Section 1 9 3 3 TAILSTOCK ALIGNMENT 96 8710 Tailstock alignment procedures should only be done after the X and Z axes have been checked for proper alignment There are two different tailstocks a one piece original design and the newer two piece design If the tailstock needs to be aligned follow the procedure for that type of tailstock One Piece Taitstock ALIGNMENT VERIFICATION Tools Required v Spindle Alignment Test Bar P N T 1312 Tailstock Taper Bar P N T 1416 v 0001 Indicator and Magnetic Base 1 Mount the spindle alignment test bar to the spindle Note Make sure all contact surfaces including the test bar are clean Mount tenths indicator to the end of the test bar Insert the tailstock taper alignment test bar gt Place the indicator tip at the base of the tailstock test bar closest to the tailstock Check the total runout at base of the test
88. lube air panel 6 Remove all conduits 7 Disconnect main oil line 8 Remove the mounting screws located at the top of the lube panel 3 7 HYDRAULIC POWER UNIT CAUTION POWER OFF THE MACHINE BEFORE PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE 1 Remove necessary panels to access the hydraulic unit 2 Loosen and disconnect the drawtube clamp and unclamp hoses 3 If the unit comes with a hydraulic tailstock solenoid disconnect the 2 hoses that lead to the tailstock cylinder Disconnect chuck hoses Remember to mark the hoses or else the tailstock and chuck will not function properly Note Right clamp unclamp hose of hydraulic unit is attached to bottom port of hydraulic cylinder and left hose is attached to top port The ports are located on the side of the hydraulic cylinder 4 Unclamp and remove oil return hose from hydraulic unit and hydraulic cylinder Note The oil return hose is shrink fitted and should be replaced with a new one whenever removed 5 Disconnect pressure switch cable and solenoid valve cable 6 Disconnect pump motor cable 7 Loosen and remove the four bolts from base of unit then slide hydraulic unit out 96 8710 SERVICE MANUAL January 1999 MECHANICAL SERVICE Series Hydraulic Cylinder Hoses 2 Hydraulic Tailstock Hoses 2 Figure 3 21 Hydraulic power unit CAUTION POWER OFF THE MACHINE BEFORE PERFORMING THIS PROCEDURE
89. may cause conical part faces e Check for thermal growth of the leadscrews see Thermal Growth section AAAA r c 96 8710 January 1999 SERVICE MANUAL TROUBLESHOOTING EZ Series Part Tooling Problem Geometry Problem Q Bores are tapered e Check that tooling and machining practices are correct Bores will be tapered if the tooling is inappropriate the speeds and feeds are incorrect or coolant is not getting to the cutting tool when required e Although it is rare the spindle may be out of alignment due to a crash e Check that the turret face is parallel with x axis Outside diameter 0 D is tapered e Check tooling setup Turning long unsupported parts can cause a tapered O D e Check tailstock setup Excessive hold pressure on the tailstock can distort parts e Tailstock may not be aligned to spindle center e Spindle to Z axis may be out of alignment not parallel Poor Geometry 96 8710 Im AAS 1 January 1999 SERVICE MANUAL EZ TROUBLESHOOTING Series Poor Tec
90. motor end tighten the lock nut screw and mark with yellow paint e At the bearing support end remove the shaft lock f Align the lead screw nut with the nut housing on the wedge Apply a drop of blue Loctite to the five SHCS and attach the nut to the housing Torque lead screw nut SHCS to 30 FT LBS g Place the Woodruff key back into the key way slot on the lead screw h Install the motor with the coupling attached to the lead screw and tighten the four motor mounting SHCS Torque the motor mount SHCS to 30 FT LBS 4 Tighten the collar on the motor coupling and re torque the collar SHCS to 15 FT LBS Replace the motor housing cover 5 Move turret to support housing end taking care to stop before hitting the support housing 6 Torque the bearing support housing SHCS to 30 FT LBS Prevent contact with the lead screw threads to avoid any possible damage 7 Loosen the lock nut screw Tighten the lock nut against the bearing to 4 IN LBS Retighten the clamp screw and mark with yellow paint 8 Check for binding in the beginning middle and end of travel You should be able to rotate the lead screw by hand when the servos are off Check for backlash or noisy operation 9 Replace the lead screw hardstops and reconnect oil line to the lead screw nut 10 Zero return Z axis and set grid offset according to section 3 5 9 8710 81 January 1999 SERVICE MANUAL MECHANICAL SERVICE
91. oe 5 811 VIDEO amp KEYBOARD PCB W O FLOPPY DRIVE 162 HAS J3 P13 January 1999 96 8710 January 1999 VIDEO PLUG 1 J3 J4 J5 J10 Jit J12 P13 J9 313 SERVICE MANUAL Series CABLE LOCATIONS KR VIDEO amp KEYBOARD PCB W O FLOPPY DRIVE P N 93 1000 CABLE CONNECTIONS CABLE 860 700 SIGNAL NAME LOW VOLTAGE KEYBOARD INFO ADDRESS BUSS DATA BUSS FLOPPY DR POWER SPARE FLOPPY DR SIGNAL VIDEO SIGNAL RS422 B SERIAL DATA Not used with Serial Keyboard Interface 96 8710 HAAS gt gt LOCATION POWER SUPPLY PCB KEYBOARD INT MICRO PROC PCB MOTIF PCB FLOPPY DRIVE N A FLOPPY DRIVE CRT N A N A 163 CABLE LOCATIONS P18 P20 P6 P7 P8 P9 P30 P31 164 P24 P10 Series E T 0000 00000000000 00000000000 0000 0000 12 14 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 T 0000 I I
92. of thermal compensation A DELAY AXIS 0 Reserved B SWITCHES Parameter 270 is a collection of single bit flags used to turn servo related functions on and off The left and right cursor arrows are used to select the function being changed All values are 0 or 1 only The function names are B LIN SCALE EN Used to enable linear scales for the B axis B INVRT LN SCL Used to invert the B axis linear scale B DSBL LS ZTST Used to disable the linear scale Z test B ZERO AXIS TC Used to return axis to zero prior to tool change B 2ND HOME BTN Used to move axis to coordinate specified in Work Ofset G129 B NEG COMP DIR Used to negate the direction of thermal compensation B DELAY AXIS 0 Reserved AAAS 96 8710 January 1999 96 8710 Parameter 271 Parameter 272 Parameter 278 INVERT G B RESERVED DPR SERIAL DISPLAY ACT HYDRAULIC TS DRV LCK CHUCK OPN CS CNCR SPINDLE TL SET PROBE HAAS VECT DR uP ENCL TEMP HAAS RJH SERVICE C SWITCHES Parameter 271 is a collection of single bit flags used to turn servo related functions on and off The left and right cursor arrows are used to select the function being changed All values are 0 or 1 only The function names C LIN SCALE C INVRT LN SCL Used to enable linear scales for the C axis Used to invert the C axis linear scale C DSBL LS ZTST Used to disable the linear scale Z test C ZERO AXIS TC Used to return axis to zer
93. or speed on X axis motor The difference between the Too Large motor position and the commanded position has exceeded a parameter The motor may also be stalled disconnected or the driver failed The servos will be turned off and a RESET must be done to restart This alarm can be caused by problems with the driver motor orthe slide being run into the mechanical stops 104 Y Servo Error Same as alarm 103 Too Large 105 Z Servo Error Same as alarm 103 Too Large 106 A Servo Error Same as alarm 103 Too Large 107 Emergency Off EMERGENCY STOP button was pressed Servos are also turned off After the E STOP is released the RESET button must be pressed at least twice to correct this once to clear the E STOP alarm and once to clear the Servos Off alarm 108 X Servo Overload Excessive load on X axis motor This can occur if the load on the motor over a period of several seconds or even minutes is large enough to exceed the continuous rating of the motor The servos will be turned off when this occurs This can be caused by running into the mechanical stops but not much past them It can also be caused by anything that causes a very high load on the motors AAS SERVICE MANUAL e ALARMS 1212 e ALARMS vs Y T v 22 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 Y Servo Overload Z Servo Overload A Servo Overload No Interrupt
94. removes moisture before it is sent to the solenoid valves Air Pressure Regulator Maintains the air supplied from the outside source via the main air line at a constant desired pressure approximately 85 90 psi Air Solenoid Assembly 4 way 2 position valve that controls the air to the turret air cylinder Air Solenoid Assembly 3 way 2 position valve that controls the air to the parts catcher air cylinder This assembly is only on machines equipped with a part catcher 10 Power Cable Supplies power to the Lube Air Panel from the main control box and carries signals from 11 switches to control box Foot Pedal Cable Connects chuck actuator foot pedal to the lube air panel HAAS January 1999 96 8710 SERVICE MANUAL January 1999 n Gi 7 MECHANICAL SERVICE Figure 3 20 Lube Air Panel Rear View The following is a list of the Lube Air Panel Assembly components on the rear of the panel each with a description of it s specific function 1 Air Pressure Switch Monitors the air supply pressure and sends a signal to the control panel to alarm out or stop the machine when the air pressure falls below 70 psi 2 Solenoid Valve Opens when the spindle is turning to permit air to be sent to the spindle bearings 3 Air
95. run out Determine which direction the tailstock is out of alignment Figure 3 14 Runout Measurement at Base Figure 3 14 2 Ifthe tailstock is out of alignment in both flatness and parallelism remove the head from the tailstock base Mark the shims so they can be installed in the same order and inspect them If the tailstock is only out of parallel alignment go to step 6 3 Check the top surface of the tailstock base for parallelism to the Z axis Check for dents and lightly stone the top mating surface of the tailstock Indicate from the turret to the top of the tailstock base Readings must be no more than 004 for 10 inches of travel 4 Install the shims lightly stone and clean the shims before installing 5 Install the head of the tailstock and snug the four retaining nuts 6 Rotate the spindle and measure parallelism Tap the head into place using a mallet If flatness is within tolerance proceed to step 8 7 Measure flatness from base to end of tailstock Add or remove shims if necessary using the tailstock head alignment tool To adjust the number of shims bolt on alignment tool snug alignment bolts against the tailstock head then remove the tool Figure 3 15 Loosen either the front or rear pair of tailstock retaining nuts and add or remove shims as necessary This will keep parallelism Re tighten the nuts If necessary loosen the other end to add or remove shims as
96. servo motor failures should also register an alarm Check the alarm history to determine the problem s cause before any action is taken lt Servo motor is not functioning e Check the power cable from rear electrical cabinet to ensure connection is tight e Encoder is faulty or contaminated Alarms 139 142 153 156 165 168 182 185 Replace motor assembly on brusless machines replace the encoder on brush machines Open circuit in motor Alarms 139 142 153 156 182 185 Motor has overheated resulting in damage to the interior components Alarms 135 138 176 Wiring is broken shorted or missing shield Alarms 153 156 175 182 185 Motor has overheated no damage to the interior components OVERHEAT alarm has been triggered After thorough check of motor DO NOT DISASSEMBLE take necessary steps to eliminate the problem and alarm to resume operation If motor is still inoperable replace motor assembly e Check for broken or loose coupling between the servo motor and the lead screw e Check for a damaged lead screw Note If a lead screw fails it is most often due to a failed bearing sleeve Lead screw noise is usually caused by a lack of lubrication and is usually accompanied by heating Other causes are misalignment bearing sleeve damage or ball nut damage Check the alarm history of the machine and look for axis overcurrent and following error alarms Note Do not replace lead screws or bearing sleeves without due c
97. side of the control cabinet This is a four pin DIN connector and includes the M FIN signal 1 M FIN Input Signal M Code Output Relay Normally Open 2 Input GND Note If the optional M code relay board is installed the relays on the IOPCB are to be left unused M FIN Discrete INPUT The M FIN discrete input is a low voltage circuit When the circuit is open there is 12V DC at this signal When this line is brought to ground there will be about 10 milliamps of current M FIN is discrete input 10 and is wired from input 10 on the Inputs PCB on the Input Output Assembly The return line for grounding the circuit should also be picked up from that PCB For reliability these two wires should be routed in a shielded cable where the shield is grounded at one end only The diagnostic display will show this signal a 1 when the circuit is open and a 0 when this circuit is grounded 116 ALMA 5 96 8710 SERVICE MANUAL January 1999 Ge rie TECHNICAL REFERENCE TuRNING Functions ON OFF The three optional M code relays can also be separately turned on and off using M codes M51 M54 and M61 M64 M51 to M54 will turn on one of the relays and M61 to M63 will turn the relays off M51 and M61 correspond to M21 etc Note If the M code relay board is installed then M51 M58 will turn on the relays and 61 68 will turn off the relays M51 and M61 correspond to M21 etc o
98. the spindle is within this value plus or minus the spindle will be considered locked Otherwise the spindle will not be locked If a Vector Drive is not installed this parameter is called C axis ACC DEC T CONST and is not used C SP STOP SPEED This name is used when a Vector Drive is installed The spindle is considered to be stopped discrete input SP ST 0 when the speed drops below this value Units are encoder steps millisecond If a Vector Drive is not installed this parameter is called C axis PHASE OFFSET and is not used C START STOP DELAY This name is used when a Vector Drive is installed This delay is used al the start of motion to magnetize the rotor before acceleration starts Also when the motor coms to a stop it remains energized for this amount of time Units are millisec onds If a Vector Drive is not installed this parameter is called C axis GRID OFFSET and is not used ACCEL LIMIT LOAD This name is used when a Vector Drive is installed This is the percent of load limit during accleration If the load reaches this limit during acceleration the control slows the acceleration If a Vector Drive is not installed this parameter is called C axis EXACT STOP DIST and is not used SWITCH FREQUENCY This name is used when a Vector Drive is installed This is the frequency at which the spindle motor windings are switched Note that there is a hysteresis band around this point defined by parameter 198 If a Vector D
99. this board Follow all precautions noted previously before working in the electrical cabinet Turn the main switch upper right of electrical cabinet to the off position Using a large flat tip screwdriver loosen the three screws on the cabinet door and then open the door enough to safely work on the electrical panel AHA T aaas 96 8710 SERVICE MANUAL January 1999 lt di ELECTRICAL SERVICE Note It is suggested to make use of a step ladder high enough to allow you to work from the top of the electrical cabinet It will be necessary when replacing the RS 232 board to work from the inside and outside of the cabinet at the same time 4 Onthe left side of the cabinet at the top of the side panel two serial port connections labeled SERIAL PORT 1 and SERIAL PORT 2 SERIAL PORT 1 being the upper connection VIDEO amp KEYBOARD SERIAL PCB KEYBOARD INTERFACE MICRO PROCESSOR PCB Serial interface replaces cable 700 with cable 700B Figure 4 10 RS 232 wiring pictorial with serial keyboard 5 To remove the RS 232 board unscrew the two hex screws on the exterior of the cabinet holding the connector to the cabinet From the inside of the cabinet pull the connector through the panel and disconnect the cable 6 Replace the RS 232 board by first connecting the appropriate cable to the board 850 to SERIAL PORT 1 850A to SERIAL PORT 72 then inse
100. to the outside diameter of the part and using the origin key zero the X register of the operator position display 4 Using the operator position display as a guide move the tool in the X direction until the display reads the same value as the measured diameter and using the origin key zero the X register of the display 5 Move the tool to a safe position and lower the tool setter arm and touch the tool tip using the jog handle in the 0001 mode Note While jogging when the tool comes in contact with the probe the control will beep and jogging in the current direction will stop 6 Record the value shown in the X operator position display into Setting 59 PROBE OFFSET X 7 Subtract 2 times the probe width from the X operator position display and store this value into Setting 60 PROBE OFFSET X Setting Z offsets 1 The value of Setting 61 PROBE OFFSET 7 should be Zero The value of Setting 62 PROBE OFFSET Z should be the width of the probe i e if the probe measures 3937 Setting 62 PROBE OFFSET Z would be 3937 868710 77 SERVICE MANUAL MECHANICAL SERVICE 78 January 1999 Series 3 12 LEAD SCREW REPLACEMENT Please read this section in its entirety before attempting to remove or replace the lead screws TOOLS REQUIRED Spanner Wrench 32mm or 40 50mm Shaft Lock 32mm or 40 50mm Z Axis LEA
101. vector drive machine Enables macro functions Invert sense of skip to active low closed Enable use of jog handle to move cursor Selects use of work offsets in negative direction Not presently used Enables conversational programming Enables oiler power when servos or spindle is in motion Inverts sense of over voltage signal Second spindle encoder Enables functions to stop spindle and manual operations at door switch January 1999 LEAD COMPENS SHIFT Shift factor when applying lead screw compensation Lead screw compensation is based on a table of 256 offsets each 127 encoder steps A single entry in the table applies over a distance equal to two raised to this parameter power encoder steps MAX FEED RATE INCH Maximum feed rate in inches per minute TURRET IN POS DELAY Amount of time to delay after the turret rotates to the tool position This delay allows the turret to settle TURRET LOCK DELAY Amount of time to delay after the turret is sensed to be locked This delay allows for mechanical settling TURRET UNLOCK ERROR TIME Maximum delay allowed for tool turret to unlock Units are milliseconds After this time an alarm is generated TURRET LOCK ERRTIME Maximum delay allowed for tool turret to lock Units are milliseconds After this time an alarm is generated Z TOOL CHANGE OFFSET For turret displacement from home switch to tool 0 NUMBER OF TOOLS Number of tool positions in tool changer This n
102. well To re align install the alignment tool and position the tailstock against the adjustment bolts of the alignment tool Snug the tailstock nuts and remove the tool 96 8740 561 SERVICE MANUAL MECHANICAL SERVICE 62 January 1999 Series Head Alignment Tool Mounting Nut 4 if i H H Fach H 18 ET d Adjustment Bolts Tool Mounting Bolt 2 Head Alignment Tool Figure 3 15 8 Rotate the spindle and measure run out at the base and the end of the tailstock Tap into place using a mallet Tolerance is less than 001 TIR 9 Torque the tailstock head retaining nuts INSERT REMOVAL AND INSTALLATION CAUTION Contact HAAS before attempting this procedure Tools Required v Press Fixture and Spacer v Blow torch v Spindle Alignment Test Bar T 1312 Y Devcon liquid steel PINO 99 4530 Y Tailstock Taper Alignment Bar P N T 1416 Removal 1 Remove the six screws that mount the back plate to the tailstock insert 2 Remove the 3 screws that mount the insert to the casting 3 Run the screw nut completely down to its farthest travel far right 96 8710 January 1999 96 8710 SERVICE MANUAL MECHANICAL SERVICE Series Figure 3 16 Tailstock insert press Mount the fixture to the tailstock casting as shown Pump the hydraulic press a few times so
103. when motor in motion BACK EMF Back EMF of motor in volts per 1000 RPM times 10 Thus a 63 volt KRPM motor gives 630 ATMS 96 8710 January 1999 96 8710 Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter 23 24 25 29 Series STEPS REVOLUTION PARAMETERS Encoder steps per revolution of motor Thus an 8192 line encoder gives 8192 x 4 32768 BACKLASH Backlash correction in encoder steps DEAD ZONE Dead zone correction for driver electronics Units are 0 0000001 seconds SWITCHES See Parameter 1 for description P GAIN See Parameter 2 for description D GAIN See Parameter 3 for description GAIN See Parameter 4 for description RATIO STEPS UNIT See Parameter 5 for description MAX TRAVEL STEPS See Parameter 6 for description ACCELERATION See Parameter 7 for description MAX SPEED See Parameter 8 for description MAX ERROR See Parameter 9 for description FUSE LEVEL See Parameter 10 for description BACKEMF See Parameter 11 for description STEPS REVOLUTION See Parameter 12 for description BACKLASH See Parameter 13 for description DEAD ZONE See Parameter 14 for description SWITCHES See Parameter 1 for description HAAS 125 Al 126 e PARAMETERS
104. wrench on the bolt at the end of the air cycle Pull down X until the turret is fully unclamped 5 Place a block snugly between the back of the turret shaft and the casting to keep the turret shaft from shifting Caution Ifthe shaft moves back when the turret is disconnected the ball bearings in the turret cam will fall and have to be replaced before the turret can be reassembled 6 Empty the oil from the turret assembly Remove the screw from the bottom of the plate located just behind the turret on the turret assembly and allow the oil to drain into a bucket 7 Remove the four bolts from the turret retainer and remove the retainer Note If a shaft extension is available install it at this time Using the extension gives you greater movement of the turret and allows you to remove and easily install the key washers and needle bearings Caution The turret is heavy and could be slippery Be careful to not lose the key as it will be facing down at this point 8 Remove the turret from the shaft 9 The two washers needle bearing and key should be removed from the shaft and put aside at this time CS 1 Put a small amount of grease on one side of the washers 2 Place the washer on the surface of the turret and center it using your fingers Be sure to keep grease off the surface facing the needle bearing 3 Put a small amount of grease on both sides of the second washer 96 8710 January 1999 96 8710 SERVICE M
105. 0 511 512 513 514 515 TS Moved While Holding Part TS Found No Part Bar Feeder Fault Bar Feeder Spindle Interlock Too Many Assignments In One Block Or Not First Term In Expressn Illegal Macro Variable Reference Unbalanced Paren In Expression Value Stack Error Operand Stack Error Too Few Operands On Stack Division By Zero Illegal Macro Variable Use Illegal Operator or Function Use Unbalanced Right Brackets Illegal Assignment Use Var Ref Not Allowed With N Or O Illegal Macro Address Reference Too Many Conditionals In a Block e ALARMS Series 2 The tailstock moved more than a preset amount while holding a part e g the part slips in the chuck During an M21 or 001 the tailstock reached the hold point without encountering the part This means that discrete input 1027 BFSPLK is too high See parameter 278 bit 20 CK BF status This means that discrete input 1030 BF FLT is high See parameter 278 bit 21 CK BF SP ILK Only one assignment is allowed per block Divide block in error into multiple blocks An expression element was found where it was not preceded by or that start expressions A macro variable number was used that is not supported by this control use another variable Unbalanced brackets or were found in an expression Add or delete a bracket The macro expression va
106. 1 Slide hydraulic power unit into place and attach with four mounting bolts 2 Connect pump motor cable 3 Connect pressure switch cable and solenoid valve cable 4 Replace oil return hose and clamp to hydraulic unit and hydraulic cylinder Note The oil return hose is shrink fitted and should be replaced with a new one if damaged during removal 5 Connect the clamp and unclamp hoses Connect tailstock hoses Note Right clamp unclamp hose of hydraulic unit is attached to bottom port of hydraulic cylinder and left hose is attached to top port The ports are located on the side of the hydraulic cylinder 6 Replace any panels that were removed to access the hydraulic unit 96 8710 f f ff _ O P VI January 1999 SERVICE MANUAL MECHANICAL SERVICE Series 3 8 INTERIOR WORKLIGHT REPLACEMENT 1 Jog the Z axis all the way to the right positive direction 2 TURN OFF power to the machine at the main breaker 3 Loosen the 14 BHCS that attach the light lens retainer 4 Remove the retainer and the light lens 5 Remove the light bulb and replace with 24 20 watt F20T12 CW bulb 6 Replace the light lens and retainer then tighten down the 14 BHCS 7 Restore power to the machine Gasket Light Lens Glued to Bulk Head 24 20 Watt Bulb F20T12 CW Window Light Light Lens Retainer 24 20 watt 3 F20T12 CW Bulb 4 Washer 1 4 20 x 3 4 Dus BH
107. 10 26 2 25 7042 COVER PLATE LEAD SCREW 84 10 45 1720 WASHER SPLIT LOCK 3 4 MED 27 1 25 7080 BUMPER BRACKET BRG HSG 85 6 45 1730 WASHER BLK HARD 3 8 28 1 25 7267 SWITCH MOUNT BRACKET 86 4 45 1740 WASHER BLK HARD 1 2 29 3 25 7485 BRACKET OIL LINE CARRIER 87 1 45 1860 PTHS 1 4 20 x 3 4 BLK OX 30 1 25 8003 TAILSTOCK VALVE BRACKET 88 1 46 1625 NUT HEX BLK OX 1 4 20 31 1 25 8024A TAILSTOCK ENCODER STRIP 89 3 46 1720 NUT HEX 1 2 13 32 1 25 8028 GUIDE WAYCOVER TS BOTTOM 90 6 46 1730 NUT HEX 3 8 16 33 1 25 8050 TAILSTOCK CHIP TRAY 91 2 48 0045 PIN PULL 3 8 x 1 1 2 34 1 25 8653 BRACKET SUPPORT ROLLER 92 2 50 3400 LINEAR GUIDE 35 1 25 8656 EXT BRACKET SUPPORT ROLLER 93 2 50 9010 LINEAR GUIDE 36 1 25 8678B CHANNEL DRIP T S 94 6 57 0075 O RING 2 021 BUNA 37 1 25 8792A RAIL INTERFACE 95 2 57 0080 O RING 2 0123 BUNA 38 1 25 8807 SUPPORT CONTROL BACK 96 1 57 0100 O RING 2 318 BUNA 39 1 25 8829A GUIDE T S WAY COVER 97 4 58 1560 ADPT 1 8 M BSPT TO 5 16 F 40 1 25 8873 SHIELD CHIP TS 98 18FT 58 2010 NYLON TUBING 5 32 CL 41 1 25 9746 CABLE CLAMP BASE 99 2 58 2100 SLEEVE 42 2 26 7233A GASKET DEFLECTOR SHIELD 100 8 58 2130 SLEEVE COMP NYLON TUBING 43 1 26 8011 LONG COOLANT TANK SEAL 101 2 58 2760 FITTING MANIFOLD 2 WAY 44 1 29 8043 LABEL TAILSTOCK PEDAL 102 2 58 3045 ELBOW 5 16 24 TO 5 16 24 45 1 29 8044 LABEL CHUCK PEDAL 103 1 58 8850 TUBE Z X AXIS CONNECTION 46 1 30 8863 Z AXIS OIL LINE ASSY 104 1 59 0013 CYLIND
108. 115VAC TO SERVO FAN SHIELD 2 115VAC 20 RETURN 20 SHIELD DRAIN 115VAC TO CONTACTOR COILS WYE TO DELTA OPTION 115VAC 20 RETURN 20 SHIELD DRAIN 115VAC TO PART CATCHER 115VAC 20 RETURN 20 SHIELD DRAIN 230 VAC FOR COOLANT PUMP FROM CB3 SHIELD 2 230VAC 20 230VAC RETURN 20 SHIELD DRAIN 230 VAC SINGLE PHASE POWER TO COOLANT PUMP SHIELD 2 230VAC 20 RETURN 20 SHIELD DRAIN LOW AIR PRESSURE OIL LUBE SENSOR SHIELD 3 LOW AIR SIGNAL 20 LOW OIL LUBE SIGNAL 20 COMMON DATA GROUND 20 SHIELD DRAIN LOW HYDRAULIC PRESSURE SWITCH FOR LATHE SHIELD 2 LOW HYDRAULIC RETURN D GROUND 65 20 LOW HYD PRESSURE SWITCH FOR VERTICAL TRANSMISSION 20 SHIELD DRAIN LOW HYD PRESSURE SHIELD 2 LOW HYD PRESSURE SIGNAL 20 COMMON 20 SHIELD DRAIN ATMA 5 TOS 7 968710 January 1999 970 971 972 973 990 991 992 993 994 995 1000 1000 1 1000 2 1000 3 1000 4 1000 5 1000 6 1000 7 1000 8 1000 9 1000 10 1000 11 1000 12 1000 13 1000 14 1000 15 1000 16 1020 1021 1022 1023 1024 1030 1031 1032 1033 1040 1041 1042 1043 1050 1051 1052 1053 96 8710 Series VECTOR DRIVE OVERVOLTAGE SHIELD 2 OVERVOLTAGE SIGNAL 24 OVERVOLTAGE RETURN 24 SHIELD DRAIN CABLE LIST KR 9 HOME SENSORS SHIELD 4 ALL 20 COMMON DATA GROUND X AXIS HOME SWITCH Y AXIS HOME SWITCH Z AXIS HOME SWITCH SHIELD DRAIN SPINDLE ENCODER CABLE MOCON SIDE CONNECTION
109. 14 1 22 8236 15 1 22 8238 16 1 22 8239 17 1 22 8240 18 6 22 8877 19 4 24 7325 20 1 25 7267 21 1 25 7459 22 1 25 8284 23 1 25 8296 24 1 25 8297 25 1 25 8300 26 1 25 8302 27 1 25 8303 28 1 25 8305 29 1 25 8306 30 1 25 8653 31 1 25 8656 32 1 25 9203 33 1 26 7233 34 1 26 8319 35 1 26 8324 36 1 30 8325 37 1 30 8335 38 1 32 0017 39 1 32 2040 40 40 0021 41 40 1632 42 40 16372 43 40 16385 44 40 1639 96 8710 DESCRIPTION NUT HSNG 40 50MM BS MACH TS ENCDR STRIP ATTCH BRKT BASE MACHINED HL 5 6 TAILSTOCK MACHINED HL 6 MOUNT HYD CYL T S CONDUIT STRAIN RELIEF FRT CONDUIT STRAIN RELIEF RR PLATE T S DBL FOOT PEDAL TAILSTOCK CYL ATTACH BRKT KEY STUB SHAFT WORM SHAFT STANDOFF CAM LINEAR GUIDE SUPPORT CONTROL BOX SUPPORT LEFT SUPPORT REAR 5 6 SUPPORT HYD FRONT 5 6 SUPPORT HYD REAR 5 6 BUSHING ISOLATOR HYD STR FIT METRIC LINEAR GDE Y AXIS MOUNTING BRACKET TRIP BRACKET TABLE SUPPORT CONTROL BACK GUIDE Z WAYCOVER BOTTOM RAIL GUIDE WAYCOVER T S STRIP ENCODER T S RAIL T S WAYCOVER LOWER MOUNT STRIP ENCODER RAIL DRIP T S COVER RAIL DRIP T S BRACKET SUPPORT ROLLER EXT BRCKT SUPPORT ROLLER COVER PLATE MTR MOUNT GASKET DEFLECTOR SHIELD STRIP SLIDE Z WAYCOVER LONG COOLANT TANK SEAL Z AXIS OIL LINE ASSY X Z AXIS OIL LINE ASSY ENCODER READ HEAD ASSY TELEMECH 85 IN Z AXIS SHCS 3 8 16 X 7 SHCS 1 4 20 X 1 2 SHCS 3 16 18 X 1 1 2 SHCS 5 16 18 X 3 4 SHCS 3 8 16 X 1 Series ITEM PART NO 45 46 47 4
110. 2010 NYLON TUBING 5 32 IN 11 1 25 7266 X AXIS MOUNT BRACKET 45 2 58 2110 SLEEVE NUTS LUBE ASSY 12 1 25 7459 TRIP BRACKET TABLE 46 2 58 2130 SLEEVE COMP NYLON TUBING 13 4 25 7485 BRACKET OIL LINE CARRIER LEFT 47 1 58 2763 3 WAY JUNCTION 14 1 25 7486 BRACKET OIL LINE CARRIER RIGH 48 1 58 3031 BANJO ELBOW 5 16 F x 6 M 15 1 26 7233A GASKET DEFLECTOR SHEILD 49 58 3105 REMOVED PIPE PLUG 1 4 NPT 16 30 1290A REMOVED LEAD SCREW ASSY 50 58 8663 REMOVED TUBING TRANS Z X 17 1 30 8716 X AXIS OIL LINE ASSEMBLY 51 0 8 59 6150A PLASTIC CARRIER 0130 06 18 1 30 9700 TOOL CHANGER ASSEMBLY 52 2 59 6153 PLASTIC CARRIER ENDS 19 1 32 2051 LIMIT SWITCH X HOME 53 18 59 6600 PLUG GUIDE RAIL 20 40 1610 SHCS 1 4 20 x 1 54 62 0013 REMOVED SERVO MOTOR YASKAWA 21 40 1632 SHCS 1 4 20 x 1 2 55 0 05 99 4521 ELECTRICAL GREASE 3 OZ TUBE 22 1 40 1636 SHCS 3 8 16 x 1 1 4 56 1 62 0014 YASKAWA SIGMA MOTOR 09 23 40 16385 5 16 18 x 3 4 57 1 40 16091 5 10 32 x 1 24 3 40 1639 SHCS 3 8 16 x 1 58 1 57 8576 GASKET COVER T C 25 40 16413 MSHCS M3x5 59 4 46 1625 NUT HEX BLACK OXIDE 1 4 20 26 40 16582 M10 x 35 60 4 44 1717 SSS CUP PT 1 4 20 X 1 3 4 27 40 16583 M10 x 45 61 4 40 1500 SHCS 5 16 18 X 1 28 40 1667 SHCS 5 16 18 x 1 1 4 62 1 20 8364 SPACER 29 40 1697 SHCS 1 4 20 x 3 4 63 2 40 1631 SHCS 1 4 20 x 3 8 30 40 1705 REMOVED FHCS 10 32 x 1 64 30 1220A REMOVED COUPLING ASSY SERVO DR 31 40 1715 SHCS
111. 2060 FLEXPAK FOR 5 WHERE USED APPLICATION 30 0470 BS ASSY 40mm 1 57 x 71 94 VF 6B 8B X 30 0450 BS ASSY 40mm 1 57 x 57 90 5140 Z 30 0473 BS ASSY 40mm 1 57 x 90 86 VF 7B 9B X 30 0474 BS ASSY 40mm 1 57 x 47 71 VF 6B 7B 8B 9B 10B 11B amp VR 11B Y Z 30 0198 BS ASSY 40mm 1 57 x 32 70 VF 5 50 Y Z 30 0202 BS ASSY 40mm 1 57 x 57 90 VF 5 50 X 96 8710 r fffig nV To vv 243
112. 27 SHCS 1 2 13 3 1 2 5 1 20 8720 SWING ARM SPRING 63 1 40 1663 SHCS 1 2 13 x 1 3 4 6 1 20 8721 BUSHING SWING ARM SPRING 64 42 40 1667 SHCS 5 16 18 1 1 4 7 1 20 8750 BASE MACHINED 65 2 40 1675 SHCS 5 16 18 x 2 1 4 8 1 20 8753 TAILSTOCK MACHINED 66 5 40 1697 SHCS 1 4 20 x 3 4 9 1 20 8843 BUMPER BALL SCREW 67 5 40 1705 FHCS 10 32 x 1 10 6 20 8877 BUSHING ISOLATOR HYD 68 2 40 1712 SHCS 5 16 18 x 1 2 11 1 20 8894 PLATE T S DBL FOOT PEDAL 69 4 40 1715 SHCS 5 16 18 x 1 1 2 12 1 20 8987 ARM TAILSTOCK CYLINDER 70 4 40 1800 SHCS 8 32 x 3 4 13 1 20 8988A TAILSTOCK CYL ATTACH BRKT 71 10 40 1810 SHCS 3 4 10 x 3 1 4 14 1 20 9007 NUT HOUSING 72 4 40 1850 SHCS 10 32 x 3 8 15 1 20 9096 BUMPER 73 4 40 1963 SHCS 3 8 16 x 2 1 4 16 6 22 2629 KEY 0 1875 0 1870 SQ 74 2 40 1976 BHCS 1 4 20 x 3 4 17 68 22 7458 CAM SCREW LINEAR GUIDE 75 2 40 1980 BHCS 1 4 20 x 1 2 18 1 22 8048 Z AXIS WAY COVER BTM GUIDE 76 33 40 1981 FBHCS 1 4 20 x 1 2 19 1 22 8064 WAYCOVER BTM GUIDE T 4 40 2028 SHCS 10 32 x 1 1 4 20 1 22 8780 SUPPORT BACK COVER 78 6 40 2035 SHCS 1 4 20 x 1 3 4 21 1 22 8793 SUPPORT CONTROL BOX 79 2 43 1609 HHB 1 2 13 x 6 22 1 22 8795 SUPPORT LEFT REAR 80 12 45 0008 WASHER 5 16 USS STANDARD 23 1 22 8796 SUPPORT LEFT FRONT 81 17 45 0040 WASHER BLK HARD 1 4 24 1 22 8797 SUPPORT LEFT MIDDLE 82 4 45 1600 WASHER SPLIT LOCK 5 16 MED 25 1 22 8841 BRACKET SPRING T C 83 6 45 1620 WASHER SPLIT LOCK
113. 3 OZ TUBE 211 January 1999 SERVICE MIANUAL ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS Series 64 18 8 4 CNE 88 qE 66 48 4 41 81 29 a GE Cea 1 0 T zu m 666547 du 1 x D oo sp Sei ES 12 7 m mmm L 2 55 57 60 51 35 82 79 SHEET 2 OF 2 80 DESIGNATES PARTS AVAILABLE FROM HAAS SERVICE DEPT 84 DESIGNATES REMOVED PART SL 40 Casting Assembly 212 nTP ll _____ _ 96 8710 January 1999 ITEMQTY PART 1 1 20 0150 2 1 20 8035 3 1 20 8200 4 1 20 8203 5 1 20 8228 6 1 20 8617 7 1 20 8618 8 1 20 8894 9 1 20 8988 10 1 22 2629 11 2 22 7423 12 80 22 7458 13 1 22 8233
114. 31149180 76 2 48 8 84 77 51 16 16 72 81 9 59 SL 30 Tool Changer Assembly 96 8710 231 O ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS ITEM QTY PARTNO 1 1 20 8509 2 1 20 8510 3 1 20 8511A 4 1 20 8512A 5 1 20 8515 6 1 20 8516 7 2 20 8517 8 1 20 8518 9 1 20 8522A 10 12 20 8523 11 1 20 8530 12 1 20 8532 13 1 20 8533 14 1 20 8537 15 1 20 8538 16 1 20 8539 17 1 20 8543 18 1 20 8550 19 1 20 8557 20 1 20 8767 21 1 20 8768 22 1 20 8769 23 1 20 8770 24 1 20 8771 25 1 22 8544 26 1 22 9673 27 2 24 4010 28 1 25 7459 29 1 25 8534 30 1 25 8536 31 12 25 8870 32 1 30 1220A 33 1 30 3650 34 1 30 3655 35 1 30 3660 36 1 32 2011 37 1 32 2153 38 1 32 2154 39 8 40 1500 40 4 40 1610 41 2 40 1631 42 15 40 1632 43 1 40 16372 232 DESCRIPTION WORM TOOL CHANGER SHAFT TRANSFER T C GEAR CLUSTER T C WORM HOUSING T C CLAMP BEARING WORM T C LEVER CAM CAM TURRET T C RETAINER SPRINGS T C GEAR SPUR T C NUT TOOL HOLDER SHAFT TURRET T C RETAINER TURRET T C RING SWITCH T C RETAINER SPRING T C SPACER ROD END T C BEARING REAR T C KEY TURRET T C SPACER BELLEVILLE BUSHING FRONT TURRET TURRET T C COUPLING TURRET MALE COUPLING TURRET FEMALE MOUNT COUPLING TURRET TOOL CHANGER HOUSING MACHINED KEY GEAR SPUR T C SPACER BELLEVILLE WASHER TRIP BRACKET TABLE BRACKET HOME SWITCH BRACKET LIMIT
115. 34 25 8536 30 0211 30 3650 30 3655 30 3660 32 2010 32 2161 32 2162 40 0014 40 0015 40 1500 40 1610 40 1631 40 1632 40 16372 40 16385 40 1639 40 16403 40 1643 40 1703 40 1716 40 1800 40 1801 40 1850 43 1614 43 7006 45 1620 45 2001 46 7016 48 0049 49 1010 49 4115 51 2042 51 2983 51 2984 51 3001 51 7001 56 2090 56 9057 57 0029 57 0030 57 0075 57 0080 57 1045 57 2022 Series DESCRIPTION TURRET T C NUT TOOL HOLDER TOOL CHANGER HOUSING MACHINED COUPLING TURRET FEMALE COUPLING TURRET MALE MOUNT COUPLING TURRET WORM TOOL CHANGER SHAFT TRANSFER T C GEAR CLUSTER T C WORM HOUSING T C CLAMP BEARING WORM LEVER CAM CAM TURRET T C RETAINER SPRINGS T C GEAR SPUR T C SHAFT TURRET T C RETAINER TURRET T C RING SWITCH T C RETAINER SPRING T C SPACER ROD END T C BEARING REAR T C KEY TURRET T C SPACER BELLEVILLE BUSHING FRONT TURRET KEY GEAR SPUR T C SPACER BELLEVILLE WASHER TRIP BRACKET TABLE PLATE COOLANT TURRET BRACKET HOME SWITCH BRACKET LIMIT SWITCH T C COUPLING ASSEMBLY AIR CYLINDER ASSY XFER COOLANT LINE ASSY XFER COOLANT TIP ASSY TELEMECH 24 IN CABLE ASSY REED SWITCH UNCLAMP REED SWITCH CLAMP SHCS 7 16 14 x 1 3 4 SHCS 7 16 14 x 2 1 4 SHCS 5 16 18 x 1 SHCS 1 4 20 x 1 SHCS 1 4 20 x 3 8 SHCS 1 4 20 x 1 2 SHCS 3 8 16 x 1 1 2 SHCS 5 16 18 x 3 4 SHCS 3 8 16 x 1 SSS CUP PT 10 32 x 1 4 SHCS 3 8 16 x 2 1 2 FH
116. 342 343 350 351 352 390 391 392 393 410 411 412 413 490 491 492 493 494 96 8710 Series TAILSTOCK REVERSE OPTION 115VAC 115VAC RETURN SHIELD DRAIN SPARE 12VDC TAILSTOCK RAPID OPTION 115VAC 115VAC RETURN SHIELD DRAIN 115 VAC RED GREEN BEACON CABLE SHIELD 3 RED LAMP 115VAC GREEN LAMP 115VAC COMMON 115VAC SHIELD DRAIN CABLE OP LIGHT SPINDLE MOTOR FAN 115VAC 115VAC RETURN SHIELD DRAIN 115VAC TO OIL PUMP LEG 1 115VAC FUSED AT 3 A 720 LEG 2 115VAC FUSED AT 3 A 720 SHIELD DRAIN 230V 3PH FROM CB6 TO K2 LATHE HYDRAULICS PHASE 1 230VAC PHASE 2 230VAC PHASE 3 230VAC 230V 3PH FROM K2 TO HYDRAULIC PUMP LATHE PHASE 1 230VAC PHASE 2 230VAC PHASE 3 230VAC 115VAC HYD PUMP ENABLE SHIELD 2 115VAC 115VAC RETURN 115VAC TO 4 TH AXIS BRAKE LATHE PART DOOR SHIELD 2 115VAC 20 115VAC RETURN 20 SHIELD DRAIN TAILSTOCK FOOT SWITCH SIGNAL 20 RETURN 720 SHIELD DRAIN ALL BRUSHLESS AXIS SERVO MOTOR DRIVE POWER CABLE A PHASE B PHASE C PHASE GROUND HAAS CABLE LIST KR 9 173 sy CABLE LIST 490A 491A 492A 493A 490B 491B 492B 500 501 502 503 510 520 530 540 550 570 571 572 573 610 610 1 610 2 610 3 610 4 610 5 610 6 610 7 610 8 610 9 610 10 630 640 6400 6406 1 6406 2 6406 3 6406 4 6406 5 6406 6 6406 7 174 Series 320VDC FROM SPINDLE DRIVE TO THE AMPLIFIERS SHIELD 2 HIGH VOLT P1
117. 5 16 18 x 1 1 2 65 1 22 2629 KEY SUB SHAFT WORM SHAFT 32 40 1750 BHCS 10 32 x 3 8 66 1 30 0211 COUPLING ASSY SERVO DR 33 40 1850 SHCS 10 32 x 3 8 67 1 30 0616 LEAD SCREW ASS Y 34 40 1976 BHCS 1 4 20 x 3 4 DESIGNATES REMOVED PART 96 8710 217 SERVICE MANUAL ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS Se rie 1999 96 46 57 47145 53 144144 51 52 13 45 10 15 2 67 6021038 55142 41 19 33137 25 32 31436 39 17 21438 9 E O 222110 j o SF S O oo Bre oft m 20 35 WRU OCG DO 61 H E ee M 43 CD LI 24 e DESIGNATES PARTS AVAILABLE FROM HAAS SERVICE DEPT SL 30 Wedge Assembly 218 Tn ALLA 96 8710 January 1999 IT QTY PART TITLE OMAN O Q 0 N 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 oL ck 22 23
118. 5 22 2629 KEY STUB SHAFT WORM SHAFT 1 40 40 1667 SHCS 5 16 18 X 1 1 4 48 6 22 7423 STANDOFF 2 41 40 1705 FHCS 10 32 X 1 10 7 22 7458 CAM LINEAR GUIDE 38 42 40 1715 SHCS 5 16 18 X 1 1 2 6 8 22 8233 SUPPORT CONTROL BOX 1 43 40 1850 SHCS 10 32 X 3 8 14 9 22 8236 SUPPORT LEFT 1 44 40 1963 SHCS 3 8 16 X 2 1 4 2 10 22 8238 SUPPORT REAR 140 1 45 40 1976 BHCS 1 4 20 X 3 4 2 11 22 8239 SUPPORT HYD FRONT SL40 1 46 40 1981 FBHCS 1 4 20 X 1 2 8 12 22 8240 SUPPORT HYD REAR SL40 1 47 40 2028 SHCS 10 32 X 1 1 4 6 13 22 8877 BUSHING ISOLATOR HYD 6 48 43 7011 HHB 5 16 18 X 4 2 14 24 7325 STR FIT METRIC LINEAR GDE 4 49 45 1600 WASHER SPLIT LOCK 5 16 MED 14 15 25 7267 Y AXIS MOUNTING BRACKET 1 50 45 1620 WASHER SPLIT LOCK 10 MED 4 16 25 7459 TRIP BRACKET TABLE 1 51 45 1681 WASHER SPLIT LOCK 3 8 MED 16 17 25 8284 SUPPORT CONTROL BACK 1 52 45 1730 WASHER BLK HARD 3 8 24 18 25 8296 GUIDE Z WAYCOVER BOTTOM 1 53 45 1860 PTHS 1 4 20 3 4 BLK OX 1 19 25 8297 RAIL GUIDE WAYCOVER T S 1 54 46 1625 NUT HEX BLK OX 1 4 20 1 20 25 8307 COVER BASE 1 55 46 1730 NUT HEX 3 8 16 10 21 25 8653 BRACKET SUPPORT ROLLER 1 56 48 0045 PIN PULL 3 8 X 1 1 2 4 22 25 8656 EXT BRCKT SUPPORT ROLLER 1 57 50 9305 LINEAR GUIDE X AXIS VF 4 2 23 25 9203 COVER PLATE MTR MOUNT 1 58 57 0075 O RING 2 021 BUNA 1 24 26 7233A GASKET DEFLECTOR SHIELD 1 59 57 0080 O RING 2 023 BUNA 1 25 26 8319 STRIP SLIDE 7 WAYCOVER 1 60 57 0100 O RING 2 318 BUNA 1 26 26 8324 LONG COOLANT TANK SEAL 1 61 58 3031 BA
119. 6091 31 2 40 16093 32 2 40 1610 33 8 40 1632 34 4 40 1636 35 6 40 1639 36 2 40 16413 37 6 40 1643 38 4 40 16435 39 16 40 1651 40 1 40 1654 41 1 40 16627 42 38 40 1667 43 2 40 1675 44 5 40 1697 45 5 40 1705 96 8710 DESCRIPTION BUMPER BASE MACHINED BUMPER BALL SCREW BUSHING ISOLATOR HYD NUT HOUSING KEY 0 1875 0 1870 SQ CAM SCREW LINEAR GUIDE Z AXIS WAYCOVER BTM GUIDE WAYCOVER BTM GDE BS STRIP SUPPORT BACK COVER SUPPORT CONTROL BOX SUPPORT LEFT REAR SUPPORT LEFT FRONT SUPPORT LEFT MIDDLE BRACKET SPRING T C COVER PLATE LEAD SCREW BUMPER BRACKET BRG HSG SWITCH MOUNT BRACKET BRACKET OIL LINE CARRIER BRACKET SUPPORT ROLLER EXT BRACKET SUPPORT ROLLER RAIL INTERFACE SUPPORT CONTROL BACK CABLE CLAMP BASE GASKET DEFLECTOR SHIELD LONG COOLANT TANK SEAL Z AXIS OIL LINE ASSY TELEMECH 85 IN Z AXIS ASSY SHCS 5 16 18 x 1 BHCS 10 32 x 1 BHCS 1 4 20 x 3 4 SHCS 1 4 20 x 1 SHCS 1 4 20 x 1 2 SHCS 3 8 16 x 1 1 4 SHCS 3 8 16 x 1 MSHCS 3x5 SHCS 3 8 16 x 2 1 2 SHCS 3 8 16 x 3 MSHCS M12 x 60 SHCS 1 2 13 x 1 SHCS 1 2 13 x 3 1 2 SHCS 5 16 18 x 1 1 4 SHCS 5 16 18 x 2 1 4 SHCS 1 4 20 x 3 4 FHCS 10 32 x 1 Series ITEM QTY PART No 46 14 40 1715 47 10 40 1810 48 12 40 1850 49 10 40 1981 50 4 40 2028 51 6 40 2035 52 2 43 1609 53 12 45 0008 54 6 45 0040 55 18 45 1600 56 4 45 1620 57 10 45 1720 58 8 45 1730 59 10 45 1740 60 1 45 1860 61 1 46 1625
120. 710 SERVICE MANUAL January 1999 MECHANICAL SERVICE 96 8710 Series d Push the wedge all the way towards the motor end Underneath the wedge remove the SHCS that attach the lead screw nut to the nut housing Pull the lead screw forward to clear the nut from the housing and angle the lead screw towards the right of the bearing support Carefully remove lead screw CAUTION Be careful during removal or installation of lead screw to protect the surfaces 40mm Lead Screws At the bearing support side loosen the lock nut screw Unscrew the clamp nut an 1 8 away from the bearing support and retighten clamp nut screw Attach shaft lock tool b At the motor end loosen the motor coupling on the lead screw side of the coupling Remove the four motor SHCS and the motor Remove the Woodruff key from the key way on the lead screw In the motor housing loosen the lock nut screw and attach the spanner wrench Remove the clamp nut c Disconnect the oil line d Underneath the wedge remove the SHCS from the lead screw nut and push the wedge towards the motor housing e the bearing support side remove the shaft lock tool and clamp nut Remove the alignment pins and the SHCS from the bearing support casting Make note of any shims Hold the lead screw in place and remove the bearing support Pull forward on the lead screw and carefully remove CAUTION Be ca
121. 8 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 AAS k NS ZS 23023 40 16413 40 16435 40 16437 40 16439 40 16585 40 1660 40 1663 40 1667 40 1705 40 1715 40 1800 40 1850 40 1963 40 1976 40 1980 40 1981 40 2028 43 7011 45 1600 45 1620 45 1681 45 1730 45 1860 46 1625 46 1730 48 0045 49 0007 50 8205 50 9305 57 0075 57 0080 57 0100 58 3031 59 0034 59 1041 59 1064 59 6400 59 6600 59 6655 59 7201 62 0013 63 1030 63 1031 90 7000B 99 4521 ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS DESCRIPTION MSHCS M3 X 5 SHCS 3 8 16 X 3 BLK OX SHCS 3 8 16 X 3 1 4 SHCS 3 8 16 X 5 SHCS M10 X 100 SHCS 1 2 13 X 1 1 2 SHCS 1 2 13 X 1 3 4 SHCS 5 16 18 X 1 1 4 FHCS 10 32 X 1 SHCS 5 16 18 X 1 1 2 SHCS 8 32 X 3 4 SHCS 10 32 X 3 8 SHCS 3 8 16 X 2 1 4 BHCS 1 4 20 X 3 4 BHCS 1 4 20 X 1 2 FBHCS 1 4 20 X 1 2 SHCS 10 32 X 1 1 4 HHB 5 16 18 X 4 WASHER SPLIT LOCK 5 16 MED WASHER SPLIT LOCK 10 MED WASHER SPLIT LOCK 3 8 MED WASHER BLK HARD 3 8 PTHS 1 4 20 X 3 4 BLK OX NUT HEX BLK OX 1 4 20 NUT HEX 3 8 16 PIN PULL 3 8 X 1 1 2 SPACER 1 4 ID X 1 LONG GUIDE LINEAR TAILSTOCK LINEAR GUIDE X AXIS VF 4 O RING 2 021 BUNA O RING 2 023 BUNA O RING 2 318 BUNA BANJO ELBOW 5 16 F X M6 M HYDRAULIC CYLINDER LEGS CONTROL FOOT SWITCH W CONDUIT GUIDE WHEEL PLUG G
122. 9 6153 59 6655 59 8220 62 0013 99 4521 20 7474 25 7042A 40 1643 44 1717 46 1625 46 1730 62 0014 30 0211 22 2629 20 0141 58 2763 40 1660 20 8364 40 1636 45 1730 40 1654 BHCS 1 4 20 x 3 4 WASHER BLK HARD 1 4 A325 WASHER SPLIT LOCK 5 16 MED WASHER SPLIT LOCK 10 MED WASHER BLK HARD 1 2 REMOVED WASHER SPLIT LOCK 1 4 MED NUT HEX 1 2 13 PLATED PIN PULL 3 8 x 1 1 2 LINEAR GUIDE O RING 2 021 BUNA O RING 2 023 BUNA GASKET PLATE ACCESS T C GASKET COVER T C NYLON TUBING 5 32 IN CL SLEEVE COMP NYLON TUBING BANJO ELBOW 5 16 F x M6 M PLASTIC CARRIER SEALED PLASTIC CARRIER ENDS RUBBER PLUG GUIDE RAIL SPRING CROSS SLIDE REMOVED SERVO MOTOR YASKAWA ELECTRICAL GREASE 3 OZ TUBE BUMPER X AXIS BLUE VF 2 SNAP LOCK MTR MNT CVR PLT SHCS 3 8 16 X 2 1 2 BLK OX SSS CUP PT 1 4 20 X 1 3 4 NUT HEX BLK OX 1 4 20 REMOVED NUT HEX 3 8 16 YASKAWA SIGMA MOTOR 09 COUPLING ASSEMBLY SERVO DRIVE KEY SUB SHAFT WORM SHAFT SNAP LOCK RING BUMPER 4 3 WAY JUNCTION SHCS 1 2 13 X 1 1 2 SPACER SHCS 3 8 16 X 1 1 4 WASHER 3 8 BLACK ANODIZE X 1 8 THK SHCS 1 2 13 X 1 DESIGNATES REMOVED PART 221 SERVICE MANUAL ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS Se rie January 1999 QUQUOUGL DESIGNATES PARTS AVAILABLE FROM HAAS SER
123. ANUAL MECHANICAL SERVICE Series 4 Place the washer on the spring retainer on the lip of the turret shaft Clean any grease that may have gotten on the shaft 5 Place the needle bearing on the lip and stick it to the washer Be sure the other surface of the bearing is clean and free of grease 6 Put a small amount of grease on the turret key to hold it in place 7 Place the turret on the shaft align the turret key Note Check that the turret key did not fall off Check that the washer is centered on the turret Check that the washer and needle bearing are still on the shaft lip 8 Slide the turret fully on the shaft 9 Replace the turret retainer and snug the four bolts Note Check the turret O ring If you can see either the washer or the needle bearing they have slid off the shaft Return to step 7 of the turret removal section 10 Tighten the four turret retainer bolts 11 Replace the screw in the bottom of the plate located just behind the turret on the turret assembly 12 Pour the oil back in the turret assembly 13 Remove the brace from between the turret shaft and the casing 14 Connect the air The turret should clamp 15 Change Parameter 76 back to 500 16 Replace the turret assembly and sliding tool change covers 17 Exercise the tool changer to verify proper operation Turret Motor COUPLING ADJUSTMENT Note The turret must be at tool 1 and clamped to perform this procedure
124. AWINGS ITEM QTY PART TITLE 1 1 20 7403 COUPLING SERVO DRIVE 2 1 20 7615 COUPLER BRUSHLESS 3 2 51 2014 BEARING LOCKNUT CL18F 4 2 56 0065 SNAP RING 5100 112 5 1 59 2060 FLEXPAK FOR AJ05 WHERE USED APPLICATION 30 0615 BS ASSY 32mm 1 26 x 33 27 SL20 Z 30 0617 BS ASSY 32mm 1 26 x 48 23 SL30 Z 30 0451 BS ASSY 32mm 1 26 x 25 65 SL40 X 30 0194 BS ASSY 32mm 1 26 x 35 65 VF OEB 2B X 30 0195 BS ASSY 32mm 1 26 x 48 23 VF 3B X Z 30 0196 BS ASSY 32mm 1 26 X 33 27 VF 3B 4B SL20 Y Z 30 0197 BS ASSY 32mm 1 26 x 58 47 VF B X 30 0616 BS ASSY 32mm 1 26 x 13 53 5120 X 30 0618 BS ASSY 32mm 1 26 x 16 78 SL30 X 30 0157 BS ASSY 32mm 1 26 x 25 65 SL40 VF 1 2 0 96 8710 241 SERVICE MANUAL ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS Se rie 1999 2 o CH Z CD CID 0 748 CN 1 Z L u 40mm Coupling Assembly 242 A 96 8710 SERVICE MANUAL ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS Series ITEM QTY PART No TITLE 1 2 20 7615 COUPLER SERVO DRIVE BRUSHLESS 2 2 51 2014 BEARING LOCKNUT CL18F 3 2 56 0065 SNAP RING 5100 112 4 1 59
125. BELT 5VX900 O RING 383 BUNA ELBOW 1 4 NYLON TUBING PIPE PLUG 1 4 NPT SHAFT ENCODER 5000 LINE DESIGNATES REMOVED PART 96 8710 AHAS ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS 227 January 1999 SERVICE MIANUAL ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS Series 45 75 76 Mm 68 15 83 71 01 37 38 sep 42 1 90 41 44 61 65 72 89 32 79 9 66 1047 70 78 6 49 87 60 11 68 26 27 25 14 62 22 77 85 DESIGNATES PARTS AVAILABLE FROM HAAS SERVICE DEPT SL 20 Tool Changer Assembly 228 gt s A 96 8710 SERVICE MANUAL ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS January 1999 Series ITEM QTY PART NO DESCRIPTION 1 1 20 8364 SPACER ANTI ROTATE T C AIR 2 1 20 8503A TOOL CHANGER HOUSING MACHINED 3 1 20 8505A COUPLING TURRET FEMALE 4 1 20 8506A COUPLING TURRET MALE 5 1 20 8507A MOUNT COUPLING TURRET 6 1 20 8509 WORM TOOL CHANGER 7 1 20 8510 SHAFT TRANSFER T C 8 1 20 8511A GEAR CLUSTER T C 9 1 20 8512A WORM HOUSING T C 10 1 20 8515 CLAMP BEARING WORM T C 11 1 20 8516 LEVER CAM 12 2 20 8517 CAM TURRET T C 13 1 20 8518 RETAINER SPRINGS T C 14 1 20 8522A GEAR SPUR T C 15 10 20 8523 NUT TOOL HOLDER 16 1 20 8530 SHAFT TURRET T C 17 1 20 8531A TURRET T C 18 1 20 8532 RETAINER TURRET T C 19 1 20 8533 RING SWITCH T C 20 1 20 8537 RETAINER SPRING T C 21 1 20 8538 SPACER ROD END T C 22 1 20 8539 BEARING REAR T C 23 1 20
126. C 46 22 40 1632 SHCS 1 4 20 x 1 2 101 4 59 1041 LEGS CONTROL 47 6 40 1639 SHCS 3 8 16 x 1 102 2 59 1054 FOOT SWITCH W FLEX COND 48 2 40 16413 MSHCS x 5 103 1 59 6400 GUIDE WHEEL 49 4 40 1643 SHCS 3 8 16 x 2 1 2 104 68 59 6600 PLUG GUIDE RAIL 50 8 40 16435 SHCS 3 8 16 x 3 105 6 59 7201 GROMMET RUBBER 330 51 2 40 16438 SHCS 3 8 16 x 4 106 1 59 8508 SPRING CROSS SLIDE 52 16 40 16583 SHCS M10 x 45 107 1 62 0013 SERVO MOTOR YASKAVA 53 16 40 16585 SHCS M10 x 100 108 4 63 1031 CABLE CLAMP 1 4 54 1 40 16627 SHCS 1 2 13 x 3 1 2 109 1 90 7000B HPU W T S EXT GAUGE 55 2 40 1663 SHCS 1 2 13 x 1 3 4 110 0 05 99 4521 ELECTRICAL GREASE 3 OZ TUBE 96 8710 207 SERVICE MANUAL ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS Se rie January 1999 6 115 6482 6982 2642 1 52 7 28 72 83 4856 58 99 103 14166 41
127. COMMON ABBREVIATIONS USED IN HAAS MACHINES 96 8710 CNCR SPINDLE CRC CRT CW DB DC DGNOS DIR DNC DOS CNVR EOB EOF EPROM E Stop FHCS LO CLNT LOW AIR PR LVPS MB MCD RLY BRD MDI Alternating Current Ampere Automatic Pallet Changer Automatic Parts Loader American Standard Code for Information Interchange Automatic Tool Changer Automatic Tool Change Forward Automatic Tool Changer Reverse American Wire Gauge Button Head Cap Screw Computer Assisted Design Computer Assisted Machining Circuit Breaker Cubic Centimeter Counter Clockwise Cubic Feet per Minute Computerized Numeric Control Concurrent Spindle with axis motion Cyclic Redundancy Check Digit Cathode Ray Tube Clockwise Draw Bar Direct Current Diagnostic Directory Direct Numerical Control Disk Operating System Enable Conveyor End Of Block End Of File Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory Emergency Stop Flat Head Cap Screw Foot Fuse Forward Gauge Hex Head Bolts Horse Power Horizontal Series Of Machining Centers Inside Diameter Isolated Gate Bipolar Transistor Inch Input Output Printed Circuit Board Local Area Network Pound Light Emitting Diode Low Coolant Low Air Pressure Low Voltage Power Supply Megabyte 1 million M Code Relay Board Manual Data Input HAAS EZ TROUBLESHOOTING NO OD OPER PARAM PCB PGM POR POSIT PROG PSI PWM RAM REPT RIG TAP RET REV CNVR RJH RPDB
128. CS 10 32 x 1 2 SHCS 5 16 18 x 1 3 4 SHCS 8 32 x 3 4 SHCS 8 32 x 3 8 SHCS 10 32 x 3 8 HHB 1 2 20 x 1 1 2 HHB 5 16 18 x 1 WASHER SPLIT LOCK 10 MEDIUM WASHER ARBOR BEARING NUT N 13 PIN PULL 1 2x 1 SHOULDER BOLT 3 8 x 1 1 2 WASHER STEEL BEARING LOCK NUT BH 04 THRUST WASHER THRUST WASHER BEARING THRUST NEEDLE ASSY BALL BEARING RETAIN RING RR 300 RETAIN RING N5100 150 SEAL CR 29841 O RING BUNA 2 258 O RING 2 021 BUNA O RING 2 023 BUNA SEAL TURRET SHAFT O RING 2 150 BUNA ANAS January 1999 96 8710 January 1999 Series 30 0057 TOOL CHANGER ASSY SL40 CONTINUED ITEM QTY DWG_NUMBER 76 1 57 2129 77 1 57 2150 78 1 57 2154 79 1 57 2831 80 10 57 2994 81 10 57 8283 82 1 58 8657 83 4 59 0035 84 3 59 2056 85 1 59 2057 86 1 62 0013 87 0 05 99 4521 96 8710 DESCRIPTION SEAL WORM SHAFT O RING 2 172 PARKER O RING 240 ALL SEALS O RING 2 130 BUNA O RING 2 039N525 60 PRKR GASKET PLATE COOLANT T H TUBING COOLANT FRONT DIE SPRING 3 4 STEEL BALLS 5 16 STEEL BALL SERVO MOTOR YASKAWA ELECTRICAL GREESE 3 OZ TUBE AAAS ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS 235 236 ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS COUPLING ASS Y 3 MOTOR MOUNT 4 SERVICE MANUAL Series BALL SCREW SEE TABLE A M u Jn 1
129. CS 14 p Bulk Head Figure 3 22 Interior worklight assembly 72 96 8710 January 1999 SERVICE MANUAL MECHANICAL SERVICE Series 3 9 TURRET CROSS SLIDE SPRING WARNING Power on machine but DO NOT PRESS EMERGENCY STOP or turret will fall during spring removal 1 Remove sliding tool changer cover located in the back of the machine to gain access to spring 22 Cylinder spring Sliding tool retainer changer cover 3 4 HHB 3 8 2 724 Cross slide spring Pivot arm 2 Spring retainer beveled Spring bracket Figure 3 23 Cross slide spring components 2 Unbolt X axis waycover from tool changer box 3 Jog the turret to top of X axis travel 4 Insert a wood block between ballscrew support and ballscrew nut to safely block the assembly 5 Loosen 3 8 SHCS that holds lower pivot arm to spring bracket then loosen 3 4 nut of upper pivot arm of spring bracket 6 Place a 3 4 wrench on the pivot arm and push the spring forward slowly to relieve the spring tension WARNING Be careful not to release tension too fast Note Recommend using 3 4 wrench with cheater bar for leverage when relieving spring tension 6 8710 d AT 8 KE SERVICE MANUAL MECHANICAL SERVICE 74 9 January 1999 Series 3 4 Pivot arm 3 8 SHCS Figure 3 24 Spring tension relief Remove cross sl
130. D Screw REMOVAL 1 Turn the machine ON ZERO RETURN all axes and put the machine in HANDLE JOG mode 2 Remove rear and right side covers Remove the hard stops from the bearing support and motor end of the lead screw 3 Remove the cover from the motor housing Disconnect the oil line from the lead screw nut Oil Line Fitting X Axis Bumper Cover Plate Bumper Motor Housing Bracket Bearing Sleeve Bumper G Bearing lt Locknut SHCS Pd gt lt M gt Bearing lt I Support Bearing lt Casting 4 I SHCS ke Ball Screw Nut Woodruff Key lt i Nut Housing Servo Ball Screw Motor Mount Casting 5 Motor Coupling Assy Figure 3 26 For 32mm Lead Screw a At the bearing support side loosen the lock nut screw Unscrew the clamp nut an 1 8 and retighten clamp nut screw Attach shaft lock tool to bearing support side of lead screw b Atthe motor end loosen the motor coupling on the lead screw side of the coupling Remove the four motor mount SHCS and the motor Remove the Woodruff key from the key way on the lead screw c Inthe motor housing loosen the lock nut screw attach the spanner wrench to the clamp nut and remove the nut from the lead screw in the motor housing Unfasten the six 4 20 x 1 SHCS from the bearing sleeve and remove the bearing sleeve from the motor housing On the bearing support side remove bearing support clamp nut ALKA T 96 8
131. DN RPDBUP RPM S SDIST SFM SHCS Series Normally Open Outside Diameter Operator Parameter Printed Circuit Board Program Power On Reset Positions Program Pounds Per Square Inch Pulse Width Modulation Random Access Memory Repeat Rigid Tap Return Reverse Conveyor Remote Jog Handle Rotary Pallet Draw Bar Down Rotary Pallet Draw Bar Up Revolutions Per Minute Spindle Speed Servo Distribution PCB Surface Feet Per Minute Socket Head Cap Screw Serial Input Output Serial Key Board Inter Face PCB Spindle Tool Number Tool Changer Total Indicated Runout Tool Nose Compensation Tool Release Piston Tail Stock Through The Spindle Coolant Vertical Mill very first Vertical Mill Extended Vertical Machining Center HAAS January 1999 96 8710 January 1999 SERVICE MANUAL TROUBLESHOOTING EZ Series 1 TROUBLESHOOTING This section is intended for use in determining the solution to a known problem Solutions given are intended to give the individual servicing the machine a pattern to follow in first determining the problem s source and second solving the problem The troubleshooting tips are organized in this section according to the area of the machine that may be giving sign of a problem Ex Out of round circles in drilling will be found under the heading General Machine Operation Accuracy If the problem you are experiencing cannot be found under the heading you expect plea
132. ER BRACKET 80 1 45 1860 PTHS 1 4 20 x 3 4 BLK OX 26 2 25 7485 BRACKET OIL LINE CARRIER L 81 1 46 1625 NUT HEX BLK OX 1 4 20 27 1 25 8050 TAILSTOCK CHIP TRAY 82 1 46 1720 NUT HEX 1 2 13 PLATED 28 1 25 8653 BRACKET SUPPORT ROLLER 83 6 46 1730 NUT HEX 3 8 16 29 1 25 8656 EXT BRACKET SUPPORT ROLLER 84 2 48 0045 PIN PULL 3 8 x 1 1 2 30 1 25 8673B GUIDE WAYCOVER T S BOTTOM 85 1 49 2015 PTHS 1 4 20 x 7 8 BLK OX 31 1 25 8675A GUIDE WAYCOVER T S BOTTOM 86 2 50 3300 LINEAR GUIDE 32 1 25 8678B CHANNEL DRIP TAILSTOCK 87 2 50 3400 LINEAR GUIDE 33 1 25 8873 SHIELD CHIP T S 88 1 57 0075 O RING 2 021 BUNA 34 1 25 8925 SUPPORT BACK COVER 89 1 57 0080 O RING 2 023 BUNA 35 1 25 8950A RAIL INTERFACE 90 1 57 0100 O RING 2 318 BUNA 36 1 25 8999A TAILSTOCK ENCODER STRIP 91 1 58 1550 1 8 NPT CONNECTOR 37 3 25 9746 CABLE CLAMP BASE 92 10 58 2000 NYLON TUBING 1 4 IN CL 38 1 26 8010 LONG COOLANT TANK SEAL 93 2 58 2100 SLEEVE LUBE ASSY 39 1 26 8623 SEAL RAIL WIPER 94 1 58 2748 ADAPTER BANJO 5 16 24 F 40 1 30 8717 Z AXIS LUBE LINE ASSY 95 1 58 3045 ELBOW 5 16 24 TO 5 16 24 41 1 32 0400A ENCODER READ HEAD ASSY 96 2 58 3048 HOSE BARB 1 2 x 3 8 NPT MALE 42 1 32 2011 TELEMECHANIQUE 30 IN CABLE AS 97 1 58 3084 TEE 3 8 FPT x 3 8 FPT x 1 4 FPT 43 1 32 2040 TELEMECHANIQUE 85 IN Z AXIS 98 1 58 3665 1 4 NPT FEMALE TO 3 8 MALE 44 2 40 1500 SHCS 5 16 18 x 1 99 1 58 3670 1 4 NPT M 1 8 F REDUCER 45 4 40 1609 BHCS 10 32 x 1 2 100 1 59 0012 CYLINDER HYDRAULI
133. ER HYDRAULIC 47 1 32 0400A ENCODER READ HEAD ASSY 105 1 59 0014 TAILSTOCK VALVE KIT 48 1 32 2040 TELEMECH 85 IN Z AXIS ASSY 106 4 59 1041 LEGS CONTROL 49 2 40 1500 SHCS 5 16 18 x 1 107 1 59 1054 FOOT SWITCH W FLEX CONDUIT 50 8 40 16091 BHCS 10 32 x 1 108 59 6150 PLASTIC CARRIER 51 2 40 1610 SHCS 1 4 20 x 1 109 2 59 6153 PLASTIC CARRIER ENDS 52 10 40 1632 SHCS 1 4 20 x 1 2 110 1 59 6400 GUIDE WHEEL 53 6 40 1636 SHCS 3 8 16 x 1 1 4 111 34 59 6601 HEYCO DOME PLUG 312 54 6 40 1639 SHCS 3 8 16 x 1 112 34 59 6655 RUBBER PLUG GUIDE RAIL 55 6 40 1640 SHCS 10 32 x 1 2 113 6 59 7201 GROMMET RUBBER 330 56 2 40 16413 MSHCS 3x 5 114 1 59 8779 SPRING CROSS SLIDE HL 3 4 57 6 40 16435 SHCS 3 8 16 x 3 115 2 62 0013 SERVO MOTOR YASKAWA 58 16 40 1651 MSHCS M12 x 60 116 1 90 7000 HI LO HYDRAULIC PWR UNIT 117 0 05 99 4521 ELECTRICAL GREASE 3 OZ TUBE 96 8710 44 0404 q YVUVUWIY DM 209 SERVICE MANUAL ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS Se rie January 1999 1 39 18 48 56 N N amp 7279 gt V fa NR x 2 8 c
134. HES SHOWN ARE IN A NON ALARM STATE HIGH GEAR TURRET LOCKED TURRET AT TOOL 1 POSIT HL SERIES PAGE 6 AAS 968710 SERVICE MANUAL January 1999 n P NoDv j o b D sS lt y di ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS ae Ka INPUT NUMBER lee 17 Em 12V Ley E 18 12V B acr E 19 L 12V LA E 20 E Wax P19 2 LOW HYD PRESSURE 21 12V JAY P52 1 SPARE 1 22 pas 12V Bag 24 1 SPARE2 23 12V Lu P24 2 TO SPARE 3 24 12V 23 1 I REMOTE TOOL UNCLAMP 25 12V Lay PHASE LOSS DETECT 26 L W 25 1 SPARE 4 27 225 12V P25 2 IO SPARES 28 REM E 12V E GROUND FAULT 29 tic Y 12V gt EA SKIP 30 Y 12V Pag SPIGOT 31 12V LA E CHIP CONVEYOR 32 OVERCURRENT SENSE CIRCUIT IOPCB CABLE 550 CONT SWITCHES SHOWN ARE IN A NON ALARM STATE HIGH GEAR TURRET LOCKED TURRET AT TOOL 1 POSIT DISCRETE INPUTS 17 THROUGH 32 1 99 HAAS AUTOMATION HL SERIES PAGE 7 sa HAST 191 ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS 192 Series January 1999
135. HIP CONVEYOR CONVEYOR REVERSE EARTH GND CHIP CONVEYOR MOTOR 1 99 HAAS AUTOMATION HL SERIES PAGE 15 968710 199 200 ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS PENDANT SUPPORT ARM CONTROL CABINET OPERATOR PENDANT Series FRONT PANEL 1 99 HAAS AUTOMATION POWER ON sl TO POWER SUPPLY PCB CABLE 740 b POWER OFF REMOTE JOG HANDLE TO VIDEO BOARD VIDEO CABLE 760 Ke m CRT TO IOPCB P34 115 VAC CABLE 90A VIN 12 VDC 860C CRT FAN TO P13 PSU 750 TO MOCON 750A J2 150 ig REMOTE JOG HANDLE BOARD 12 VDC P2 KEYBOARD TO 850 CPU BOARD p eS INTERFACE KEYPAD BOARD 16 PIN RIBBON CABLE LOAD METER CABLE 700A D ADJUST START LOAD METER SPEAKER AUXFTPAN FEEDHOLD METER 8 OHM 1 WATT N 705 P5 P6 P3 P4 CABLE 720 720 16 _ 770 CYCLE START I O BOARD INPUT 8 910E TO IOPCB AND WORLIGHT 5 860F J10 VIDEO BOARD PWR FEED HOLD 0 0 210A DATA FROM J12 VIDEO BOARD EMERGENCY STOP WORKLIGHT ASSY Lo FLOPPY DRIVE HL SERIES PAGE 16 JOG HANDLE January 1999 AAS 96 8710 January 1999 SERVICE MANUAL Series ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
136. IDEO KEYBOARD 8 Note Refer to Cable Locations for a diagram of this board Remove the MOCON or MOTIF board as described in Steps 1 5 HAA __________ _ 96 8710 January 1999 96 8710 SERVICE MANUAL ELECTRICAL SERVICE Series 9 Disconnect all leads to the Video Keyboard Ensure all cables are properly labeled for reconnecting later 10 After all cables have been disconnected unscrew the standoffs taking care to hold the board in place until all standoffs have been removed Note If the PROCESSOR board need replacing please skip the next step 11 Replace the Video Keyboard attaching it to the PROCESSOR board beneath the Video Keyboard with the standoffs 12 Reconnect all leads previously removed to their proper connections PROCESSOR BOARD Note Refer to Cable Locations for a diagram of this board 13 Remove the MOCON or MOTIF board as described in Steps 1 5 and the Video Keyboard as described in Steps 8 9 14 Disconnect all leads to the Processor board Ensure all cables are properly labeled for reconnecting later 15 After all cables have been disconnected unscrew the standoffs taking care to hold the board in place until all standoffs have been removed 16 Replace the Processor board attaching it to the electrical cabinet beneath the Processor board with t
137. IN 9 PIN 9 V 9 HIGH GEAR SHIFT PIN 11 PIN 11 1 V 09 LOW GEAR SHIFT PIN 13 PIN 13 Z SPINDLE UNCLAMP 1 PIN 15 PIN 15 e V USED WITH Y TO 12VDC PIN 16 PIN 16 mo 2 DELTA OPTION P12 P2 f CABLE OVDC 12VDC MOCON PCB 520 PCB NOTE ANY RELAY K35 CAN BE REPLACED WITH A SOLID STATE EQUIVALENT RELAY COIL DRIVERS K9 THROUGH K16 1 99 HAAS AUTOMATION HL SERIES PAGE 9 meng AAS AAU 193 January 1999 SERVICE MANUAL ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Series PIN 1 PIN 1 z 12VDC PIN 2 PIN 2 LE 17 0 PIN3 PIN 3 7 12VDC PIN4 PIN4 LE 18 PIN 5 PIN 5 7 m SPAREA M 1 12VDC PIN 6 PIN 6 LE ET ER 9 SPARE SPARE OPTION 2 8 up 2 3 1 t B o SPARE B 12VDC PIN 8 PIN8 LE 20 4 PIN 9 PIN 9 i 7 K2 TURRET OUT M CN v 12VDC PIN 10 PIN 10 LE 21 4 PIN 11 PIN 11 V SPARE 12VDC PIN 12 PIN 12 LE 22 PIN 13 PIN 13 A C7 SPARE 12VDC PIN 14 PIN14 LE 23 PIN 15 PIN 15 i 1 v SPARE 12VDC PIN 16 PIN 16 LE 24 S P13 P51 1 1 CABLE 530 UO PCB NOTE ANY RELAY K1 K35 CAN BE REPLACED WI
138. K MACHINED 59 5 40 1705 10 32 x 1 5 1 20 8617 CONDUIT STRAIN RELIEF FRT 60 2 40 1712 SHCS 5 16 18 x 1 2 6 1 20 8618 CONDUIT STRAIN RELIEF RR 61 4 40 1715 SHCS 5 16 18 x 1 1 2 7 1 20 8720 SWING ARM SPRING 62 7 40 1750 BHCS 10 32 x 3 8 8 1 20 8721 BUSHING SWING ARM SPRING 63 4 40 1800 SHCS 8 32 x 3 4 9 6 22 8877 BUSHING ISOLATOR HYD 64 8 40 1810 SHCS 3 4 10 x 3 1 4 10 1 20 8894 PLATE T S DLBL FT PEDAL 65 4 40 1850 SHCS 10 32 x 3 8 11 1 20 8987 ARM TAILSTOCK CYLINDER 66 4 40 1961 SHCS 3 8 16 x 2 12 1 20 8988A TAILSTOCK CYL ATTACH BRKT 67 4 40 1963 SHCS 3 8 16 x 2 1 4 13 1 20 9007 NUT HOUSING MACHINED 68 2 40 1976 BHCS 1 4 20 x 3 4 14 1 22 2629 KEY 1875 1870 SQUARE 69 2 40 1980 BHCS 1 4 20 x 1 2 15 64 22 7458 CAM LINEAR GUIDE 70 29 40 1981 FBHCS 1 4 20 x 1 2 16 1 22 8052 GUIDE Z WAYCOVER BOTTOM 71 5 40 2030 SHCS 3 8 16 x 3 4 17 1 22 8624 SEAL RAIL BACKING BAR 72 4 43 1602 HHB 1 2 13 x 3 18 1 22 8722 BRACKET SPRING T C 73 12 45 0008 WASHER 5 16 USS STANDARD 19 1 22 8901 SUPPORT LEFT MIDDLE 74 3 45 0040 WASHER BLK HARD 1 4 20 1 22 8902 SUPPORT LEFT REAR 75 4 45 1600 WASHER SPLIT LOCK 5 16 MED 21 1 22 8904 SUPPORT LEFT FRONT 76 20 45 16390 WASHER 1 4 ID x 5 8 OD 22 1 22 8905 SUPPORT CONTROL BOX 77 4 45 1666 WASHER FLAT 1 2 ID 23 4 24 7325 STR FIT METRIC LINEAR GUIDE 78 8 45 1720 WASHER SPLIT LOCK 3 4 MED 24 1 25 7042 COVER PLATE LEAD SCREW 79 6 45 1730 WASHER BLK HARD 3 8 25 1 25 7080 BUMP
139. M is plugged in Test the card with the buss connectors off SIO Serial 1 0 initialization complete Normally On If this light does not come on there is a problem with the serial ports Disconnect anything on the external RS 232 and test again MSG Power on serial 1 0 message output complete Normally On If this light does not come there is a problem with serial 1 0 or interrupts Disconnect anything on the external RS 232 and test again CRT CRT VIDEO initialization complete Normally On If this light does not come on there is a problem communicating with the VIDEO PCB Check the buss connectors and ensure the VIDEO PCB is getting power PGM Program signature found in memory Normally On If this light does not come on it means that the main CNC program package was not found in memory or that the auto start switch was not set Check that switch 51 1 is on and the EPROM is plugged in RUN Program running without fault exception Normally On Ifthis light does not come on or goes out after coming on there is a problem with the microprocessor or the software running in it Check all of the buss connectors to the other two PCB s and ensure all three cards are getting power There is a two position DIP switch on the processor PCB labled 1 Switch S1 1 must be ON to auto start the CNC operational program If 51 1 is OFF the light will remain off Switch 52 1 is used to enable FLASH If it is disabled it will not be possib
140. M43 in order to lift the coolant line over the black access plate 5 Remove the black access plate The plate may need to be pried off with a screwdriver Note Have a bucket ready to catch oil draining from the housing 6 Loosen all turret housing mounting bolts except for the front left bolt nearest the turret 7 Clamp the turret M44 and jog to the center of the X travel 8 Tap on the turret casting in order to bring the face of the turret into alignment Note In order to help keep the turret housing from slipping down during the alignment procedure keep the turret housing bolts as snug as possible Note Verify the turret alignment HAAS tia SERVICE MANUAL MECHANICAL SERVICE P D s January 1999 44 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Series Apply Loctite and torque all turret housing mounting bolts to 50 FT LBS Recheck the turret face to ensure the measurement did not change Install the access cover and gasket Pour 10 cups of oil DTE 25 into gear side of turret housing Install the Coolant Adapter Block Note The turret must be in the UNCLAMPED position Install Turret Housing Top plate Install Sliding Tool Changer Cover ZERO RETURN machine After the turret face has been realigned it is important to verify that the spindle is still in alignment Proceed to Chapter 2 Spindle Alignment Verification Note All alignme
141. MINALS FROM CONTACTOR K1 488 458 457 429V 428 403 402 377V Figure 4 Transformer with 354 488V range HAAS LOW VOLT TERMINALS FROM CONTACTOR K1 260 244V 243 227V 226 211V 210 195V ele Figure 4 6b Transformer with 195 260V range 96 8710 January 1999 SERVICE MANUAL ELECTRICAL SERVICE Series 4 Set the main switch to on rotate the shaft that engages the handle on the panel door clockwise until it snaps into the on position Check for evidence of problems such as the smell of overheating components or smoke If such problems are indicated set the main switch to off immediately and call the factory before proceeding 5 After the power is on measure the voltage across the upper terminals on the contactor K1 located below the main circuit breaker It should be the same as the measurements where the input power connects to the main breaker If there are any problems call the factory Figure 4 7 Measure voltage here 6 Apply power to the control by pre
142. Manual_Archive_Cover_Page RevA June 6 2013 Haas Technical Publications HAAS SERVICE AND OPERATOR MANUAL ARCHIVE SL Series Service Manual 96 8710 English January 1999 This content is for illustrative purposes Historic machine Service Manuals are posted here to provide information for Haas machine owners Publications are intended for use only with machines built at the time of original publication As machine designs change the content of these publications can become obsolete You should not do mechanical or electrical machine repairs or service procedures unless you are qualified and knowledgeable about the processes Only authorized personnel with the proper training and certification should do many repair procedures WARNING Some mechanical and electrical service procedures can be extremely dangerous or life threatening Know your skill level and abilities All information herein is provided as a courtesy for Haas machine owners for reference and illustrative purposes only Haas Automation cannot be held responsible for repairs you perform Only those services and repairs that are provided by authorized Haas Factory Outlet distributors are guaranteed Only an authorized Haas Factory Outlet distributor should service or repair a Haas machine that is protected by the original factory warranty Servicing by any other party automatically voids the factory warranty d A Series TROUBLESHOOTING
143. NJO ELBOW 5 16 F X M6 M 1 27 30 8325 Z AXIS OIL LINE ASSY 1 62 59 1064 FOOT SWITCH W CONDUIT 2 28 30 8335 X Z AXIS OIL LINE ASSY 1 63 59 6400 GUIDE WHEEL 1 29 32 2040 TELEMECH 85 IN Z AXIS 1 64 59 6655 RUBBER PLUG GUIDE RAIL 38 30 40 0021 SHCS 3 8 16 X 7 2 65 59 7201 GROMMET RUBBER 330 6 31 40 1632 SHCS 1 4 20 X 1 2 11 66 62 0013 SERVO MOTOR YASKAWA 1 32 40 16372 SHCS 3 16 18 X 1 1 2 8 67 63 1030 CABLE CLAMP 3 16 1 33 40 16385 SHCS 5 16 18 X 3 4 5 68 63 1031 CABLE CLAMP 1 4 3 34 40 1639 SHCS 3 8 16 X 1 4 69 90 7000B HPU WITH T S EXT GUAGE 1 35 40 16413 MSHCS M3 X 5 2 70 99 4521 ELECTRICAL GREASE 30Z TUBE 0 05 96 8710 215 January 1999 SERVICE MIANUAL ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS Series 28 I J 56 5 Es 31 D Lo 5 O o O 9 d
144. ONVYR RETRY REV TIM Amount of time that the conveyor is reversed in 1 50 seconds after overcurrent is sensed Default is 200 Parameter 219 CONVYR RETRY LIMIT Number of times that the conveyor will cycle through the reverse forward sequencing when an overcurrent is sensed before the conveyor will shut down An overcurrent is sensed when chips jam the conveyor By reversing and then forwarding the conveyor the chip jam may be broken Default is 3 Parameter 220 CONVYR RETRY TIMEOUT Amount of time in 1 50 seconds between consecutive overcurrents in which the overcurrents is considered another retry If this amount of time passes between overcurrents then the retry count is set to 0 Default is 1500 30 seconds Parameter 221 MAX TIME NO DISPLAY The maximum time in 1 50 sec between screen updates When executing short blocks at a high feed rate the control will use the resources available for interpreting G code and generation of motion blocks The display may not update until this time is exceeded For high speed operation updating of the display may cause the motion queue to become exhausted This will manifest itself as a pause in motion See M76 and M77 to disable the display completely Parameter 222 LOW HYD IGNORE The amount of time that the control ignores the LO HYD input bit after servos have been engaged The hydraulic unit requires a short period of time to come up to pressure The default value is 50 which is equal to 1 second
145. ORS VCTR DR CUR CMD gt HAAS LOCATION VIDEO PCB MICRO PROC PCB X SERVO DRIVE AMP Y SERVO DRIVE AMP Z SERVO DRIVE AMP A SERVO DRIVE AMP B SERVO DRIVE AMP VECTOR DR CMDS CUR X ENCODER Y ENCODER Z ENCODER A ENCODER B ENCODER C ENCODER 1 0 PCB 1 0 PCB 1 0 PCB 1 0 PCB 1 0 PCB POWER SUPPLY PCB LOAD METER SPINDLE DRIVE JOG HANDLE VIDEO PCB MICRO PROC PCB SPINDLE ENCODER N A X Y amp Z LIMIT SPINDLE DRIVE CABLE LOCATIONS KR P1 P2 P51 165 Series H CABLE LOCATIONS January 1999 EXTERNAL PLUG 32 4090 ooo000000 INTERNAL PLUG RS 232 PORT 1 P N 32 4090 CABLE CONNECTIONS PLUG CABLE gt LOCATION PLUG P1 850 VIDEO amp J13 EXTERNAL KEYBOARD 11 INTERNAL 166 5 96 8710 SERVICE MANUAL January 1999 Series care Locations 5 D O OPTICAL ENCODER PCB P N 32 5010 CABLE CONNECTIONS PLUG CABLE gt TOC LOCATION PLUG P1 690B MOCON 96 871 Y TO O U VV H H 167 January 1999 CABLE LOCATIONS N VO Green Series 99 GAH 81 0r 69 6262 E ale patie OVAOE C
146. POSITION LIMIT B See Parameter 101 for description B MAX CURRENT See Parameter 105 for description B D D GAIN See Parameter 109 for description B ACC DEC T CONST See Parameter 113 for description B PHASE OFFSET See Parameter 121 for description B GRID OFFSET See Parameter 125 for description B EXACT STOP DIST See Parameter 134 for description B FRICTION FACTOR See Parameter 138 for description B ACCEL FEED FORWARD See Parameter 145 for description B AIR BRAKE DELAY See Parameter 69 for description C SWITCHES See Parameter 1 for description C P GAIN See Parameter 2 for description C D GAIN See Parameter 3 for description C GAIN This parameter is used when a Vector Drive is installed see Parameter 4 for description If Vector Drive is not installed this parameter is not usd HAAS January 1999 96 8710 r January 1999 Parameter 180 SLIP GAIN This name is used when a Vector Drive is installed The slip rate calculated depends on two other variables speed and current Slip rate slip gain x speed max speed x current max current The slip gain value is the value that slip rate would assume at maximum speed and maximum current 16 384 1 Hz If a Vector Drive is not installed this parameter is called C AXIS RATIO STEPS UNIT and is not used Parameter 181 MIN SLIP This name is used when Vector Drive is installed The minimum value allowed from the slip rate From the equ
147. RED 12 HIGH VOLT N BLACK 12 SHIELD DRAIN January 1999 320VDC FROM AMPLIFIER TO SERVO POWER SUPPLY HIGH VOLT RED 20 HIGH VOLT BLACK 20 OVERTEMP SENSOR FROM SPINDLE MOTOR SHIELD 2 OVERTEMP SIGNAL 20 N C OVERTEMP COMMON 20 SHIELD DRAIN RELAY CARD 1 DRIVE CABLE 16 WIRE RIBBON 24 RELAY CARD 2 DRIVE CABLE 16 WIRE RIBBON 24 RELAY CARD 3 DRIVE CABLE 16 WIRE RIBBON 24 RELAY CARD 4 DRIVE CABLE 16 WIRE RIBBON 24 INPUTS CARD CABLE MOCON P10 34 WIRE RIBBON LOW VOLTAGE BRUSHLESS AMPLIFIER POWER CABLE ASSEMBLY 12VDC 22 COMMON 12VDC 22 X AXIS HAAS AMPLIFIER CABLE TO MOTOR CONTROLLER BOARD MOTOR CONTROLLER BOARD SIDE CONNECTION A CHANNEL ANALOG GROUND B CHANNEL ANALOG GROUND ENABLE LOGIC GROUND FAULT LOGIC GROUND NOT USED SHIELD ANALOG GROUND Z AXIS HAAS AMPLIFIER CABLE TO MOTOR CONTROLLER BOARD SAME AS 610 1 THRU 610 10 A AXIS HAAS AMPLIFIER CABLE TO MOTOR CONTROLLER BOARD SAME AS 610 1 THRU 610 10 HAAS VECTOR DRIVE CURRENT COMMAND CABLE ALL 24 A PHASE B PHASE ENABLE FAULT 320VDC VOLTAGE MONITOR A PHASE RETURN B PHASE RETURN ATMA 5 TOS 7 968710 January 1999 6406 8 6406 9 6406 10 650 651 652 653 654 650 651 652 653A 654A 650B 651B 652B 653B 660 660 1 660 2 660 3 660 4 660 5 660 6 660 7 660 8 660 9 660 10 660 11 660 12 660 13 660 14 660 15 660 16 680 690 700 720 721 722 723 96 8710
148. RHEAT SENSORS COOLANT PUMP LOW LUBE LOW COOLANT SOLENOIDS AND CHIP CONVEYOR NOTE FOR HIGH VOLTAGE IN SEE PAGE C SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM LOW VOLTAGE 1 99 HAAS AUTOMATION HL SERIES PAGE AA 183 968710 January 1999 ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS _ rd INPUT VOLTAGE 354 480 VAC 115 VAC MAIN MAIN OPERATOR POWER TRANSFORMER PENDANT DISTRIBUTION 7 115 115 VAC 230 VAC 230 VAC VIDEO KEYBOARD AND JOG 55 gt g 2 s BRUSHLESS VECTOR DRIVE SERVO MICRO AMPLIFIERS PROCESSOR CNC CMDS 320 VDC FAULTS c i c i SPINDLE COMMANDS 5 SPINDLE ENCODER 5 3 FAULT DATA SERVO REGEN SPINDLE MOTOR i MOTORS ASSY DISCRETE X amp ZAXES INPUTS TOOL TURRET AND OUTPUTS HEAT SENSOR 230 VAC CMDS COOLANT PUMP AND CHIP CONVEYOR SENSORS HOME LIMIT SWITCHES TOOLCHANGER OVERHEAT SENSORS LOW LUBE LOW COOLANT SOLENOIDS NOTE FOR LOW VOLTAGE IN SEE PAGE B SYSTEM BLOCK DIAGRAM HIGH VOLTAGE HL SERIES PAGEC 1 99 HAAS AUTOMATION 184 AAS 968710 SERVICE MANUAL January 1999 n s y di ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS
149. RIBBON 24 SERIAL PORT 2 INTERFACE CABLE 16 WIRE RIBBON 24 5V 12V 12V GND FROM MAIN POWER SUPPLY ALL 18 5 VOLTS LOGIC POWER RETURN LOGIC POWER RETURN 12 VOLTS 12 VOLTS 12 VOLT POWER TO IOPCB SHIELD 2 ALL 20 12 VOLTS LOGIC POWER RETURN D GROUND SHIELD DRAIN 5 POWER TO 3 FLOPPY DRIVE 5 12 12 POWER TO 68030 115VAC TO OILER SHIELD 2 115VAC LEG 1 18 115VAC LEG 2 18 115VAC TO SPINDLE HEAD SOLENOIDS SHIELD 6 ALL 24 SPINDLE LOCK TOOL UNCLAMP LOW GEAR HIGH GEAR 115VAC COMMON SHIELD DRAIN PRECHARGE TRANSMISSION HIGH LOW GEAR SOLENOIDS FOR LATHE 115 VAC SOLENOID COMMON IO P12 5 18 HIGH GEAR SOLENOID IO P12 4 18 LOW GEAR SOLENOID IO P12 3 18 SPINDLE HEAD INPUT STATUS SWITCHES SHIELD 6 ALL 24 HIGH GEAR SIGNAL LOW GEAR SIGNAL TOOL UNCLAMPED SIGNAL TOOL CLAMPED SIGNAL SPINDLE LOCKED SIGNAL COMMON DATA GROUND SHIELD DRAIN 177 sy CABLE LIST 900 901 902 903 910 911 912 913 910A 911A 912A 913A 910B 911B 912B 913B 9100 9110 9120 9130 9100 9110 9120 9130 930 931 932 933 940 941 942 943 950 951 952 953 954 950A 952 953 954 960 961 962 963 178 Series January 1999 SPARE SHIELD 2 SIGNAL 20 RETURN 20 SHIELD DRAIN 115 VAC CIRCUIT BREAKER CB4 TO SOLENOIDS SHIELD 2 115VAC 20 RETURN 20 SHIELD DRAIN SPARE 115VAC 115VAC 20 RETURN 20 SHIELD DRAIN
150. RVICE MANUAL Series wv 9 lt m lt J9 J13 e 5 SSS 161211 n nnuunauuasus U43 U33 U40 U41 S U34 J44 U35 U39 93 1001 U8 U7 U3 U2 J5 J4 1 410 411 VIDEO amp KEYBOARD PCB W FLOPPY DRIVE 96 8710 HAS 160 January 1999 VIDEO PLUG P1 J3 J4 J5 J10 Jit J12 P13 J9 313 SERVICE MANUAL Series CABLE LOCATIONS KR VIDEO amp KEYBOARD PCB W FLOPPY DRIVE CABLE 860 700 P N 93 1001 CABLE CONNECTIONS SIGNALNAME LOW VOLTAGE KEYBOARD INFO ADDRESS BUSS DATA BUSS FLOPPY DR POWER SPARE FLOPPY DR SIGNAL VIDEO SIGNAL RS422 B SERIAL DATA Not used with Serial Keyboard Interface 96 8710 HAAS LOCATION POWER SUPPLY PCB KEYBOARD INT MICRO PROC PCB MOTIF PCB FLOPPY DRIVE N A FLOPPY DRIVE CRT N A N A 161 41 CABLE LOCATIONS Series 93 1000 nnnnnnuanunnaunaa a
151. Regulator Maintains the correct air pressure 15 psi being sent to the spindle bearings 4 Oil Mist Ports Connect to nylon tubing that carries the oil air mist to the spindle bearings One port supplies the front spindle bearing and one supplies the rear bearing 5 Air Pressure Gauge Indicates the pressure of the air being mixed with oil and supplied to the spindle bearings 6 Connector Plate Contains all of the connectors for the Lube Air Panel 7 Pressure Switch Monitors the oil supply pressure and sends a signal to the control panel to stop the machine if the pressure drops below the minimum level for a set period of time 8 Oil Line Carries oil to the ports where it is then sent to the lead screws linear guides and spindle bearings 9 Oil Ports Connect to nylon tubing that carries the oil to the lead screws and linear guides 10 Flowmeters Maintain the correct amount of oil dropping from the upper ports to the lower ports where they are mixed with air and sent to the spindle bearings 96 8740 5 69 SERVICE MANUAL MECHANICAL SERVICE na nR 1999 70 Series IMPORTANT POWER OFF THE MACHINE BEFORE PERFORMING THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE 1 Remove the rear panel 2 Disconnect the main air line 3 Disconnect limit switches from lube panel 4 Disconnect spindle air lines 5 Disconnect oil line at lube panel NOTE All plastic ties must be cut in order to remove the
152. S LIVE TOOLING OPTIONAL AAXIS TOOL TURRET B AXIS TAILSTOCK OPTIONAL X Z A B AXIS MOTOR amp ENCODER 1 99 HAAS AUTOMATION HL SERIES PAGE 13 A G 197 SERVICE MANUAL ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Series January 1999 TO MOCON P24 HOMES X HOME B X HOME SWITCH GROUND Y HOME SWITCH NOT USED Y HOME D OTIO Z HOME SWITCH E F LOGIC GROUND LOW LUBE LEVEL TO INPUT 13 H JO LOW LUBE PRESSURE SWITCH Z HOME L K 115 lt WAY LUBE PUMP MOTOR LOGIC GND M LOGIC GROUND P5 HOME SENSORS DOOR LUBE TO RELAY K6 A M COOLANT MOTOR B WP 230 VAC SINGLE PHASE TO INPUT 4 C B 21 5 F TO LOGIC GND G 8 7 COOLANT PUMP NOTE CONNECTORS ARE LOCATED ON SIDE OF CONTROL CABINET CABINET CONNECTORS 1 99 HAAS AUTOMATION HL SERIES PAGE 14 198 A 2 96 8710 January 1999 SERVICE MANUAL ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS Series THREE PHASE 230 VAC IN OMIT THESE WIRES FOR 3 PHASE MOTOR OPTIONAL CHIP CONVEYOR MOTOR SINGLE PHASE REVERSIBLE 4 B Be FU3 Tm 3 re FU2 K33 eg L _ i W nN FU4 K34 ao __ Ge 1 E 6 G CHIP OVERCURRENT S CONVEYOR DETECTION K35 ON CIRCUIT 140 FS CHIP OPCB C
153. SHER BLK HARD 1 4 45 1600 WASHER SPLIT LOCK 5 16 MED 45 1620 WASHER SPLIT LOCK 10 MED 45 1800 WASHER SPLIT LOCK 1 4 MED 48 0045 PIN PULL 3 8 x 1 1 2 50 8549 LINEAR GUIDE 57 0075 O RING 2 021 BUNA 57 0080 O RING 2 023 BUNA 57 8546 GASKET PLATE ACCESS 58 2010 NYLON TUBING 5 32 IN 58 2110 SLEEVE NUTS LUBE ASSY 58 2130 SLEEVE COMP NYLON TUBING 58 2763 3 WAY JUNCTION 58 3031 BANJO ELBOW 5 16 F x M6 M 58 3105 REMOVED PIPE PLUG 1 4 NPT 58 8663 REMOVED TUBING TRANS Z X 59 6150A PLASTIC CARRIER 0130 06 59 6153 PLASTIC CARRIER ENDS 59 6600 PLUG GUIDE RAIL 62 0013 REMOVED SERVO MOTOR YASKAWA 99 4521 ELECTRICAL GREASE 3 OZ TUBE 62 0014 YASKAWA SIGMA MOTOR 09 40 16091 BHCS 10 32 x 1 57 8576 GASKET COVER T C 46 1625 NUT HEX BLACK OXIDE 1 4 20 44 1717 555 CUP PT 1 4 20 X 1 3 4 40 1500 SHCS 5 16 18 X 1 20 8364 SPACER 40 1631 SHCS 1 4 20 x 3 8 30 1220A REMOVED COUPLING ASSY SERVO DR 22 2629 KEY SUB SHAFT WORM SHAFT 30 0211 COUPLING ASSY SERVO DR 30 0616 LEAD SREW ASS Y 219 ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS 34 44 GA 19 53 71 81 35 41 36 525809 69408 G9 at tT Series CH NI AMM ga
154. Spindle command output 720 P19 Address bus P24 Axis home switches 990 5 7 SPINDLE DRIVE ASSEMBLY The spindle drive is located in the main cabinet on the right side and halfway down It operates from three phase 200 to 240V Ithasa 10 H P 20 for SL 30 and 40 continuous rating and a 15 H P 30 H P for SL 30 and 40 one minute rating The spindle drive is protected by CB1 at 40 amps 20 for High Voltage option Never work on the spindle drive until the small red CHARGE light goes out Until this light goes out there are dangerous voltages inside the drive even when power is shut off For all other data on the spindle drive refer to the supplied documentation for your drive HAAS Vecron Drive The Haas vector drive is a current amplifier controlled by the MOCON software using the C axis output The vector drive parameters are a part of the machine parameters and are accessible through the Haas front panel The spindle encoder is used for the closed loop control and spindle orientation as well as rigid tapping if the option is available Spindle speed is very accurate since this is a closed loop control and the torque output at low speeds is superior to non vector drive spindles 5 8 RESISTOR ASSEMBLY The Resistor Assembly is located on top of the control cabinet It contains the servo and spindle drive regen load resistors Drive REGEN RESISTOR A 8 6 ohm 6 ohm for SL 30 and 40 300 watt resist
155. TH A SOLID STATE EQUIVALENT RELAY COIL DRIVERS K17 THROUGH K24 1 99 HAAS AUTOMATION HL SERIES PAGE 10 194 68710 SERVICE MANUAL January 1299 y di ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS PIN 1 PIN 1 57 AL A 12VDC PIN2 PIN 2 LE 25 M21 BARFEEDER OPTION 8 sE gt 0 1 0 O 4 PIN3 PIN 3 7 2 M22 PROBE OPTION 12VDC PIN A PIN 4 LE 26 pe PIN 5 PINS 7 A K27 M23 PARTS CATCHER PTION 12VDC PIN6 PIN 6 LE 27 AUX COOLANT D Se PIN 7 PIN 7 X 12VDC PIN8 PIN 8 m N Le 9 PIN 9 7 29 GREEN STROBE 12VDC PIN 10 PIN10 LE 29 pe PIN 11 PIN 11 7 2 RED STROBE 22 12VDC PIN 12 PIN12 LE 30 pe PIN 13 PIN 13 M CN 7 P 12VDC PIN 14 14 Jun pe PIN 15 PIN 15 x Z 2 CHIP CONVEYOR REVERSE 12VDC PIN 16 PIN16 LE 32 P14 P3 540 PCB NOTE ANY RELAY K35 CAN BE REPLACED WITH A SOLID STATE EQUIVALENT RELAY COIL DRIVERS K25 THROUGH K32 1 99 HAAS AUTOMATION HL SERIES PAGE 11 sao 404 195 SERVICE MANUAL
156. THRUST NEEDLE ASSY BALL BEARING RETAIN RING RR 300 RETAIN RING N5100 150 O RING 2 021 BUNA O RING 2 023 BUNA SEAL TURRET SHAFT O RING 2 150 BUNA O RING 2 136 BUNA SEAL WORM SHAFT O RING 2 172 PARKER O RING 240 ALL SEALS O RING 2 130 BUNA O RING 2 039N525 60 PRKR GASKET PLATE COOLANT T H TUBING COOLANT FRONT 3 4 STEEL BALLS 5 16 STEEL BALL SPRING TURRET COUPLING SERVO MOTOR YASKAWA ELECTRICAL GREASE 3 OZ TUBE 96 8710 SERVICE MANUAL January 1999 n nh V Sp re es ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS 72 173 65 2 80 68 20 33 55 442 426145 141 144 158 62 69 86 32 76 10 11 63 47 67 75 7 49 85 28 54 57 71146 84 13 12 56 23 27 25 15 59 9 21 74 82 16 30 0057 5140 ASSY DESIGNATES PARTS AVAILABLE FROM HAAS SERVICE DEPARTMENT SL 40 Tool Changer Assembly 96 8710 233 ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS 30 0057 TOOL CHANGER ASSY SL40 234 m ON QTY A 2A o AM A P DWG_NUMBER 20 8221 20 8321 20 8503A 20 8505A 20 8506A 20 8507A 20 8509 20 8510 20 8511A 20 8512A 20 8515 20 8516 20 8517 20 8518 20 8522A 20 8530 20 8532 20 8533 20 8537 20 8538 20 8539 20 8543 20 8550 20 8557 20 8544 22 9673 24 4010 25 7459 25 8286 25 85
157. UIDE RAIL RUBBER PLUG GUIDE RAIL GROMMET RUBBER 330 SERVO MOTOR YASKAWA CABLE CLAMP 3 16 CABLE CLAMP 1 4 HPU WITH T S EXT GUAGE ELECTRICAL GREASE 307 TUBE 213 SERVICE MANUAL ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS Se rie T January 1999 66 9 aN Sr 69 ILL 2 9 Re f 1 les 14 57 39 46 5 64 54 60 SL 40 Casting Assembly 214 SALAS 96 8710 SERVICE MANUAL January 1999 P gt F My R _ s w Be rie es ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS ITEM NO DESCRIPTION QTY ITEM PART NO DESCRIPTION QTY 1 20 0150 NUT HSNG 40 50MM BS MACH 1 36 40 16435 SHCS 3 8 16 X 3 BLK OX 6 2 20 8200 BASE MACHINED SL40 1 37 40 16437 SHCS 3 8 16 X 3 1 4 6 3 20 8617 CONDUIT STRAIN RELIEF FRT 1 38 40 16439 SHCS 3 8 16 X 5 4 4 20 8618 CONDUIT STRAIN RELIEF RR 1 39 40 1660 SHCS 1 2 13 X 1 1 2 39
158. V 250V 250V 250V 250V 250V HAAS LOCATION POWER pcb upper right 10 PCB 10 PCB 10 PCB 10 PCB Brushless Amp lower left 115 SERVICE MANUAL TECHNICAL REFERENCE lt rie January 1999 5 12 SPARE USER M CODE INTERFACE The M code interface uses outputs M21 24 and one discrete input circuit M codes M21 through M24 will activate relays labeled M21 24 These relay contacts are isolated from all other circuits and may switch up to 120V AC at three amps The relays are SPDT WARNING Power circuits and inductive loads must have snubber protection Note If the optional Mcode relay board is installed relays M21 M28 become available on the secondary board These relays willl be controlled by outputs M21 M28 The M FIN circuitis anormally open circuit that is made active by bringing itto ground The one M FIN applies to all three of the user M codes The timing of a user M function must begin with all circuits inactive that is all circuits open The timing is as follows M21 221 Loo M FIN 1 1 CNC RUNNING WAITING 05 SEC WAITING RUNNING The Diagnostic Data display page may be used to observe the state of these signals M Function RELAYS The IOPCB contains position for four relays M21 M24 and the optional M code relay board contains eight M21 M28 either one of these groups of relays may be available to the user M21 is already wired out to P12 at the
159. VICE DEPT SL 20 Spindle Assembly 222 O N ll _____ 96 8710 SERVICE MANUAL ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS January 1999 Se ries 30 3600 SPINDLE ASSEMBLY SL20 ITEM QTY P N DESCRIPTION 1 1 22 2717 LOCATING PIN SRT 2 1 20 8501A SPINDLE HOUSING MACHINED 3 1 20 8563B SHAFT SPINDLE 4 1 20 8564B RING CLAMP 5 1 20 8565A SPACER BEARING 6 1 20 8566B SHEAVE DRIVE 7 1 20 8567B PULLEY 8 1 20 8568 RING RETAINER 9 2 22 8572 NOZZLE OIL MIST SPINDLE 10 1 20 8707B ADAPTER CYLINDER DRAWTUBE 11 1 22 8562B FLANGE PULLEY 12 8 40 1615 SHCS 1 4 20 X 1 1 2 13 6 40 1636 SHCS 3 8 16 X 1 1 4 14 6 40 16372 SHCS 3 8 16 X 1 1 2 15 4 40 1645 SHCS 10 32 X 5 8 16 4 40 1660 SHCS 1 2 13 X 1 1 2 17 1 40 1712 SHCS 5 1 6 18 X 1 2 18 2 43 1010 HHB 3 8 16 X 2 1 4 19 4 45 1740 WASHER BLK HRD 1 2 20 2 46 1720 NUT HEX 1 2 13 21 2 46 1730 NUT HEX 3 8 16 22 1 51 7100 BALL BEARING 23 1 54 3090 TIMING PULLEY 3 8 BORE 24 1 54 3100 TIMING BELT 3 WIDE 25 3 54 7131 DRIVE BELT V BELT 26 1 57 2989 O RING 265 N 70 27 2 58 3050 ELBOW 1 4 NYLON TUBING 28 1 58 3105 PIPE PLUG 1 4 NPT 29 1 60 1810 ENCODER 2000 LINE DESIGNATES REMOVED PART 96 8710 223 January 1999 SERVICE MIANUAL ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS Series D 54000078 09 3
160. Z axis Z Channel A axis Z Channel B axis Z Channel C axis Z Channel SERVICE MANUAL Series INPUTS 2 Name X Motor Over Heat Y Motor Over Heat Z Motor Over Heat A Motor Over Heat B Motor Over Heat C Motor Over Heat X Home Switch X drive fault Y Home Switch Y drive fault Z Home Switch Z drive fault A Home Switch A drive fault B Home Switch B drive fault C Home Switch C drive fault X Cable Input SZCH Y Cable Input Z Cable Input A Cable Input B Cable Input C Cable Input TECHNICAL REFERENCE Spindle Z Channel The following inputs and outputs pertain to the Haas Vector Drive If it is not enabled these will display a value of Otherwise it will display a 1 or 0 HAAS VECTOR DRIVE Description Spindle Forward Spindle Reverse Spindle Lock Spindle At Speed Spindle Stopped Speed Fault Spindle Locked Spindle Overheat Spindle Cable Fault ANALOG DATA Name Description SPLOAD Spindle load in 96 SP SPEED Spindle RPM CW or CCW RUN TIME Total machine run time TOOL CHANGES Number of tool changes VER X XXX Software version number YY MM DD Today s date MDL SL __ Model number AAS 121 SERVICE MANUAL 2 TECHNICAL REFERENCE lt rie January 1999 122 96 8710 d January 1999 PARAMETERS erles 6 PARAMETERS Parameters are seldom modified values that change the operation of the machin
161. aas Vector Drive This bit must be set to 1 if machine is equipped with a HAAS vector spindle drive When set to 1 voltage to the Haas vector drive is displayed in the diagnostics display as DC BUSS Microprocessor enclosure temperature When set to 1 the enclosure temperature will be displayed on INPUTS2 screen of the diagnostics display Haas remote jog handle This bit must be set to 1 if the machine is equipped with a Haas 5 axis Remote jog handle AAAS N 143 Al PARAMETERS j O ovpyzf sh Series SPIN TEMP NC Spindle temperature normally closed This bit specifies the type normally open normally closed of the spindle temperature sensor This bit should be set to 1 for machines with a Haas Vector Drive and 0 for machines without a Vector Drive January 1999 D Y SW ENABL Delta Wye switch enable this is used for machine with a Vector Drive If this switch is set but bit 19 is not then winding switching will only be done when the spindle is at rest depending on the target speed of the spindle DY SW ON FLY Delta Wye switch enable this is used for machine with a Vector Drive This parameter enables switching on the fly as the spindle motor is accelerating or decelerating through the switch point CK BF STATUS This bit has been added for the improved Bar Feeder interface When this bit is setto 1 the control will constantly check the Bar Feeder Status on discrete input 1027 If this input g
162. alarm will also turn off the servos spindle drive coolant pump and tool changer AHAS January 1999 96 8710 January 1999 96 8710 123 124 125 126 127 129 130 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 Spindle Drive Fault Low Battery Tool Turret Fault Gear Fault Door Fault M Fin Fault Chuck Unclamped Power Down Failure Spindle Locked Low Hydraulic Pressure X Motor Over Heat Y Motor Over Heat Z Motor Over Heat A Motor Over Heat X Motor Z Fault e ALARMS Series One common cause of this overheat condition is an input line voltage too high If this condition remains for 4 5 minutes an automatic shutdown will begin Overheat or failure of spindle drive or motor The exact cause is indicated in the LED window of the spindle drive inside the control cabinet This can be caused by a stalled motor shorted motor overvoltage undervoltage overcurrent overheat of motor or drive failure Memory batteries need replacing within 30 days This alarm is only generated at power on and indicates that the 3 3 volt Lithium battery is below 2 5 volts If this is not corrected within about 30 days you may lose your stored programs parameters offsets and settings Turret has not seated itself properly There may be something obstructing the turret between the housing and the turret itself Gearshifter is out of position when a command is given to rotate the spindle Th
163. alid address code found in a PQ sequence It may also indicate faulty memory hardware or lost memory Look at the highlighted line for improper G code The maximum number of blocks making up a PQ sequence was exceeded Currently no more than 65535 blocks can be between P and Q The path defined by PQ was not monotonic in the X axis A monotonic path is one which does not change direction starting from the first motion block The path defined by PQ was not monotonic in the Z axis A monotonic path is one which does not change direction starting from the first motion block A non monotonic arc was found in a PQ block This will occur in PQ blocks within a G71 or G72 if the arc changes it s X or Z direction Increasing the arc radius will often correct this problem An invalid angle for the for the cutting tool tip was specified This will occur ina G76 block if the A address has a value that is from 0 to 120 degrees An invalid angle for linear interpolation was specified This will occur ina G01 block if the A address was congruent to 0 or 180 degrees In the context that the W code was used it had an invalid value Was it positive When the axes move into the tailstock restricted zone at any time during program execution To eliminate the problem change the program or Settings 93 and 94 to open up the restricted zone The number of troughs nested has exceeded the control limit Currently no more than 10 levels of trough can
164. all the shaft lock onto the bearing support end of the lead screw CAUTION Do not attach bearing clamp nut against bearing support until the motor side clamp nut is torqued to its proper specification Damage will occur to the bearing and lead screw on the support side b At the motor side of the lead screw attach lock nut c Place a Spanner wrench on to the lock nut in the motor housing and torque it against the bearing to 15 FT LBS d Torque the clamp nut screw and mark with yellow paint e At the bearing support end remove the shaft lock and loosen the clamp nut screw Tighten the lock nut against the bearing to 4IN LBS Retighten the clamp nut screw and mark with yellow paint f Align the lead screw nut to the nut housing on the wedge check oil line fitting is in the correct position Apply a drop of blue Loctite to the five SHCS and fasten the nut to the housing Torque the lead screw nut SHCS to 15 FT LBS g Place the Woodruff key back into the key way slot on the lead screw h Install the motor with the coupling attached check condition of the couper and tighten the four motor mounting SHCS Torque the motor mounting SHCS to 30 FT LBS 4 Tighten the collar on the motor coupling to the lead screw and torque to 15 FT LBS Attach bumper and replace motor housing cover 5 Check for binding in the beginning middle and end of travel You should be able to rotate the lead screw by hand when the servos are off Check for back
165. all your dealer Indicates FLASH memory has been corrupted or damaged RS 232 or floppy read of parameter had no CRC when loading from floppy or RS 232 Lead screw compensation tables have no CRC when loading from floppy or RS 232 Macro variables lost maybe by low battery Check for a low battery and low battery alarm Reload the macro variable file Generated whenever an M95 Sleep Mode is encountered and the door is open The door must be closed in order to start sleep mode Same as alarm 103 Same as alarm 108 Same as alarm 135 96 8710 AHAS January 1999 96 8710 273 274 275 276 277 278 292 293 294 295 296 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311 312 C Motor 7 Fault C Limit Switch C Axis Z Ch Missing C Axis Drive Fault C Zero Ret Margin Too Small C Cable Fault Mismatch Axis with I Chamfering Invalid 1 K or R in 601 Not 601 after Chamfering Corner R Invalid Move After Chamfering Not One Axis Move with Chamfering Invalid R Code Invalid X B or Z In 602 or 603 Invalid 1 4 or K In G02 or G03 Invalid Q In Canned Cycle Invalid J K or Q In Canned Cycle Subroutine Nesting Too Deep Invalid Tool Offset Exceeded Max Feed Rate Invalid G Code Unknown Code Program End Series Same as alarm 139 Same as alarm 145 Same as alarm 153 Same as alarm 161 Same as alarm 165 Same as alarm 182 1 was
166. an be caused by a trip of circuit breaker CB4 a lack of air pressure or too much friction with the orientation pin Gearbox did not shift into high gear During a change to high gear the high gear sensor was not detected in time Parameters 67 70 and 75 can adjust the time out times Check circuit breaker CB4 the circuit breaker for the air pressure solenoids and the spindle drive Gearbox did not shift into low gear During a change to low gear the low gear sensor was not detected in time Parameters 67 70 and 75 can adjust the time out times Check the solenoids circuit breaker CB4 and the spindle drive Incoming line voltage is above maximum The servos will be turned off and the spindle tool changer and coolant pump will stop If this condition remains for 4 5 minutes an automatic shutdown will begin Air pressure dropped below 80 PSI for a period of time defined by Parameter 76 Check your incoming air pressure for at least 100 PSI and ensure that the regulator is set at 85 PSI Way lube is low or empty or there is no lube pressure or too high a pressure Check tank at rear of machine and below control cabinet Also check connector on the side of the control cabinet Check that the lube lines are not blocked The control internal temperature is above a safe limit This can be caused by almost anything in the control overheating But is usually caused by overheat of the two regen resistors for servos and spindle drive This
167. and external pressure switch on the lube panel Low LUBRICATION AND Low PRESSURE SENSE SWITCHES There is a low lube sense switch in the oil tank When the oil is low an alarm will be generated This alarm will not occur until the end of a program is reached There is also an lube pressure switch that senses the lube pressure Parameter 117 controls the lube pressure check If Parameter 117 is zero the lube pressure is checked for cycling high within that period Parameter 117 has units of 1 50 seconds so 30 minutes gives a value of 90000 Parameter 57 bit Oiler on off indicates the lube pump is only powered when the spindle fan is powered The lube pressure is only checked when the pump is on 96 8710 ALVA 4 117 SERVICE MANUAL TECHNICAL REFERENCE Ge rie ag C January 1999 118 LAMP ON Orr SwircH An on off switch is supplied for the operator s lamp It is located on the side of the control cabinet below all of the motor connectors Door OPEN SENSE SWITCH The DOOR OPEN switch is in the open position when the door is open and closed when the door is fully closed When the doors open one or both of these switches will open and the machine will stop with a Door Hold function When the door is closed again operation will continue normally If the doors are open you will not be able to start a program Door Hold will not stop a t
168. anded feed rate by the AUTOFEED feature However if the tool load limit has already been exceeded the control will ignore the feed rate override buttons and the commanded feed rate will remain unchanged Parameter Parameter 304 305 SPINDLE BRAKE DELAY This parameter specifies the amount of time in milliseconds to wait for the main spindle brake to unclamp when spindle speed has been commanded and also the amount of time to wait after the main spindle has been commanded to stop before clamping it SERVO PO BRK DLY Specifies the time in milliseconds that the control should wait after turning off the Hyd Pump Enable relay which will activate the brake before turning off power to the servo motors via the MOCON This is intended to allow time for the brake to engage HAAT 145 Al PARAMETERS n YoD v o Gs Series January 1999 14 5 ALMA 5 96 8710 January 1999 SERVICE MANUAL MAINTENANCE Series 7 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE LUBRICATION CHART The following is a list of required regular maintenance for the HAAS SL Series Turning Centers Listed are the frequency of service capacities and type of fluids required These required specifications must be followed in order to keep your machine in good working order and protect your warranty 96 8710 INTERVAL WEEKLY MONTHLY SIX MONTHS ANNUALLY MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
169. as disabled DISABLED bit in Parameter 43 set to 1 Subprogram is not in memory or P code is incorrect P not found There is a problem with circle definition check your geometry Only one M X Y Z A Q etc allowed in any block or two G codes in the same group Two or I K R are commanded in the same block with chamfering corner rounding Select cutter compensation earlier Cutter comp must begin on a linear move Disable cutter comp later Geometry not possible Check your geometry A block exists that is too long for displaying queue Shorten title block Cutter comp only allowed in XY plane G17 Linear axis path is too long For helical motions the linear path must not be more than the length of the circular component Cutter compensation has been cancelled without an exit move Potential damage to part There are too many non movement blocks between motions when cutter comp is being used Remove some intervening blocks In a block with G103 Block Lookahead Limit a value between 0 and 15 must be used for the P code Aux B C U V or W axis indicate servo off Check auxiliary axes Status from control was OFF A ZERO RET has not been done yet on the aux axes Check auxiliary axes Status from control was LOSS Aux axes not responding Check auxiliary axes and RS 232 connections Mismatch between machine and aux axes position Check aux axes and interfaces Make sure no manual inputs occur to aux ax
170. ate of travel to 001 on the control panel and jog the machine 010 in the positive Z direction Jog back to zero 0 on the display The dial indicator should read zero 0 0001 Repeat Step 3 in the negative direction TOTAL DEVIATION BETWEEN THE DIAL INDICATOR AND THE CONTROL PANEL DISPLAY SHOULD NOT EXCEED 0002 An alternate method for checking backlash is to place the dial indicator as shown in Fig 4 2 and manually push on the turret in both directions The dial indicator should return to zero after releasing the turret Note The servos must be on to check backlash by this method AAAS 96 8710 1999 rd H TROUBLESHOOTING 83 Q Excessive servo motor vibration e Check all Parameters of the suspected axis against the Parameters as shipped with the machine If there are any differences correct those and determine how the Parameters were changed PARAMETER LOCK should normally be on e Abad motor can cause vibration if there is an open or short in the motor A short would normally cause a GROUND FAULT or OVERCURRENT alarm check the ALARMS An ohmmeter applied to the motor leads should show between 1 and 3 ohms between leads and over 1 megohm from leads to chassis Servo motor overheating e fa motor OVERHEAT alarm occurs ALARMS 135 138 check the Parameters for an incorrect setting Axis flags in Parameters 1 15 or 29 can invert the overheat switch OVER TEMP NC e lf the
171. ation Slip rate slip gain x speed max speed x current max current it can be seen that at a zero speed the slip rate wouls become zero Therefore a minimum value for slip rate is required 16 384 1Hz If a Vector Drive is not installed this parameter is called C AXIS MAX TRAVEL STEPS and is not used Parameter 182 C ACCELERATION This name is used when a Vector Drive is installed See Parameter 7 for description If a Vector Drive is not installed this parameter is not used Parameter 183 MAX SPEED This name is used when a Vector Drive is installed See Parameter 8 for description If a Vector Drive is not installed this parameter is not used Parameter 184 C MAX ERROR See Parameter 9 for description Parameter 185 C FUSE LEVEL See Parameter 10 for description Parameter 186 C BACK EMF This name is used when a Vector Drive is installed See Parameter 11 for description If a Vector Drive is not installed this parameter is not used Parameter 187 C HIGH GEAR STEPS REV This name is used when a Vector Drive is installed The number of encoder steps per revolution of the motor when the transmission is in high gear If the machine does not have a transmission this is simply the number of encoder steps per revolution of the motor If a Vector Drive is not installed this parameter is not used Parameter 188 C ORIENT GAIN This name is used when a Vector Drive is installed The prepertional gain is used in the position contro
172. bar by rotating the indicat 360 Max tolerance is 001 from centerline If this measurement is out of tolerance from top to bottom 90 and 270 then proceed to the Tailstock Leveling Procedure If this measurement is out of tolerance from side to side 0 and 180 then the insert needs to be replaced and realigned as described in the Tailstock Insert Removal and Installation section 5 Jog the tailstock back and measure the runout at the end of the tailstock test bar M 59 January 1999 SERVICE MANUAL MECHANICAL SERVICE Series This procedure should only be performed after the tailstock In Out has been checked Tools Required v 2 Tenths Indicator v 1 Tailstock Alignment Tool Test Bar P N T 1416 Y 1 Tailstock Leveling Assembly Leveling Stand P N 93 6001 Y 1 Round Rigid Bar 1 diameter min 1 Carefully remove the center from tailstock TS and thoroughly inspect the tapered insert for damage or debris Clean tapered insert and firmly install Test Bar 2 Loosen the mounting bolts that attach the TS to the linear guide trucks allowing TS to rest on bolts Place the Leveling Stand under the bottom edge of TS and manually raise the jack bolts Refer to Figure 3 13 Attach a tenths indicator to the face of the turret Level the TS by jogging the indicator along the test bar in the Z axis and level to within 0005 by adjusting the jack bolts gt Clamp t
173. breakers are mounted on a circuit board called the POWER PCB The following connectors are on it P1 Five pin brings 230V AC three phase from main breaker P3 Coil and aux connections to contactor K1 4 Auto off connection to IOPCB 170 P5 Low voltage control transformer to power K1 P6 230V AC from to coolant pump 930 P7 115V AC from to IOPCB for solenoids 910 P8 115V AC T1 90 P9 Turret fuse circuit from FU5 to IOPCB 840 P10 5 12 Gnd form low volt supply to logic boards P11 5 12 Gnd form low volt supply to logic boards P12 5 12 Gnd form low volt supply to logic boards P13 5 12 Gnd form low volt supply to logic boards P14 12V AC to operator s lamp 800A P15 230V AC from contactor K1 for coolant pump 70 P16 Low voltage power from power supply P17 12V DC to IOPCB 860A 860 860 860 860 HAAS 96 8710 SERVICE MANUAL January 1999 n Ao Ge rie TECHNICAL REFERENCE P18 Not used P19 Connector to op lamp transformer T4 290 P20 115V AC to low voltage supply P21 12V DC to processor PCB P22 12V DC to MOTIF PCB P26 12V DC option connector P27 5 12 Gnd form low volt supply to logic boards 860 P30 12V AC OP Lamp 800 P31 12V 860A For older internal transformer with 208 230 taps TB1 230V AC from contactor K1 TB2 230V AC to T1 primary Power Up Low VoLrAcE ConTROL TRANSFORMER T5 The low voltage control transformer T5 supplies power to th
174. cabinet door and then open the door enough to safely work on the electrical panel Disconnect all leads to the Power Distribution POWER board and move aside for removal Ensure all cables are properly labeled for reconnecting later After all cables have been disconnected remove the seven screws holding the POWER board to the cabinet and remove the board Take care to hold the POWER board in place until all screws have been removed Note If you need to replace the LOW VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY board please skip the next step Replace the POWER board attaching it with the seven screws previously removed Don t forget to use the lower left screw for a ground connection Reconnect all cables to the POWER board at their proper location LOW VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY 8 9 10 11 12 Remove the Power Distribution POWER board as described in Steps 1 5 Disconnect all leads to the Low Voltage Power Supply LVPS board Ensure all cables are properly labeled for reconnecting later After all cables have been disconnected unscrew the two standoffs at the bottom of the board Unscrew the remaining two screws at the top of the LVPS board taking care to hold the board in place until all screws have been removed Replace the LVPS board attaching it to the cabinet with the two screws and two standoffs previously removed Replace the POWER board as described in Steps 6 7 Note Refer to Cable Locations for a diagram of
175. commanded as X axis Z axis in the block with chamfering The move distance in the block commanded with chamfering corner R is less than the chamfering corner R amount The command after the block commanded with chamfering corner R is not G01 The command after the block commanded with chamfering corner R is either missing or wrong There must be a move perpendicular to that of the chamfering block Consecutive blocks commanded with chamfering corner R i e 001 Xb Kk 601 Zb li After each chamfering block there must be a single move perpendicular to the one with chamfering corner R amount Check your geometry must be less than or equal to half the distance from start to end within an accuracy of 0 0010 inches Check your geometry Check your geometry Radius at start must match radius at end of arc within 0 0010 inches Qin a canned cycle must be greater than zero and must be a valid number 1 J and Q in a canned cycle must be greater than zero Subprogram nesting is limited to nine levels Simplify your program A tool offset not within the range of the control was used Use a lower feed rate G code not defined and is not a macro call Possible corruption of memory by low battery Call your dealer End of subroutine reached before M99 Need an M99 to return from sub routine AHAS ALARMS e e ALARMS P 30 313 314 315 316
176. control panel to mount Plug the ribbon cable into the Keyboard Interface board taking care to not bend the pins on the board While holding the bezel spacer in place remove the two screws holding the spacer put the front cover panel in place and fasten with all screws previously removed Reinstall all switches spindle load meter and the jog handle as described in the previous sections Replace the rear cover panel and fasten with the screws that were previously removed SERIAL KEYBOARD INTERFACE Note Refer to Cable Locations for a diagram of this board Follow all precautions noted previously before working in the control cabinet See warning at beginning of Front Panel section Turn the main switch upper right of electrical cabinet to the off position Remove the four screws on the back of the control box then remove the cover panel Take care to hold the panel in place until all screws have been removed Disconnect all leads to the Serial Keyboard Interface KBIF board Ensure all cables are properly labeled for reconnecting later After all cables have been disconnected unscrew the four screws holding the Serial KBIF board to the control box Take care to hold the board in place until all screws have been removed Place the screws and standoffs aside for later use Replace the Serial KBIF board using the four screws previously removed starting at the top right Attach the screw and standoff loosely then all ot
177. conveyor will operate without any motion or keyboard action After this time the conveyor will automatically shut off SPINDLE ORIENT OFSET This is used for the Vector Drive and the value is determined at the time of assembly X SWITCHES Parameter 266 is a collection of single bit flags used to turn servo related functions on and off The left and right cursor arrows are used to select the function being changed All values are 0 or 1 only The function names are XLIN SCALE EN Used to enable linear scales for the X axis XINVRT LN SCL Used to invert the X axis linear scale X DSBL LS ZTST Used to disable the linear scale Z test XZERO AXIS TC Used to return axis to zero prior to tool change X 2ND HOME BTN Used to move axis to coordinate specified in Work Ofset G129 XNEG COMP DIR Used to negate the direction of thermal compensation X DELAY AXIS 0 Reserved HAAT 141 Al 142 e PARAMETERS Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter 267 268 269 270 January 1999 Series Y SWITCHES Parameter 267 is a collection of single bit flags used to turn servo related functions on and off The left and right cursor arrows are used to select the function being changed All values are 0 or 1 only The function names are Y LIN SCALE EN Used to enable linear scales for the Y axis Y INVRT LN SCL Used to invert the Y axis linear scale Y DSBL LS ZTST Used to disable the linear scale Z test Y ZERO AXIS TC Used t
178. crete input LOK should read 1 If this does not occur the upper air cylinder mounted reed switch needs to be adjusted by loosening the worm drive clamp retaining the sensor and moving it into position until this discrete input appears consistently Retighten sensor When the turret is in any other position than Lock Turret the discrete input should read 0 6 Install the turret housing top plate 7 Install the sliding tool changer cover 50 96 8710 January 1999 96 8710 SERVICE MANUAL MECHANICAL SERVICE Series LATHE TunRET REMOVAL amp REPLACEMENT TURRET REMOVAL 1 2 7 8 Remove the gearbox cover plate Rotate turret until it is on tool number one and position X axis for easy removal of turret In MDI mode enter and execute M43 to unclamp the turret then E stop the machine Block the shaft so it cannot slide back Remove retainer plate and O ring from the turret either four or eight bolts Remove turret Caution Turret is heavy and can be slippery Remove key from shaft Remove thrust washers and needle bearings inspect these before installation TURRET REPLACEMENT gt 6 7 Grease red grease and install thrust washers and needle bearings Install turret key and put the turret on the shaft Install O ring and retainer plate of turret Start bolts and run t
179. current limitto the tool changer Potentiometer R45 adjusts the current limitto the tool changer motors R45 should be set to limit current to between four and six amps The IOPCB also contains a circuit for sensing a ground fault condition of the servo power supply If more than 0 5 amps is detected flowing through the grounding connection of the 160V DC buss a ground fault alarm is generated and the control will turn off servos and stop Relay K6 is for the coolant pump 230V AC It is a plug in type and is double pole Relays K9 through K12 are also plug in types for controlling the tool changer The Input Output Assembly consists of a single printed circuit board called the IOPCB The connectors on the IOPCB are P1 16 relay drivers from MOCON 1 to 8 510 P2 16 pin relay drivers from MOCON 9 to 16 520 16 relay drivers from MOCON 17 to 24 M21 M24 540 P4 34 pin inputs to MOCON 550 P5 Servo power on relay 1 1 110 P6 230V AC from 930 P7 230V AC to coolant pump 940 P8 Auto off relay 1 7 170 P9 Spindle drive commands 710 P10 Spindle fan and oil pump 115V AC 300 P12 115V AC to spindle head solenoids 880A P13 Turret status inputs 820 P14 Low TSC 900 P15 Spindle head status inputs 890 P16 Emergency stop input 770 P17 Low Lube input 960 P18 Over Voltage Input 970 P19 Low Air Input 950 P20 Overheat input 830 P21 Spindle drive status inputs 780 96 8710
180. d both thrust bearing washers to the shoulder of the turret shaft Go to Parameter 43 and change the INVIS AXIS to zero 0 Then go to the Alarms page type DEBUG and press the WRITE key Press the HANDLE JOG key Press the key in the lower right corner of the jog keys it s unmarked and directly below the Z jog key Then jog the A axis so the key way slot is on top Note This can only be done while the turret is unclamped Reinstall the turret and turret shaft cover Make sure that the turret makes it over the O ring before the bolts are tightened completely If the bolts tighten up and the O ring is still visible one of the thrust washers is not on the shoulder of the turret shaft Return to Step 1 of the Turret Alignment Verification section and verify your readings 10 When the turret alignment is complete go to the Alarms page and type DEBUG then press the WRITE key Change Parameter 43 INVIS AXIS to 1 Note All alignments done could change spindle centerline Verify and enter new spindle centerline position in Parameter 254 CENTERING INNER TURRET CoupLinG WitH 1 4 Brass This procedure is only to be performed if there is not enough adjustment to perform an outer coupling alignment 1 Note This procedure is only to be performed if the turret is equipped with a 1 4 brass plug Remove the 1 4 brass plug to gain access to the rear coupling Disconnect tha air
181. defined DO Or END Already In Use Series A conditional expression was found outside of an IF THEN WHILE or M99 block January 1999 A macro expression cannot be concatenated to N or O Do not declare O 1 etc An alpha address with expression such as A 1 2 evaluated incorrectly Same as 517 In the evaluation of a macro expression an operand was expected and not found In the evaluation of a macro expression an operator was expected and not found An illegal value was passed to a function such as SQRT or ASIN A variable was referenced for writing The variable referenced is read only THEN was encountered and a conditional statement was not processed in the same block An END was encountered without encountering a previous matching DO DO END numbers must agree Variable cannot be read during axis movement A G code command was found on a WHILE DO or END macro block Move the G code to a separate block Only one Assignment is allowed per block or a THEN statement is missing On G65 lines all parameters must follow the G65 G code Place parameters after G65 The addresses G L N O and P cannot be used to pass parameters Only 10 occurrences of I J or K can occur in a 665 subroutine call Reduce the J or K count Only four levels of macro nesting can occur Reduce the amount of nested G65 calls Macro syntax is not allowed in a pocket pattern subroutine A conditional expression evaluated to
182. dle on the outside of the control cabinet will shut this breaker off when it is unlocked A trip of this breaker indicates a SERIOUS overload problem and should not be reset without investigating the cause of the trip The full circuit breaker rating corresponds to as much as 15 horsepower Main Contactor K 1 Main contactor K1 is used to turn the control on and off The POWER ON switch applies power to the coil of K1 and after it is energized an auxiliary switch on K1 continues to apply power to the coil The POWER OFF switch on the front panel will always remove power from this contactor When the main contactor is off the only power used by the control is supplied through two 72 amp fuses to the circuit that activates the contactor An overvoltage or lightning strike will blow these fuses and shut off the main contactor The power to operate the main contactor is supplied from a 24V AC control transformer that is primary fused at amp This ensures that the only circuit powered when the machine is turned off is this transformer and only low voltage is present at the front panel on off switches Low Power SuPPLY The low voltage power supply provides 5V DC 12V DC and 12V DC to all of the logic sections of the control It operates from 115V AC nominal input power It will continue to operate correctly over a 90V AC to 133V AC range Power PCB POWER The low voltage power distribution and high voltage fuses and circuit
183. e SP HIGH G MIN SPEED Command speed used to rotate spindle motor when orienting spindle in high gear Units are maximum spindle RPM divided by 4096 SP LOW G MIN SPEED Command speed used to rotate spindle motor when orienting spindle in low gear Units are maximum spindle RPM divided by 4096 GEAR CHANGE SPEED Command speed used to rotate spindle motor when changing gears Units are maximum spindle RPM divided by 4096 LOW AIR DELAY Delay allowed after sensing low air pressure before alarm is generated Alarm skipped if air pressure returns before delay Units are 1 50 seconds SP LOCK SETTLE TIME Required time in milliseconds that the spindle lock must be in place and stable before spindle orientation is considered complete GEAR CH REV TIME Time in milliseconds before motor direction is reversed while in a gear change SPINDLE STEPS REV Sets the number of encoder steps per revolution of the spindle Applies only to hard tapping option 46 129 Al 130 e PARAMETERS Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter 80 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 Series MAX SPIN DELAY TIME
184. e These include servo motor types gear ratios speeds stored stroke limits lead screw compensations motor control delays and macro call selections These are all rarely changed by the user and should be protected from being changed by the parameter lock setting If you need to change parameters contact HAAS or your dealer Parameters are protected from being changed by Setting 7 The Settings page lists some parameters that the user may need to change during normal operation and these are simply called Settings Under normal conditions the parameter displays should not be modified A complete list of the parameters is provided here The PAGE UP PAGE DOWN up and down cursor keys and the jog handle can be used to scroll through the parameter display screens in the control The left and right cursor keys are used to scroll through the bits in a single parameter Parameter 1 X SWITCHES Parameter 1 is a collection of single bit flags used to turn servo related functions on and off The left and right cursor arrows are used to select the function being changed All values are 0 or 1 only The function names are REV ENCODER Used to reverse the direction of encoder data REV POWER Used to reverse direction of power to motor REV PHASING Used to reverse motor phasing DISABLED Used to disable any axis Z CH ONLY With A only indicates that no home switch AIR BRAKE With A only indicates that air brake is used DISABLEZ T Disables encod
185. e assembly on brush machines goes out The servo amplifiers servo drive assembly is on the left side of the main control cabinet and about halfway down This light s is at the top of the circuit card at the center of the assembly Until this light goes out there are dangerous voltages in the assembly EVEN WHEN POWER IS SHUT OFF MOCON or MOTIF BOARD no eo E 7 Note Refer to Cable Locations for a diagram of this board Turn machine power off Turn the main switch upper right of electrical cabinet to the off position Loosen the two screws on the cabinet door and then open the door enough to safely work on the electrical panel Wait until at least the red CHARGE light on the servo amplifiers servo drive assembly on brush machines goes out before beginning any work inside the electrical cabinet Disconnect all leads to the Motor Controller MOCON or Motor Interface MOTIF board for brush machines Ensure all cables are properly labeled for reconnecting later After all cables have been disconnected unscrew the standoffs taking care to hold the board in place until all standoffs have been removed Note If the VIDEO KEYBOARD or PROCESSOR boards need replacing please skip the next step Replace the MOCON or MOTIF board attaching it to the VIDEO KEYBOARD beneath the MOCON MOTIF board with the standoffs Reconnect all leads previously removed to their proper connections V
186. e coil of the main contactor K1 It guarantees that the maximum voltage leaving the Power Supply assembly when power is off is 12V AC to earth ground It is connected via P5 to the POWER PCB The following circuit breakers are located on the Power supply assembly CB2 controls the 115volt power from the main transformer to the servo transformers and if tripped will turn off the servo motors and air solenoids CB2 could be blown by a severe servo overload CB3 controls the power to coolant pump only It can be blown by an overload of the coolant pump motor or a short in the wiring to the motor CB4 controls the 115V AC to the air solenoids 4th axis brake and the oiler It is never expected to trip If it does trip it is likely caused by a short circuit in the wiring on the 1 0 assembly or the wiring to the solenoids on the spindle head OPERATOR s Lamp The operator s lamp is using 115 VAC taken from P19 on the main power distribution 96 8710 113 SERVICE MANUAL TECHNICAL REFERENCE lt rie G January 1999 114 5 10 POWER TRANSFORMER ASSEMBLY T1 The power transformer assembly is used to convert three phase input power 50 60Hz to three phase 230V and 115V power Two different transformers are used depending on the input voltage range The low voltage transformer has four different input connections to allow for a range of voltages from 195 V RMS to 260 V RMS The high voltage transfo
187. e installation tool and line up key way with the bolt that is equidistant between the springs or previous marked alignment Install turret shaft assembly align mark on retaining ring with the mark on the casting Align keyway facing up Install back half of curvic coupling on to gearbox snug two bolts and center the play between the bolt holes Install the remainder of the bolts and torque to specifications Install lever cam Install key for limit switch cam Install limit switch cam Install limit switch bracket 10 Attach actuator to lever cam 11 Install inspection plate 12 Install coolant tube bracket 13 Add oil to the gear box 8 cups 2500 ml 14 Install turret as described in previous section Turret motor coupling adjustment procedure must be completed for proper alignment 96 8710 January 19 99 SERVICE MANUAL MECHANICAL SERVICE Series SPINDLE ALIGNMENT VERIFICATION This procedure should be performed after the turret face has been realigned 96 8710 TOOLS REQUIRED 1 SPINDLE ALIGNMENT TEST BAR P N T 1312 Mount a 0 0001 indicator short setup to face of turret Figure 3 7 Checking runout Install Spindle Alignment Test Bar Take up any slack between bolts with washers Place the indicator tip onto the test bar near the spindle Rotate the spindle to determine the runout The tolerance is 0001 If the t
188. e screw Same as alarm 145 Same as alarm 145 Normally disabled for rotary axis Spindle not at zero speed for tool change A signal from the spindle drive indicating that the spindle drive is stopped is not present while a tool change operation is going on Internal software error call your dealer Control has detected an electronics fault All motors and solenoids are shut down This is most likely caused by a fault of the processor board stack at the top left of the control Call your dealer Broken wires or encoder contamination All servos are turned off This can also be caused by loose connectors at P1 P4 Same as alarm 153 Same as alarm 153 Same as alarm 153 The self test of the MOCON has failed Replace the MOCON Internal circuit board problem The VIDEO PCB in the processor stack is tested at power on This could also be caused by a short in the front panel membrane keypad Call your dealer Keyboard shorted or button pressed at power on A power on test of the membrane keypad has found a shorted button It can also be caused by a short in the cable from the main cabinet or by holding a switch down during power on ANA 5 nT s lt cTP Vrs_ I _ 968710 January 1999 96 8710 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 173 174 175 176 177 178 182 Low Voltage X Axis Drive Fault Y Axis Drive Fault Z Axis Drive Fault A Axis Drive Fault
189. eck that the oil level is above the black line Check for loose pieces hardware Check for debris in motor cooling fins HypDRAULIc TAILSTOCK Tailstock pulsates as it moves e Check operating pressure Minimum operating pressure is 120 psi e Check for leaks at hydraulic cylinder e Check for leaks at hose fittings January 1999 1 6 ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING CAUTION Before working on any electrical components power off the machine and wait approximately 10 minutes This will allow the high voltage power on the brushless amplifiers to be discharged ELECTRICAL ALARMS Axis Drive Fault Alarm Blown amplifier indicated by a light at bottom of amplifier when power is on Replace amplifier Amplifier or MOCON is noise sensitive If this is the case the alarm can be cleared and the axis will run normally for a while To check an amplifier switch the motor leads and control cables between the amplifier and the one next to it If the same problem occurs with the other axis the amplifier must be replaced If the problem stays on the same axis either the MOCON or control cable The problem could also be the axis motor itself with leads either shorted to each other or to ground which is very rare Amplifier faulting out for valid reason such as overtemp overvoltage or 12 volt undervoltage condition This usually results from running a servo intensive program or unadjusted 12 volt power supply Replace amplifier Ove
190. ed and encoder position data is unreliable This can also be caused by loose connectors at P1 P4 HAAS 23 e ALARMS 24 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 Y Motor Z Fault Z Motor Z Fault A Motor Z Fault Spindle Not Locked Time out Call Your Dealer X Limit Switch Y Limit Switch Z Limit Switch A Limit Switch Spindle Turning Mode Out Of Range Self Test Fail X axis Z Ch Missing Y axis Z Ch Missing Z axis Z Ch Missing A axis Z Ch Missing MOCON Watchdog Fault Video Keyboard PCB Failure Keyboard Failure Series Same as alarm 139 Same as alarm 139 Same as alarm 139 January 1999 Shot pin not fully engaged when a tool change operation is being per formed Check air pressure and solenoid circuit breaker CB4 This can also be caused by a fault in the sense switch that detects the position of the lock pin Time allocated for use prior to payment exceeded Call your dealer Axis hit limit switch or switch disconnected This is not normally possible as the stored stroke limits will stop the slides before they hit the limit switches Check the wiring to the limit switches and connector P5 at the side of the main cabinet Can also be caused by a loose encoder shaft at the back of the motor or coupling of motor to th
191. ed for jogging turning of the crank has no effect When the axis being moved reaches its travel limits the handle inputs will be ignored in the direction that would exceed the travel limits Parameter 57 can be used to reverse the direction of operation of the handle 1 Turn the machine power off 2 Remove the screws holding the cover panel the back of the control panel Take care to hold the cover panel in place until all screws have been removed 3 Unplug the cable leading to the jog handle encoder IMPORTANT The blank pin side of the connector must face as shown in Fig 4 12 when reconnecting otherwise damage may occur to the machine 5V A 5V BLK RED RED Blank pin goes to this side of connector WHT YEL GND B GND B WHT GRN WHT WHT RED BRN Figure 4 12 Jog handle encoder 4 Using the 5 64 allen wrench loosen the two screws holding the knob to the control panel and remove January 1999 SERVICE MANUAL ELECTRICAL SERVICE Series Figure 4 13 Jog handle removal 5 Remove the three screws holding the jog handle encoder to the control panel and remove 6 Replacement is reverse of removal Keep in mind the important notice in Step 3 SwircH REPLACEMENT Note This section is applicable for the POWER ON POWER OFF EMERGENCY STOP CYCLE START and FEED HOLD switches 1 Turn the machine power off 2 Remove the 16 screws holding the cov
192. een the turret and spindle ring and observe the reading of the indicator A reading of more than 001 would indicate excessive vibration The two common sources of noise are the spindle and axis drives Most complaints about vibration accuracy and finish can be attributed to incorrect machining practices such as poor quality or damaged tooling incorrect speeds or feeds or poor fixturing Before concluding that the machine is not working properly ensure that good machining practices are being observed These symptoms will not occur individually Ex A machine with backlash may vibrate heavily yielding a bad finish Put all of the symptoms together to arrive at an accurate picture of the problem lt Machine vibrates while spindle is on and is not cutting Sometimes only at specific RPM If the spindle alone causes vibration of the machine this is usually caused by the belt pulley drive system or the chuck jaws are not centered correctly lt Machine vibrates while jogging the axis with the jog handle The HAAS control uses very high gain accelerations curves This vibration as you jog is simply the servos quickly trying to follow the handle divisions If this is a problem try using a smaller division on the handle You will notice the vibration more at individual clicks than when you are turning the handle faster This is normal The machine vibrates excessively in a cut This is a tough one to call because machining practices come i
193. ends of the travel The ballnut may get hot Misalignment radially at the yoke where the lead screw ball nut mounts is indicated by heating up of the ball nut on the lead screw and noise and tightness throughout the travel of the lead screw Misalignment at the yoke where the ball nut mounts is indicated by noise and tightness at both ends of the travel of the lead screw The ball nut may get hot Accuracy BACKLASH Accuracy complaints are usually related to tooling programming or fixturing problems Eliminate these possibilities before working on the machine lt Poor Z axis accuracy e Check for a loose encoder on the servo motor Also ensure the key in the motor or the lead screw is in place and the coupling is tight Brush motors only e Check parameters for that axis e Check for backlash in the lead screw as outlined below Initial Preparation Turn the lathe ON ZERO RET the machine and move the carriage to the approximate center of its travel in the Z axis Move the turret to the approximate center of the X axis travel X AXIS 1 Place dial indicator and base on the spindle retaining ring with the tip of the indicator positioned on the outside diameter of the turret as shown in Fig 1 1 Fig 1 1 Dial indicator in position to check X axis 2 Set dial indicator and the Distance to go display in the HANDLE JOG mode to zero as follows e Zero the dial indicator e Press the MDI button on the control panel P
194. ent gear If the outputs are the same neither gear is selected If the gearbox remains in this condition between gears for a certain amount of time Alarm 126 Gear Fault is generated The only way to resetthis alarm is to press the POWER UP RESTART key Thecurrent gear can also be monitored by pressing the CURNT COMDS key This display will show whether the machine is currently in HIGH GEAR LOW GEAR or NO GEAR There are anumber of parameters related to the gearbox Their values should not be changed by the operator 96 8710 103 SERVICE MANUAL TECHNICAL REFERENCE Ge rie ag C January 1999 104 5 3 SERVOS sRuUsHLEss Haas machines are equipped with brushless motors which provide for better performance and no mainte nance In addition to the performance differences these machines differ from brush type machines which have already been discussed in the following areas The brushless motors have 8192 line encoders built in which result in differences in acceleration parameters 7 21 35 49 and 157 The exponential accel decel time is set by parameters 115 116 and 168 In Position parameters 101 102 103 104 and 165 also affect brushless motors The motor controller board has a dedicated processor which does all the servo control algorithm There is no servo distribution board anymore therefore there is no CHARGE light present Care should still be taken however since the
195. er Z test for testing only SERVO HIST Graph of servo error for diagnostics only INV HOME SW Inverted home switch N C switch INV Z CH Inverted Z channel normally high CIRC WRAP With A only causes 360 wrap to return to 0 NO I IN BRAK With A only removes feedback when brake is active LOW PASS 1 Adds 1 term to low pass filter LOW PASS 2X Adds two terms to low pass filter OVER TEMP NC Selects a normally closed overheat sensor in motor CABLE TEST Enables test of encoder signals and cabling Z TEST HIST History plot of Z channel test data SCALE FACT X If set to 1 the scale ratio is interpreted as divided by X where X depends on bits SCALE X LO and SCALE X HI INVIS AXIS Used to create an invisible axis DIAMETER PRG Used to set diameter programming When set to 1 it will interpret inputs as diameters instead of radii TRAVL LIMITS Travel limits are used NO LIMSW ALM Alarms are not generated at the limit switches D FILTER X8 Enables the 8 tap FIR filter Used to eliminate high frequency vibrations depending on the axis motor D FILTER X4 Enables the 4 tap FIR filter Used to eliminate high frequency vibrations depending on the axis motor TORQUE ONLY For HAAS only 3 EREV MREV For HAAS only 96 8710 AMA 5 123 Al 124 e PARAMETERS Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Param
196. er panel on the back of the control panel Take care to hold the cover panel in place until all screws have been removed 3 Disconnect all leads to the switch s connectors Ensure all leads are properly marked for reconnecting later Refer to Fig 4 11 for proper locations 4 Unscrew the two small set screws one on top and one on the bottom and turn the switch counterclock wise to loosen Separate from the front portion and pull out 5 For replacement screw the front and rear portions together reverse of removal and tighten down the two small set screws when the switch is properly positioned Note The POWER ON POWER OFF and EMERGENCY STOP switches must all have the connectors on the bottom of the switch 6 Reconnect all leads to the correct switch 98 9 96 8710 January 1999 Series SPINDLE Loap METER REPLACEMENT 1 Turn the power off and disconnect power to the machine 2 Remove the 16 screws holding the cover panel on the back of the control panel Take care to hold the cover panel in place until all screws have been removed 3 Disconnect the two leads at the back of the spindle load meter assembly Ensure the two leads are properly marked for reconnecting later 4 Unscrew the four screws that hold the spindle load meter assembly to the control panel Take care to hold the assembly in place until all screws have been removed Remove the assembly 5 Instal
197. erance for determining the end point of a hard tapping operation Units are encoder counts X ACCEL FEED FORWARD This parameter sets the feed forward gain for the X axis servo It has no units Y ACCEL FEED FORWARD Same as Parameter 145 Z ACCEL FEED FORWARD Same as Parameter 145 A ACCEL FEED FORWARD Same as Parameter 145 MAX SP RPM LOW GEAR Maximum spindle RPM in low gear B SWITCHES See Parameter 1 for description B P GAIN See Parameter 2 for description B D GAIN See Parameter 3 for description GAIN See Parameter 4 for description B RATIO STEPS UNIT See Parameter 5 for description BMAX TRAVEL STEPS See Parameter 6 for description B ACCELERATION See Parameter 7 for description B MAX SPEED See Parameter 8 for description B MAX ERROR See Parameter 9 for description B FUSE LEVEL See Parameter 10 for description B BACK EMF See Parameter 11 for description B STEPS REVOLUTION See Parameter 12 for description HAAT ____ __ 133 Al 134 e PARAMETERS Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 172 173 175 176 177 178 179 Series B BACKLASH See Parameter 13 for description B DEAD ZONE See Parameter 14 for description IN
198. es Aux axes are attempting to travel past their limits 46 31 e ALARMS v oyJ noQ 32 357 358 360 361 362 363 364 367 368 369 372 373 374 376 377 378 379 383 384 385 386 387 Aux Axis Disabled Multiple Aux Axis Tool Changer Disabled Gear Change Disabled Tool Usage Alarm Coolant Locked Off No Circ Interp Aux Axis Cutter Comp Interference Groove Too Small Tool Too Big Tool Change In Canned Cycle Invalid Code in DNC Missing XBZA in G31 or G36 No Cutter Comp In Skip No Skip in Graph Sim Skip Signal Found Skip Signal Not Found Inch Is Not Selected Metric Is Not Selected Invalid L P or R Code In G10 Invalid Address Format Cutter Comp Not Allowed With G103 Series Aux axes are disabled January 1999 Can only move one auxiliary axis at a time Check Parameter 57 Not a normal condition for the Lathe Not used Tool life limit was reached To continue reset the usage count in the Current Commands display and press RESET Override is off and program tried to turn on coolant Only rapid or feed is allowed with aux axes G01 cannot be done with tool size Tool too big to enter cut Use a smaller tool for cut Tool change not allowed while canned cycle is active A code found in a DNC program could not be interpreted because of restrictions to DNC G31 skip
199. eter Parameter 2 EREV MREV NON MUX PHAS BRUSH MOTOR ROTARY AXIS SCALE X LO SCALE X HI 2 X 3 X 4 X 5 X 6 X 7 X 8 X 9 X 10 XxX 11 X Series For HAAS only Not currently used Enables the brushless motor option When set to 1 the axis is treated as a rotary axis Position will be displayed in degrees and inputs will be interpreted as angles With SCALE X HI bit determines the scale factor used in bit SCALE FACT X With SCALE X LO bit determines the scale factor used in bit SCALE FACT X See below January 1999 L 0 0 1 1 P GAIN Proportional gain in servo loop D GAIN Derivative gain in servo loop GAIN Integral gain in servo loop RATIO STEPS UNIT The number of steps of the encoder per unit of travel Encoder steps supply four 4 times their line count per revolution Thus an 8192 line encoder and 6mm pitch screw give 8192 x 4 x 25 4 6 138718 MAXTRAVEL STEPS Max negative direction of travel from machine zero in encoder steps Does not apply to A axis Thus a 20 inch travel 8192 line encoder and 6 mm pitch screw give 20 0 x 138718 2774360 ACCELERATION Maximum acceleration of axis in steps per second per second MAX SPEED Max speed for this axis in steps per second MAX ERROR Max error allowed in servo loop before alarm is generated Units are encoder steps FUSE LEVEL Fuse level in of max power to motor Applies only
200. g you will incorrectly install it or break something else in the process Consider for a moment changing the processor s board First you haveto download all parameters remove a dozen connectors replace the board reconnect and reload and if you make one mistake or bend one tiny pin it WON T WORK You always need to consider the risk of accidentally damaging the machine anytime you work on it It is cheap insurance to double check a suspect part before physically changing it The less work you do on the machine the better 96 8710 AIMS 3 SERVICE MANUAL EZ TROUBLESHOOTING January 1999 Series 1 1 GENERAL MACHINE OPERATION Machine cannot be powered on e Check input voltage to machine e Check main circuit breaker at top right of electrical cabinet switch must be at the on position e Check overvoltage fuses e Check wiring to POWER OFF button on front control panel e Check wiring to AUTO OFF relay to IOPCB e Check connection between 24V transformer and K1 contactor e may need replacement e POWER PCB may need replacement lt gt Machine can be powered on but turns off by itself e Check settings 1 and 2 for Auto Off Timer or Off at M30 e Check alarm history for OVERVOLTAGE or OVERHEAT shutdown e Check AC power supply lines for intermittent supply e Check wiring to POWER OFF button on front control panel e Chec
201. he Z axis towards 8 9 the spindle until the indicator rest on the inside of the tool pocket Align the tool pocket holder along the X axis with the spindle alignment bar by rotating the spindle and sweeping the indicator 180 along the axis Refer to Figure 3 3 Jog the turret along the X axis until a measurement reading within 001 is indicated Note 3 Use the jog handle in tenths mode to zero pocket 10 Next zero the spindle alignment at the top and bottom of the turret pocket by sweeping the indicator at those positions and adjusting the jack screws equally See Notes 1 and 2 11 Rotate the spindle 180 and adjust the jackscrews until the indicator reads within a 001 at the top and bottom of pocket Repeat Steps 8 and 9 to ensure the X axis is zeroed for each adjustment in the vertical direction 12 Torque the spindle head mounting bolts to 500 ft lbs carefully so as not to change the spindle s position 13 Once the pocket is zero X axis value on the screen becomes the new machine spindle centerline 14 Tighten the jam nuts on the jack screws under the spindle head 58 HAAS January 1999 96 8710 SERVICE MANUAL January 1999 Y S O T MECHANICAL SERVICE Series Note 4 The x axis value in the Positions page is the new machine centerline This value should be stored in Parameter 254 k 5 Repeat Steps 3 5 to ensure that the shaft has remained horizontal If the shaft
202. he rigid bar into the chuck or collet and mount the tenths indicator at the end Sweep the diameter of the Test Bar and note the vertical runout Refer to Figure 3 13 Indicator Leveling Stand Figure 3 13 Tailstock leveling indicator setup 5 Raise the TS and bring up to center by equally turning the jack bolts do not turn one jack bolt more than 1 4 turn without turning the other Adjust to within 0003 and lightly snug bolts during procedure Note Check tailstock parallelism each time the tailstock is raised 6 Check for TS level change Adjust by setting the indicator to zero at the right end of the Test Bar and jog the indicator over to left end of bar Snug bolts in upper left corner and loosen the others Adjust the right hand jack bolt only and bring the indicator to within 0005 50 96 8710 January 1999 SERVICE MANUAL MECHANICAL SERVICE Series 7 Once the TS is leveled the mounting bolts should be torqued to 50 ft lbs in a clockwise fashion first the inner mounting bolts than the outside If the horizontal runout is unacceptable the tapered insert may have to be reset as described in the following section Note These steps may have to be repeated to achieve proper alignment Two Piece TAiLsTOCK ALIGNMENT 1 Using a spindle alignment tool and a Morse taper tool indicate from spindle to tailstock Measure flatness and TIR total indicated
203. he standoffs 17 Reconnect all leads previously removed to their proper connections Input Output UO Board Note Refer to Cable Locations for a diagram of this board 1 Follow all precautions noted previously before working in the electrical cabinet 2 Turn the main switch upper right of electrical cabinet to the off position 3 Using a large flat tip screwdriver loosen the two screws on the cabinet door and then open the door enough to safely work on the electrical panel 4 Disconnect all leads to the Input Output board and move aside for removal Ensure all cables are properly labeled for reconnecting later The following illustration shows all cable numbers and the locations on the 1 0 board 5 Remove the board by first removing the twelve screws that fasten it to the cabinet Take care to hold the board in place until all screws have been removed 6 Replace the 1 0 board attaching it to the cabinet with the twelve screws previously removed 7 Reconnect all leads to the 1 0 board at this time SERVICE MANUAL ELECTRICAL SERVICE 94 January 1999 Series POWER BOARD 7 Note Refer to Cable Locations for a diagram of this board Follow all precautions noted previously before working in the electrical cabinet Turn the main switch upper right of electrical cabinet to the off position Using a large flat tip screwdriver loosen the two screws on the
204. hem up flush with retainer plate Remove the block from the rear of the shaft Tighten and torque retainer plate bolts In MDI mode enter and execute M44 to clamp the turret Replace the gearbox cover plate TURRET SHAFT REMOVAL AND REPLACEMENT TURRET SHAFT REMOVAL 1 2 gt Remove turret as described in previous section Mark the retaining ring and turret casting for alignment purposes Remove coolant tube bracket and move out of the way Remove inspection plate which will allow the gearbox oil to drain Catch oil in a bucket Remove the bolt that holds the rod end to the lever cam Do not adjust the rod end Remove the lever cam Remove the switch bracket ALMA l 51 SERVICE MANUAL MECHANICAL SERVICE 52 8 January 1999 Series Remove the two set screws on the home switch cam at the back of the shaft then remove the key Turn the motor shaft to gain access to key or set screws servos off E stop 9 Remove back half of curvic coupling 10 12 bolts inspect O ring 10 Remove assembly coupling holder and shaft being careful to keep tension on the assembly to hold the cam and bearings in place TURRET SHAFT REPLACEMENT Tools required Installation tool for coupling mount 1 2 gt 9 Apply grease to the ball bearing areas of the Install coupling mount cams and bearing using th
205. her screws and standoffs until all are mounted Tighten down completely Reconnect all cables to the Serial KBIF board at their proper locations HAAS January 1999 96 8710 SERVICE MANUAL January 1999 q lt di ELECTRICAL SERVICE 4 6 SPINDLE ENCODER REPLACEMENT Please read this section in its entirety before attempting to remove or replace encoder REMOVAL 1 Loosen the eight motor fan panel mounting bolts on left end of machine then remove the panel Loosen the two encoder mounting bolts and slide the encoder up until there is slack in the belt 3 Remove the encoder Inspect the encoder belt for any damage If replacement is necessary refer to the Spindle section for INSTALLATION 5 Place the belt onto the pulley 6 Mount the new encoder and tighten the bolts Note When tightening the bolts ensure the belt remains loose around the pulleys If the belt is too tight it could damage the encoder 7 Replace the motor fan panel lt a d A ENG m vr Jas 255 LES 700 Gu 20 ZZ Mounting bolts 2 WLI LDP TTS 107000 777 779 27 PY 7 1777 225 Figure 4 15 Encoder belt locations 101 AAS 96 8710 January 1999 SERVICE MANUAL ELECTRICAL SERVICE Series 102 96 8710 SERVICE MANUAL January 1999
206. hnique Material left after facing a part e Ensure tooling is correct e Ensure turret is aligned to X axis travel e Ensure Parameter 254 Spindle Center is set correctly Material Left After Facing Part Q Machining yields a poor finish e Check the condition of the tooling and the spindle Ensure turret is clamped Ensure tooling is tight Check tooling for chatter or lack of rigidity Check the balance of the chuck part and fixture Check for backlash Check turret alignment 8 968710 SERVICE MANUAL January 1999 y 7 TROUBLESHOOTING THERMAL GROWTH A possible source of accuracy and positioning errors is thermal growth of the leadscrews As the machine warms up the leadscrews expand in both linear axes X and Z causing accuracy and positioning errors This is especially critical in jobs that require high accuracy Note Thermal growth will be more noticeable in the X axis since errors will be doubled when cutting a diameter Note The leadscrew will always expand away from the motor end VERIFY THERMAL GROWTH There are a number of ways to verify the problem The following procedure will verify thermal growth of the X axis leadscrew in a machine that has not been warmed up 1 Home the machine In MDI mode press POSIT and PAGE DOWN to the OPER page 2 Jog to an offset location Select the X axis and press the ORIGIN key to zero it
207. ide spring and remove spring retainer located inside turret housing Use access hole located on the opposite side of turret to remove spring retainer Replace used spring retainer with new beveled spring retainer Note Old style bracket is not equipped with a cylinder spring retainer Remove the two mounting bolts and old style bracket then replace with new bracket equipped with pivot arm and remount with two mounting bolts Skip to Step 7 Remove cylinder spring retainer attached to pivot arm and replace with new cylinder spring retainer Install new cross slide spring Attach spring to spring retainer in turret housing and cylinder spring retainer of pivot arm Place 3 4 wrench on pivot arm then pull towards rear of bracket until pivot arm locks to restore spring tension Tighten 3 8 SHCS of lower pivot arm and 3 4 nut of upper pivot arm on spring bracket 10 Remove the wood safety block 11 Re attach the X axis way cover 12 Install sliding tool changer cover AAA OV I 96 8710 January 1999 SERVICE MANUAL MECHANICAL SERVICE Series 3 10 PARTS CATCHER CAUTION POWER OFF THE MACHINE BEFORE PERFORMING THE FOLLOWING PROCEDURE 1 Disconnect the main air line 2 Remove necessary panels to access the parts catcher unit 3 Loosen 1 1 2 shaft collar that locates the parts catcher tray and slide out tray and inner shaft 4 Unclamp outer retaining ring that retai
208. is connected to the first three terminals of TB10 VOLTAGE SELECTION TAPS There are four labeled plastic terminal blocks Each block has three connections for wires labeled 74 75 and 76 Follow the instructions printed on the transformer SECONDARY CONNECTION 1 The secondary output from T1 is 115V AC three phase CB2 protects the secondary of transformer T1 and is rated at 25 amps AAAS 96 8710 January 1999 OPTIONAL 480 TRANSFORMER SERVICE MANUAL Series Voltage Selection Taps for the 480 Transformer Right to left 354 to 376 377 to 402 403 to 428 429 to 457 458 to 488 480 V transformer has additional terminal block TECHNICAL REFERENCE The brushless amplifier has one fuse F1 15 amps This fuse protects the amplifier itself from drastic damage If this fuse is ever blown the associated motor will stop This will only happen if there is a failure of the amplifier card and the user should never attempt to replace these fuses The POWER PCB contains three gt fuses located at the top right FU1 FU2 Ifthe machine is subject to a severe overvoltage or a lightning strike these fuses will blow and turn off all of the power Replace these fuses only with the same type and ratings The other two fuses protect the turret FU5 and the operator s lamp FUA FUSE NAME FU1 FU2 FU3 LAMP FU1 FU2 FU3 FU4 F1 96 8710 TYPE RATING VOLTAGE amps 250V 250V 250V 250
209. is means that the two speed gear box is not in either high or low gear but is somewhere in between Check the air pressure the solenoids circuit breaker CB4 and the spindle drive The control failed to detect a high signal at the Automatic DOOR input after an M85 was commanded and the Automatic DOOR input was not received before a certain period of time The units are in milliseconds M Fin was active at power on Check the wiring to your M code interfaces This test is only performed at power on The control detected that the chuck is unclamped This is a possible fault in the air solenoids relays on the I O Assembly or wiring Machine did not turn off when an automatic power down was commanded Check wiring to POWIF card on power supply assembly relays on the 10 assembly and the main contactor K1 Shot pin did not release This is detected when spindle motion is com manded Check the solenoid that controls the air to the lock relay 2 8 the wiring to the sense switch and the switch Hydraulic pressure is sensed to be low Check pump pressure and hydraulic tank oil level Servo motor overheat The temperature sensor in the motor indicates over 150 degrees F This can be caused by an extended overload of the motor such as leaving the slide at the stops for several minutes Same as alarm 135 Same as alarm 135 Same as alarm 135 Encoder marker pulse count failure This alarm usually indicates that the encoder has been damag
210. ither 12 5 KHz or 16 KHz The amplifiers are current limited to 30 amps peak 45A peak for a medium amplifier However there are fuse limits both in hardware and software to protect the amplifiers and motors from over current The nominal voltage for these amplifiers is 320 volts Therefore the peak power is about 9600 watts or 13 H P The amplifiers also have short circuit over temperature and over voltage protection HAAS 96 8710 SERVICE MANUAL January 1999 Ge rie TECHNICAL REFERENCE There is a10 amp 20A fora medium amplifier supply fuse for failure protection This fuse is relatively slow therefore it can handle the 30 amp peak Actual continues current limit to the motor is controlled by software Commands the amplifier 5 volts current in two legs of the motor and a digital enable signal A signal from the amplifier indicates drive fault or sustained high current in stalled motor The connectors on the amplifiers are H V 320 volts DC H V 320 volts return A motor lead phase A B motor lead phase B C motor lead phase C J1 Three pin Molex connector used for 12 and GND J2 Eight pin Molex connector used for input signals 5 4 INPUT OUTPUT ASSEMBLY The IOPCB contains a circuit for electronically turning the tool changer power on and off This prevents any arcing of the tool changer relays and increases their life tremendously This includes an adjustable
211. k connection between 24V transformer and K1 contactor e Check Parameter 57 for Power Off at E STOP e may need replacement e MOTIF or MOCON PCB may need replacement lt Machine turns on keyboard beeps but no CRT display e Check for green POWER LED at front of CRT e Check for power connections to CRT from IOPCB e Close doors and Zero Return the machine possible bad monitor e Check video cable 760 from VIDEO PCB to CRT e Check for lights on the processor e Replace CRT Any LED Microprocessor PCB goes out except HALT e Replace Microprocessor PCB e Replace VIDEO PCB e Replace MOTIF PCB Machine turns on CRT works but no keyboard keys work e Check keyboard cable 700 from VIDEO to KBIF PCB e Replace keypad e Replace KBIF PCB AAAS 968710 SERVICE MANUAL January 1999 y 7 TROUBLESHOOTING VIBRATION Vibration is a subjective evaluation with perceptions varying among individuals making it difficult to determine in mild cases if there is an actual problem In obvious cases itis a matter of determining the source which is not easy since all parts rotate together and sound can be transferred readily Vibrations also need to be distinguished from noise such as a bad bearing We will assume that vibrations would be something that could be felt by putting your hand on the spindle ring One crude method of measurement would be to take an indicator on a magnetic base extended 10 inches betw
212. k triple which corresponds to the average voltage measured in step 2 above There are four positions for the input power to this transformer The input voltage range for each terminal block is as follows TESEU 87 ELECTRICAL SERVICE 88 ELECTRICITY REQUIREMENTS Series January 1999 IMPORTANT REFER TO LOCAL CODE REQUIREMENTS BEFORE WIRING MACHINES ALL MACHINES REQUIRE Three phase 50 or 60Hz power supply Line voltage that does not fluctuate more than 5 20 15HP SYSTEM VOLTAGE REQUIREMENTS 195 260V POWER SUPPLY HAAS CIRCUIT BREAKER 40AMP IF SERVICE RUN FROM ELE PANEL LESS THAN 100 use 8GA WIRE IF SERVICE RUN FROM ELE PANEL MORE THAN 100 use 6GA WIRE 40 30HP SYSTEM VOLTAGE REQUIREMENTS 195 260V POWER SUPPLY 100 HAAS CIRCUIT BREAKER 80AMP IF SERVICE RUN FROM ELE PANEL LESS THAN 100 USE 4GA WIRE IF SERVICE RUN FROM ELE PANEL MORE THAN 100 use 2GA WIRE WARNING HIGH VOLTAGE REQUIREMENTS 360 480V 25AMP 20AMP 1264 WIRE 10GA WIRE HIGH VOLTAGE REQUIREMENTS 360 480V 40AMP 8GA WIRE 6GA WIRE A separate earth or cold water pipe ground is required conduit types are not sufficient Do not connect to 480V unless machine includes high voltage option Maximum voltage leg to leg or leg to ground should not exceed 260 volts or 540 volts for high voltage machines HIGH VOLT r INPUT TER
213. l stud and home switch actuator groove to home assembly If there is misalignment loosen the two 1 4 20 button head screws and let home assembly self center to the ball stud Tighten screws after proper alignment 7 Home position verify by jog functions normal on X and Z axes AAA 96 8710 January 1999 SERVICE MANUAL MECHANICAL SERVICE Series 8 Move turret away and pull down tool setter arm Control should switch to Tool set offset screen X and Z will jog only in slow motion Using your finger trigger probe speaker should beep and diagnostics input should change from 0 gt 1 0 Using slow jog button move X or Z clear of the part tap the probe the motion in current direction should stop offset should update Prose REPLACEMENT 1 Install stylus tip with supplied wrenches Additional information can be found in the probe manufacturer s manual 2 Install 0001 indicator on a safe place on the turret align the tip of probe within 0005 to X and Z axes by loosening the four 4 40 clamping screws and rotating the probe body Finally tighten the clamping screws Setting X offsets 1 Clamp a piece of material in the chuck and take a finish cut on the outside diameter Move away in the Z do not move in the X 2 Measure the diameter of the part using a micrometer and record the measurement on a piece of paper 3 With the tool tip positioned
214. l loop when performing a spindle orientation If a Vector Drive is not installed this parameter si called C axis BACKLASH and is not used Parameter 189 C BASE FREQ This name is used when a Vector Drive is installed This is the rated frequency of the motor If a VectorDrive is not installed this parameter is called C axis DEAD ZONE and is not used 96 8710 5 135 Al 136 e PARAMETERS Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter 190 191 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 Series C HI SP CURR This name is used when a Vector Drive is installed At speeds higher than the base frequency the maximum current that is applied to the motor must be reduced This is done linearly from base to maximum frequency The value set in this parameter is the maximum current at the maximum frequency If a Vector Drive is not installed this parameter is called C axis IN POSITION LIMIT and is not used C MAX CURRENT See Parameter 105 for description C MAG CURRENT This name is used when a Vector Drive is installed This is the magnetization component of the current in the motor also called the flux or the field current If a Vector Drive is not installed this parameter is called C axis D D GAIN and is not used C SPIN ORIENT MARGIN This name is used when a Vector Drive is installed When a spindle orientation is done if the actual position of
215. lash or noisy operation 6 Replace the bearing support end hardstops and reconnect oil line to the lead screw nut 7 Zero return Z axis and set grid offset according to section 3 5 For 40mm Lead Screw 1 Reinsert the lead screw with bumpers into the bearing sleeve in the motor housing Make sure the lead screw nut will be able to slide in to the wedge nut housing Support the lead screw on the bearing support end and re attach the bearing support housing and bearing 2 Reinsert alignment pins through the housing into the base casting replace shims if needed Fasten to the base casting using the six bearing support housing SHCS lock washers and Loctite 3 The following sequence is important to ensure proper installation of the lead screw a On the bearing support end install the lock nut an 1 8 away from the bearing and tighten clamp nut screw Install the shaft lock into the bearing support end of the lead screw 80 96 8710 SERVICE MANUAL January 1999 Gi 7 MECHANICAL SERVICE CAUTION not attach bearing clamp nut against bearing support until the motor side clamp nut is torqued to its proper specification Damage will occur to the bearing and lead screw on the support side b Attach the clamp nut onto the motor side of the lead screw c Place a spanner wrench on the lock nut at the motor end of the assembly Torque the clamp nut against the bearing to 50 FT LBS d At the
216. lation is reverse of removal Ensure leads go the correct location 1 Turn the power off and disconnect power to the machine 2 Remove the 16 screws holding the rear cover panel to the back of the control panel Take care to hold the cover panel in place until all screws have been removed 3 Remove all switches spindle load meter and the jog handle as described in the previous sections 4 Unplug the keypad s 24 pin ribbon cable from the Serial Keyboard Interface board 5 Remove the screws from the front of the control panel Take care to hold the front cover panel and bezel spacer in place until all screws have been removed Remove the two pieces and set aside in a safe place 6 Usinga flat blunt tool such as putty knife pry the keypad away from the control panel Pull the ribbon cable through the opening in the control to remove 7 To replace first put the bezel spacer in place and fasten temporarily with screws in the top corners 96 8710 1 mmu BEI LU 599900 5 BEER Eam maan a n b GE Taunuu A V BEN Siete 145444 BEES nunun Figure 4 14 Keypad installation HAAS ELECTRICAL SERVICE 99 SERVICE MANUAL ELECTRICAL SERVICE snn 100 8 10 11 Series Insert the ribbon cable through the opening in the control panel and place the keypad in the upper right corner of the lower opening and press to the
217. le to write to FLASH The processor connectors are Ji Address buss J2 Data buss J4 Serial port 1 for upload download DNC 850 J5 Serial port 2 for auxiliary 5th axis 850A J3 Power connector J6 Battery AAS M 109 SERVICE IVIANUAL TECHNICAL REFERENCE lt rie ap January 1999 Memory RETENTION BATTERY The memory retention battery is placed into the battery holder soldered into the process board This is a 3 3V Lithium battery that maintains the contents of CMOS RAM during power off periods Prior to this battery being unusable an alarm will be generated indicating low battery If the battery is replaced within 30 days no data will be lost The battery is not needed when the machine is powered on Connector J6 on the processor PCB can be used to connect an external battery 21971224 PCB The VIDEO and KB PCB generates the video data signals for the monitor and the scanning signals for the keyboard In addition the keyboard beeper is generated on this board There is a single jumper on this board used to select inverse video The video PCB connectors are P1 Low Voltage Power Supply PCB 860 P3 Keyboard info 700 P4 Address Buss P5 Data Buss P10 Floppy Dr Power P11 Spare P12 Floppy Dr Signal P13 Video Signal 760 49 5422 J13 Serial Data 850 MOCON BRUSHLESS The brushless machining center
218. lead screw compensation signed parts per billion C BELT COMPENSATION This parameter sets the belt compensation SPNDL ENC STEPS REV This parameter sets the number of encoder steps per revolution of the spindle encoder 1ST AUX MAX TRAVEL This parameter sets the maximum travel of the first auxiliary axis C in the positive direction 2ND AUX MAX TRAVEL This parameter sets the maximum travel of the second auxiliary axis U in the positive direction 3RD AUX MAX TRAVEL This parameter sets the maximum travel of the third auxiliary axis V in the positive direction 4TH AUX MAX TRAVEL This parameter sets the maximum travel of the fourth auxiliary axis W in the positive direction 1ST AUX MIN TRAVEL This parameter sets the maximum travel of the first auxiliary axis C in the negative direction 2ND AUX MIN TRAVEL This parameter sets the maximum travel of the second auxiliary axis U in the negative direction 3RD AUX MIN TRAVEL This parameter sets the maximum travel of the third auxiliary axis V in the negative direction 4TH AUX AXIS MIN TRAVEL This parameter sets the maximum travel of the fourth auxiliary axis W in the negative direction MAX SPINDLE SPEED ALLOWED The RPM above which the chuck will not operate If the spindle is spinning faster than this value the chuck will not open and if it is spinning slower than this value the chuck will open The default is 0 for safety AAAS ee 96 8710 Januar
219. linder to increase the turret travel or towards the air cylinder to decrease the turret travel When adjustment is complete tighten the jam nuts to the extension sleeve 5 Once the turret travel is set the Clamp Unclamp switches must be adjusted Enter the diagnostic data page in order to monitor the TT UNL Turret Unlocked and TT LOK Turret Locked discrete inputs T 96 8710 January 1999 96 8710 SERVICE MANUAL MECHANICAL SERVICE Series For the following procedures follow Section For production units making turret in out adjustments with trip switches Section For production units making turret in out adjustments using air cylinder mounted reed switches Section a b C In MDI enter an M43 Unlock Turret The Turret Unclamp switch should be tripped at this point and discrete input UNL should read 1 Place a 0 160 gage block between the Turret Clamp switch and the side of the cam ensuring it is flat against the cam The Turret Clamp switch should trip and the discrete input TT LOK should read 1 Remove the gage block If either switch does not trip when the gage block is in place the switches need to be adjusted Adjust the switches by loosening the two SHCS and moving the entire switch bracket DO NOT move the individual switches unless absolutely necessary Extensio Sleeve Figure 3 5 Turret travel adjustment components Enter an M44
220. lue stack pointer is in error Call your dealer The macro expression operand stack pointer is in error Call your dealer An expression operand found too few operands on the expression stack Call your dealer A division in a macro expression attempted to divide by zero Re configure expression See Macros section for valid variables See Macros section for valid operators Number of right brackets not equal to the number of left brackets Attempted to write to a read only macro variable Alphabetic addresses N and O cannot be combined with macro variables Do not declare N 1 etc A macro variable was used incorrectly with an alpha address Same as 513 Only one conditional expression is allowed in any WHILE or IF THEN block 35 e ALARMS 36 516 517 518 519 520 521 522 523 524 525 526 527 528 529 530 531 533 534 Illegal Conditional Or No Then Exprsn Not Allowed With N Or O Illegal Macro Exprsn Reference Term Expected Operator Expected Illegal Functional Parameter Illegal Assignment Var Or Value Conditional Reqd Prior To THEN END Found With No Matching DO Var Ref Illegal During Movement Command Found On DO END Line Not Expected Or THEN Required Parameter Precedes G65 Illegal G65 Parameter Too Many I J or In G65 Macro Nesting Too Deep Unknown Code In Pocket Pattern Macro Variable Un
221. m call your dealer Put a Pn n for seconds or a Pn for milliseconds L code not used here Remove L Code Tool number must be between 1 and the value in Parameter 65 That M code is not defined and is not a macro call Macro name 090nn not in memory A macro call definition is in parameters and was accessed by user program but that macro was not loaded into memory Number too large This alarm is generated when Setting 15 is turned ON and an H code number in a running program does not match the tool number in the spindle Correct the Hn codes select the right tool or turn off Setting 15 Parameters have disabled this axis Not normally possible Same as alarm 333 Same as alarm 333 96 8710 AHAS January 1999 96 8710 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 348 349 350 352 353 354 355 356 A Axis Disabled GOTO or P line Not Found Invalid IJK and XYZ in G02 or G03 Multiple Codes Cutter Comp Begin With G02 or G03 Cutter Comp End With G02 or G03 Cutter Comp Path Too Small Display Queue Record Full Cutter Comp With G18 and G19 Illegal Spiral Motion Prog Stop W O Cancel Cutter Comp Cutter Comp Look Ahead Error Invalid P Code Aux Axis Power Off Aux Axis No Home Aux Axis Disconnected Aux Axis Position Mismatch Aux Axis Travel Limit e ALARMS Series An attempt was made to program the A axis while it w
222. m up is to run the current program at an offset Z position before the part This will allow the leadscrews to warm up to the correct temperature and stabilize Once the machine is at temperature the leadscrews won t expand any further unless they re allowed to cool down A warm up program should be run after each time the machine is left idle 96 8710 AAS DS SERVICE MANUAL EZ TROUBLESHOOTING 10 January 1999 Series _______ Spindle not turning If there are any alarms see Alarms section Check that the spindle turns freely when machine is off gt If spindle drive does not light the RUN LED check forward reverse commands from IOPCB gt Check that the drawtube piston is not bound against the spindle shaft on air cylinder style Check the wiring of analog speed command from MOTIF PCB to spindle drive cable 720 If spindle is still not turning replace MOTIF PCB Disconnect the drive belt If the spindle will not turn it is seized and must be replaced Note Before using the replacement spindle the cause of the previous failure must be determined Most noises attributed to the spindle actually lie in the motor or drive belt of the machine Isolate the sources of noise as follows o Excessive noise coming from the spindle head area Remove the left end covers and check the machine s drive
223. motor is actually getting hot to the touch there is excessive load on the motor Check the user s application for excessive load or high duty cycle Check the lead screw for binding Servo Error Too Large alarms occur on one or more axes sporadically Check motor wiring for shorts Driver card may need replacement Servo motor may need replacement Check for binding in motion of lead screw 1 5 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM Low hydraulic pressure alarm 134 96 8710 Check for any leaks Check that the oil level is above the black line Check that the oil pressure is within 50 500 psi If the hydraulic unit needs to be replaced see Hydraulic Unit Removal Installation section Check that the temperature is less than 150 degrees If the hydraulic unit needs to be replaced see Hydraulic Unit Removal Installation section Phasing changes cause the hydraulic unit to change directions resulting in alarm 134 HYDRAULIC CHUCK Chuck won t clamp unclamp Check for alarm condition Check display for Low Hydraulic Pressure alarm 134 Check that the oil pressure gauge is within 50 500 psi Use a voltage meter to check the solenoid circuit breaker gt Replace solenoid valve if faulty 15 16 SERVICE MANUAL EZ TROUBLESHOOTING Series Noise iN Hyprau ic Power UNIT Q Hydraulic power unit noise Note Noise in hydraulic unit should decrease a few minutes after start up Check for leaks in hose Ch
224. n either direction for X and Z After a ZERO RETURN has been performed the travel limits will operate unless an axis hits the limit switch When the limit switch is hit the zero returned condition is reset and an AUTO ALL AXES must be done again This is to ensure that if you hit the limit switch you can still move the servo back away from it The limit switches are normally closed When a search for zero operation is being performed the X and Z axes will move towards the limit switch unless it is already active open then they will move away from the switch until it closes again then they will continue to move until the encoder Z channel is found This position is machine zero HAAS 96 8710 SERVICE MANUAL January 1999 Ge rie TECHNICAL REFERENCE TURRET HOME SWITCH The tool rotation turret has a switch that is activated when tool 1 is in the cutting position At POWER ON this switch indicates that tool 1 is in the cutting position If this switch is not active at power on the first tool change will rotate the turret until the switch engages and then move to the selected tool The diagnostic display will show this status of this input switch as TOOL 1 A 1 indicates that tool 1 is in position What Can Go Wrong With Limit Switches If the machine is operated without connector P5 a LOW LUBE and DOOR OPEN alarm will be generated In addition the Home search will not stop at the limit switch and will instead run int
225. n the M code relay board The relays are marked on both the IOPCB and the M code relay board with their respective terminals forward of them If the optional M code relay board is installed then the connections on the IOPCB are to be left unused as they are replaced by the relays on the optional board Referto the figures below and the Probe Option figure in the Electrical Diagrams section for the terminal labeling Maximum voltage for the relays is 125 VAC with a maximum amperage of 3 amps WARNING Power circuits and inductive loads must have snubber protection ZOZZOZOZOZ 21 M22 M23 M24 IOPCB Relays M Code Relay Board CAUTION If a screw terminal is already in use DO NOT connect anything else to it Call you dealer 5 13 LUBRICATION PUMP The lubrication system is a resistance type system which forces oil through metering units at each of the 16 lubricating points within the machine The system uses one metering unit at each of the lubricating points one for each linear guide pad one for each lead screw and one for spindle lubrication A single oil pump is used to lubricate the system The pump is powered only when the spindle and or an axis moves Once powered the pump cycles approximately 3 0 cc of oil every 30 minutes throughout the oil lines to the lube points Every lube point receives approximately 1 16 of oil The control monitors this system through an internal level switch in the reservoir
226. nds for about 0 1 seconds when any keypad key CYCLE START or FEED HOLD is pressed The beeper also sounds for longer periods when an auto shutdown is about to occur and when the BEEP AT M30 setting is selected If the beeper is not audible when buttons are pressed the problem could be the keypad keyboard interface PCB orinthe speaker Check that the problem occurs with more than one button and check that the speaker volume is not turned down CONTROL CABINET The following illustration shows the connectors on the side of the control cabinet Serial Port 1 Serial Port 2 X axis Spare Zaxis Turret Spare fail Stock Limit Switches Coolant lt Chip Conveyor lt M Function Spare Coolant lt Spare Figure 5 1 Side of control cabinet 5 6 MICROPROCESSOR ASSEMBLY 108 The microprocessor assembly is in the rear cabinet at the top left position It contains three large boards They are microprocessor the keyboard and the MOCON All three boards of the processor assembly receive power from the low voltage power supply The three PCB s are interconnected by a local buss on dual 50 pin connectors At power on of the control some diagnostic tests are performed on the processor assembly and any problems found will generate alarms 157 or 158 In addition while the control is operating it
227. ng data User was loading settings or parameters and something was wrong with the data Bad parameter or setting data User was loading settings or parameters and something was wrong with the data 6 33 e ALARMS 34 411 412 413 414 415 416 417 418 419 420 429 430 431 432 433 434 435 436 437 RS 232 Empty Program RS 232 Unexpected End of Input RS 232 Load Insufficient Memory RS 232 Buffer Overflow RS 232 Overrun RS 232 Parity Error RS 232 Framing Error RS 232 Break Invalid Function For DNC Program Number Mismatch Flpy Dir Insufficient Memory Floppy Unexpected End of Input Floppy No Prog Name Floppy Illegal Prog Name Floppy Empty Prog Name Floppy Load Insufficient Memory Floppy Abort Floppy File Not Found TS Under Shoot Series Check your program Between and there was no program found January 1999 Check Your Program An ASCII EOF code was found in the input data before the complete program was received This is a decimal code 26 Program received doesn t fit Check the space available in the LIST PROG mode and possibly delete some programs Data sent too fast to CNC This alarm is not normally possible as this control can keep up with even 38400 bits per second Data sent too fast to CNC This alarm is not normally possible as this control can keep u
228. ns the shaft collar on the outer shaft remove shaft collar and inner retaining ring 5 Remove rubber seal from outer shaft 6 Detach 5 32 airlines attached to the barrel end and rod end ports of the air cylinder 7 Remove 7 16 hex nut that attaches the air cylinder to the parts catcher shaft 8 Loosen and remove 1 4 SHCS and washer that attaches air cylinder to cylinder mount and remove air cylinder 9 Remove 3 8 SHCS holding the parts catcher pivot mount assembly to the spindle head casting and slide out mount assembly Figure 3 25 Front view of parts catcher tray 96 8710 75 SERVICE MANUAL MECHANICAL SERVICE 76 January 1999 Series PINSTALLATION 00000 1 Slide parts catcher pivot mount assembly through the sheet metal seal and attach to spindle head casting using 3 8 SHCS 2 Install air cylinder to cylinder mount using 1 4 SHCS and washer 3 Attach air cylinder rod in its fully retracted position to parts catcher shaft with the hex nut 4 Connect air lines to air cylinder ports 5 Install rubber seal on outer shaft 6 Place inner retaining ring on outer shaft slide shaft collar on and attach outer retaining ring 7 Connect main air line Note Machine must be powered up and controlled in MDI mode to check for proper activation and deactivation of parts catcher It must be stopped with the rod fully extended to properly position chute
229. nto play Generally speaking the least rigid element of a cut is the tool because it is the smallest part In order to eliminate the machine as the source of the problem you need to check the spindle and the backlash of the axes as described in the following sections Once machining practices have been eliminated as the source of vibration observe the machine in both operation and cutting air Move the axes individually without the spindle turning and then turn the spindle without moving the axes Isolate whether the vibration comes from the spindle head or from an axis 96 8710 rv AIMS J _ Q 5 SERVICE MANUAL EZ TROUBLESHOOTING January 1999 Series AccuRACY Before you complain of an accuracy problem please make sure you follow these simple 0075 and don ts Ensure that the machine has been sufficiently warmed up before cutting parts This will eliminate mispositioning errors caused by thermal growth of the leadscrews see Thermal Growth section Don t use a wiggler test indicator for linear dimensions They measure in an arc and have sine cosine errors over larger distances Don t use magnetic bases as accurate test stops The high accel decel of the axis can cause them to move Don t attach test points to the sheet metal of the spindle head Don t check for accuracy repeatability using an indicator with a long extension Ensure that test indicators
230. nts done could change spindle centerline Verify and enter new spindle centerline position in Parameter 254 ALIGNMENT VERIFICATION SPINDLE This procedure should be performed after spindle alignment has been checked TOOLS REQUIRED V SPINDLE ALIGNMENT TOOL OR DIAL INDICATOR AND MAGNETIC V DIAL INDICATOR 0 0005 OR LESS RESOLUTION Remove all tool holders and fittings from the turret Clean the turret pockets and tool holders Mount the spindle alignment tool onto the spindle retainer ring with the dial indicator mounted to the end of the tool Refer to Figure 3 3 Jog the X axis to the spindle center line This is the value stored in Parameter 254 found on the Position Raw Data page this page is entered through Debug mode Position the indicator tip just inside pocket 1 so that is parallel to the X axis Zero the indicator then rotate the spindle180 the indicator should read ZERO Note Use the jog handle in tenths mode to zero the pocket Next rotate the spindle and take readings at both the top and bottom of the pocket If the reading exceeds 0010 from the centerline or 0020 TIR the inner coupling may need adjustment Perform turret motor coupling adjustment Note If the reading is within specifications but the X axis position is different from parameter 254 enter the new number in parameter 254 96 8710 SERVICE MANUAL January 1999 nn
231. nts was found to be incorrect This is usually caused by a noisy environment and not a bad encoder Check all shields and grounds on the encoder cables and the motor leads that come into the amplifiers An alarm for one axis can be caused by a bad grounding on the motor leads of another axis Axis Cable Fault e During a self test the encoder cable signals were found to be invalid This alarm is usually caused by a bad cable or a bad connection on the motor encoder connectors Check the cable for any breaks and the encoder connectors at the motor controller board Machine noise can also cause this alarm although it is less common lt Alarm 101 MOCON Comm Failure e During a self test of communications between the MOCON and main processor the main processor does not respond and is suspected to be dead This alarm is generated and the servos are stopped Check all ribbon cable connections and all grounding Machine noise can also cause this alarm although it is less common Alarm 157 MOCON Watchdog Fault e The self test of the MOCON has failed Replace the MOCON DISCONNECT CABLES FROM A NORMAL OPERATING SYSTEM lt Remove low voltage cable from Video amp Keyboard e Processors LED s are normal e Runs fine and the CRT is Normal e No keypad beep lt Remove low voltage cable from MOTIF e Processors LED s are normal then RUN goes out e No screen 888710 A Af
232. o prior to tool change C 2ND HOME BTN Used to move axis to coordinate specified in Work Ofset G129 C NEG COMP DIR Used to negate the direction of thermal compensation C DELAY AXIS 0 Reserved X THERM COMP T CONST COMMON SWITCH 3 Parameter 278 is a collection of general purpose single bit flags used to turn some functions on and off The left and right cursor arrows are used to select the function being changed All values are 0 or 1 only The function names are Default is 0 When this bit is set to 1 the sense of the discrete inputs for SP HIG and SP LOW high and low gear are inverted Not used Causes the main serial inputs outputs to go through the floppy video board When set to 1 displays the actual spindle speed on the Current Commands display page This bit enables the hydraulic tailstock This bit must be set to 0 if machine is equipped with a Haas vector spindle drive When set to 1 the user can press CYCLE START and run a program with the chuck unclamped Ifthe spindle is commanded with this bit setto 1 the spindle will not exceed the CHUCK UNCLAMP RPM Parameter 248 The default for this bit is 0 This feature is ineffective when the CE safety circuit is enabled When set to 0 spindle start occurs at the end of a block as in normal M code operation When set to 1 spindle start occurs at the beginning of a block and concurrent with axis motion This bit must be set to 1 in order to enable the Tool Pre Setter H
233. o return axis to zero prior to tool change Y 2ND HOME BTN Used to move axis to coordinate specified in Work Ofset G129 Y NEG COMP DIR Used to negate the direction of thermal compensation Y DELAY AXIS 0 Reserved Z SWITCHES Parameter 268 is a collection of single bit flags used to turn servo related functions on and off The left and right cursor arrows are used to select the function being changed All values are 0 or 1 only The function names are Z LIN SCALE EN Used to enable linear scales for the Z axis Z INVRT LN SCL Used to invert the Z axis linear scale 2 DSBL LS ZTST Used to disable the linear scale Z test Z ZERO AXIS TC Used to return axis to zero prior to tool change 2 2ND HOME BTN Used to move axis to coordinate specified in Work Ofset G129 Z NEG COMP DIR Used to negate the direction of thermal compensation Z DELAY AXIS 0 Reserved A SWITCHES Parameter 269 is a collection of single bit flags used to turn servo related functions on and off The left and right cursor arrows are used to select the function being changed All values are 0 or 1 only The function names are ALIN SCALE EN Used to enable linear scales for the A axis A INVRT LN SCL Used to invert the A axis linear scale DSBL LS ZTST Used to disable the linear scale Z test A ZERO AXIS TC Used to return axis to zero prior to tool change A 2ND HOME BTN Used to move axis to coordinate specified in Work Ofset G129 A NEG COMP DIR Used to negate the direction
234. o the physical stops on each axis If the switch is damaged and permanently open the zero search for that axis will move in the negative direction at about 0 5 in min until it reaches the physical travel stops at the opposite end of travel If the switch is damaged and permanently closed the zero search for that axis will move at about 10 in min in the positive direction until it reaches the physical stops If the switch opens or a wire breaks after the zero search completes an alarm is generated the servos are turned off and all motion stops The control will operate as though the zero search was never performed The RESET can be used to turn servos on but you can jog that axis only slowly 5 15 DIAGNOSTIC DATA The ALARM MSGS display is the most important source of diagnostic data At any time after the machine completes its power up sequence it will either perform a requested function or stop with an alarm Refer to the alarms list for their possible causes and some corrective action If there is an electronics problem the controller may not complete the power up sequence and the CRT will remain blank In this case there two sources of diagnostic data these are the audible beeper and the LED s on the processor If the audible beeper is alternating a second beep there is a problem with the main control program stored in 5 on the processor PCB If any of the processor electronics cannot be accessed correctly
235. oes high alarm 450 BAR FEEDER FAULT will be generated and the servos and spindle will be turned off Note that the spindle will simply coast to a stop CK BF SP ILK This bit has been added for the improved Bar Feeder interface When this bit is set to 1 the control will constantly check the Bar Feeder Spindle Interlock on discrete input 1030 If this input goes high and the spindle is being com manded to turn or coasting or being manually turned at 10rpm or more alarm 451 BAR FEEDER SPINDLE INTERLOCK will be generated and the servos and spindle will be turned off Note that the spindle will simply coast to a stop SAFETY INVERT This bit supports the CE door interlock that locks when power is turned off For machines that have the regular door lock that locks when power is applied this bit must be set to 0 For machines that have the inverted door lock this bit must be set to 1 LIVE TOOLING Lathes fitted with the Live Tooling drive this bit must be set to 1 For all other lathes this bit is set to 0 INV SPD DCEL Inverse spindle speed deceleration When this parameter is set to 1 the spindle decelerates faster at lower speeds resulting in a shorter deceleration time Parameter 291 HYDRAULIC TAIL STK NO MOTION DETEC TIME The number in milliseconds that must pass with no B axis encoder change before the control decides that the tailstock has stopped The parameter affects homing and alarm situations on the tailstock Ifthe tailstock press
236. olerance is greater than 0001 then loosen the test bar mounting bolts rotate the spindle and tap on the mounted end of the fixture until the runout within tolerance Tighten the bolts to the test bar being careful not to alter the alignment Move the indicator tip to the end of the test bar and check for runout Tolerance should not exceed 0 0005 If the reading is greater than 0 0005 remove the test bar clean both mating surfaces Next rotate the test bar until the reading is 1 2 of the total runout Using the Z axis jog the indicator tip over 10 inches of the test bar to determine if the spindle is high or low Tolerance should not exceed 0 0004 10 If the measurement is greater than the allowable tolerance then the spindlehead casting must be realigned Before realigning the spindlehead perform a coupling adjustment If the measurement is within the allowable tolerance go to step 7 HAAS 53 SERVICE MANUAL MECHANICAL SERVICE o 54 January 1999 Series 7 Position the indicator tip on the backside of the test bar Jog the indicator tip over 10 inches of the test bar to determine spindle parallelism The maximum allowable tolerance is 0 0004 10 If this tolerance is out call HAAS Automation Service Department If the spindle is in alignment proceed to Turret Alignment Verification section SPINDLE REMOVAL Note POWER OFF THE MACHINE BEFORE PERFORMING THE FOLLOWING PROCE DURE
237. on Make sure there is enough tension on the straps so that when you loosen the mounting bolts the motor assembly doesn t shift Note If you are using a floor jack slide the jack under the transmission assembly from the front side of the machine Being careful not to damage any components place the wood block supports under the transmission and motor 5 Remove the four transmission mounting plate bolts Raise the transmission enough to remove the drive belts then slide the entire assembly out Mounting Bolts 4 T 3 i Fluid sight glass 9 4 La I 2 9 si 8 Mounting plate Figure 3 18 Lathe transmission mounting plate 96 8710 HAAS 66 January 1999 SERVICE MANUAL MECHANICAL SERVICE Series TRANSMISSION INSTALLATION 1 Place lifting straps under new transmission assembly and lift just enough to put tension on the cables Note If you are using a floor jack slide the jack under the front side of the machine Being careful not to damage any components place the wood block supports on the jack and slide the transmission and motor onto the jack 2 Ensure the new transmission is seated securely on the straps and lift up slowly Lift only high enough to install the drive belts then gently swing the assembly into place 3 Insert the four bolts that secure the transmi
238. one could change spindle centerline Verify and enter new spindle centerline position in Parameter 254 1 Jog the X axis to the spindle center in the usual way 2 Press ALARMS enter DEBUG press WRITE 3 Press POSIT and PAGE UP until you see the debug screen POS RAW DAT 1 4 Observe the x axis COMMAND position This will be encoder steps Ignore the negative sign and the decimal point 5 Copy this number to parameter 254 as a positive number with no decimal point 6 ALARMS enter DEBUG press WRITE Or simply turn the power off and back on This deactivates debug mode Turret In Our ADJUSTMENT Note Alarms 113 and 114 Turret Unlock Fault and Turret Lock Fault can indicate that a turret in out adjustment is necessary These alarms occur when the Turret Clamp and Unclamp switches sense a turret positioning error 1 Before hooking the cylinder end to the lever cam manually insure that the Turret is in its furthest clamped position 2 Screw the cylinder rod end in so that the lever cam mounting hole aligns with the rod end attachment 3 Start the mounting bolt with the spacer through the cylinder rod end and into lever cam then tighten 4 If the turret travel is not 150 ensure there is no mechanical problem or obstruction affecting the travel If no problem is found the air cylinder rod travel needs to be adjusted To make this adjustment loosen the two jam nuts and screw the extension sleeve away from the air cy
239. onsideration they are extremely durable and reliable Verify that customer complaints are not due to tooling programming or fixturing problems lt Servo motor noise e Noise is caused by bearings Rolling grinding sound is heard coming from the motor e f motor noise is caused by motor bearings replace motor Lead screw noise Ensure oil is getting to the lead screw through the lubrication system Check for damage to the bearing sleeve Disconnect the servo motor from the lead screw and rotate the lead screw by hand If the noise persists the lead screw may need replacing Run the axis back and forth The motor will get very hot if the bearing sleeve is damaged If so turn the axis by hand and feel for roughness in the lead screw Loosen the clamp nuts at both ends of the lead screw If the symptom disappears replace the bearing sleeve Be certain to check for damage to the lead screw shaft where the bearing sleeve is mounted gt If the noise persists the lead screw is damaged and must be replaced When replacing the lead screw in an older machine always replace the bearing sleeve with the current angular contact design bearing sleeve e Check the lead screw for misalignment 12 Fo 96 8710 January 1999 SERVICE MANUAL TROUBLESHOOTING EZ Series Misalignment in the lead screw itself will tend to cause the lead screw to tighten up and make excessive noise at both
240. ool change operation or a tapping operation and will not turn off the coolant pump Also if the doors are open the spindle speed will be limited to 500 RPM The Door Hold function can be temporarily disabled with by turning Setting 51 on if Parameter 57 bits DOOR STOP SP and SAFETY CIRC are set to zero but this setting will return to OFF when the control is turned off TURRET CLAMP UNCLAMP SWITCHES There are two switches used to sense the position of the turret They are both normally closed and one will activate at the end of travel during unclamping and the other during clamping When both switches are closed it indicates that the turret is between positions The diagnostic display can be used to display the status of the relay outputs and the switch inputs DOOR HOLD SWITCH The switch is normally closed When the door opens the switch will open and the machine will stop with a Door Hold function When the door is closed again operation will continue normally If the door is open you will not be able to start a program Door hold will not stop a tool change operation will not turn off the spindle and will not turn off the coolant pump The door hold function can be temporarily disabled with Setting 51 but this setting will return to OFF when the control is turned off X AND Z LIMIT SWITCHES Prior to performing a POWER UP RESTART or an AUTO ALL AXES operation there are no travel limits Thus you can jog into the hard stops i
241. or bank is used by the vector drive to dissipate excess power caused by the regenerative effects of decelerating the spindle motor If the spindle motor is accelerated and decelerated again in rapid succession repeatedly this resistor will get hot In addition if the line voltage into the control is above 255V this resistor will begin to heat This resistor is overtemp protected at 100 C Atthat temperature an alarm is generated and the control will begin an automatic shutdown Ifthe resistor is removed from the circuit an alarm may subsequently occur because of an overvoltage condition inside the spindle drive There is an overtemperature sense switch mounted near the above mentioned regen resistors This sensor is a normally closed switch that opens at about 100 C It will generate an alarm and all motion will stop After four minutes of an overheat condition an automatic shutdown will occur in the control 96 8710 ALMA Ga 111 SERVICE MANUAL TECHNICAL REFERENCE lt rie ag January 1999 112 5 9 POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY All power to the control passes through the power supply assembly Itis located on the upper right corner of the control cabinet Main Circuit BREAKER 1 Circuit breaker CB1 is rated at 40 amps 20 amps for High Voltage option 80 amps for SL 30 and 40 and is used to protect the vector drive and to shut off all power to the control The locking On Off han
242. or jogging turning of the crank has no effect When the axis being moved reaches its travel limits the handle inputs will be ignored in the direction that would exceed the travel limits Parameter 57 can be used to reverse the direction of operation of the handle Power SWITCHES The POWER ON switch engages the main contactor The on switch applies power to the contactor coil and the contactor thereafter maintains power to its coil The POWER OFF switch interrupts power to the contactor coil and will always turn power off POWER ON is a normally open switch and POWER OFF is normally closed The maximum voltage on the POWER ON and POWER OFF switches is 24V AC and this voltage is present any time the main circuit breaker is on The Load meter measures the load on the spindle motor as a percentage of the rated continuous power of the motor There is a slight delay between a load and the actual reflection of the meter The eighth A to D input also provides a measure of the spindle load for cutter wear detection The second page of diagnostic data will display of spindle load The meter should agree with this display within 5 The spindle drive display 7 should also agree with the load meter within 5 There are different types of spindle drive that are used in the control They are all equivalent in performance but are adjusted differently EMERGENCY STOP SWITCH The EMERGENCY STOP switch is normally closed If the switch opens o
243. ose 10 Position the indicator at the end far left of the tailstock taper alignment bar 11 Insert a pry bar into the rear of insert and adjust the runout at the end of the shaft until the reading is 001 or less from centerline Then tighten the remaining screws 12 Inject the Devcon and let stand overnight HiypRAuLic TAiLsTOCK CYLINDER WARNING Before performing any service on the hydraulic cylinder or pump the machine should be powered off REMOVAL 1 Remove front and rear waycovers Figure 3 17 Hydraulic cylinder replacement 2 Move to mid travel before disconnecting 968110 January 1999 SERVICE MANUAL MECHANICAL SERVICE Series 3 Disconnect the hydraulic lines from both ends of the cylinder 8 10 CAUTION Although the hydraulic system is not under pressure oil will spill out of the hydraulic lines once disconnected from the cylinder Have a bucket ready to catch any oil that spills out Remove the 2 SHCS that mount the cylinder rod end block to the rear of the hydraulic tailstock adapter Remove the 1 4 20 SHCS that mounts the encoder rail to the bottom of the cylinder rod end block Extend the cylinder shaft so that you can place a wrench on the end of the cylinder rod in order to unscrew it from the end block Remove the 2 SHCS that mount the hydraulic cylinder body to the base casting Unscrew the end block from the cylinder Collapse the hyd
244. ow to troubleshoot the keypad NOTE Keypad Diodes 1 24 correspond to chart numbers 1 24 Example 1 Pressing the RESET button will cause diodes 1 and 17 to conduct e With the POWER OFF read across diode 1 e A typical reading is between 400 700 ohms note your reading 2 Press and hold the RESET button Ifthe diode is conducting the reading should drop about 03 ohms e If your reading was 486 and it dropped to 460 for a difference of 026 the diode is good e The same will hold true for diode 17 in this example If the reading stays the same or there is no change the diode is not conducting Pull P2 and read between pins 1 and 17 e Press and hold RESET The meter should read a short 0 ohms if not the keypad is bad 96 8710 A 19 January 1999 SERVICE IVIANUAL TROUBLESHOOTING Series 20 PY P ASA 5 F 96 8710 January 1999 96 8710 Series Any time alarm is present the lower right hand corner of the screen will have a blinking ALARM Push the ALARM display key to view the current alarm All alarms are displayed with a reference number and a complete description If the RESET key is pressed one alarm will be removed from the list of alarms If there more than 18 alarms only the last 18 are displayed and the RESET must be used to see the rest The presence of any alarm will prevent the operator from starting a program
245. ox must be removed on the SL 20 lathes in order to replace the air filter 147 January 1999 SERVICE MANUAL MAINTENANCE Series LUBRICATION CHART CAPACITY FLUID TYPE COOLANT 30 gallons 40 for SL 30 Water soluble synthetic or cutting oil WAY LUBE 2 2 5 Qts depending on pump style Vactra 2 TRANSMISSION 54 Ounces MOBIL DTE 25 LUBRICATION REQUIREMENTS Each jaw requires two strokes of grease Every 1000 clamp unclamp cycles or at least once a week Use provided grease gun for chuck lubrication Lubrication type Molybdenum Disulfide Grease 20 to 25 moly content CHUCK MAINTENANCE Ensure all moving parts are thoroughly greased Check for excessive wear on jaws Check T nuts for excessive wear Check front retaining bolts for damage Chucks should be broken in according to the manufacturers specifications Caution Lack of grease significantly reduces clamping force and can result in chatter improper clamping or thrown parts Disassemble and inspect chuck once a year Refer to chuck manual for disassembly procedures Check for excessive wear Check for galling or burnishing Clean guide ways of contamination chips and coolant Lubricate chuck before reassembly 148 wll 968710 January 1999 Se rie M CABLE LOCATIONS 8 PCB S CABLE LOCATIONS AND BOARD DIAGRAMS 96 8720 nn wll 149 Januar
246. p with as much as 38400 bits per second Data received by CNC has bad parity Check parity settings number of data bits and speed Also check your wiring Data received was garbled and proper framing bits were not found One or more characters of the data will be lost Check parity settings number of data bits and speed Break condition while receiving The sending device set the line to a break condition This might also be caused by a simple break in the cable A code found on input of a DNC program could not be interpreted The O code in the program being loaded did not match the 0 code entered at the keyboard Warning only Floppy memory was almost full when an attempt was made to read the floppy directory Check your program An ASCII EOF code was found in the input data before the complete program was received This is a decimal code 26 Need name in programs when receiving ALL otherwise has no way to store them Check files being loaded Program must be Onnnn and must be at the beginning of a block Check your program Between and there was no program found Program received doesn t fit Check the space available in the LIST PROG mode and possibly delete some programs Could not read disk Could not find floppy file The tailstock did not reach it s intended destination point 96 8710 AHAS January 1999 96 8710 438 439 450 451 501 503 504 505 506 507 508 509 51
247. pace available in the LIST PROG mode and possibly delete some programs 5 96 8710 January 1999 96 8710 211 212 213 214 215 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 Odd Prog Block Program Integrity Error Program RAM CRC Error No of Programs Changed Free Memory PTR Changed Probe Arm Down While Running X Axis Phasing Error Y Axis Phasing Error Z Axis Phasing Error A Axis Phasing Error B Axis Phasing Error C Axis Phasing Error Door Lock Failure X Transition Fault Y Transition Fault Z Transition Fault A Transition Fault B Transition Fault C Transition Fault Jog Handle Transition Fault Spindle Transition Fault Jog Handle Cable Fault Spindle Enc Cable Fault Spindle Z Fault Spindle Motor Overload Spindle Following Error e ALARMS Series Possible corrupted program Save all programs to floppy disk delete all then reload Possible corrupted program Save all programs to floppy disk delete all then reload Check for a low battery and low battery alarm Electronics fault Call your dealer Indicates that the number of programs disagrees with the internal variable that keeps count of the loaded programs Call your dealer Indicates the amount of memory used by the programs counted in the system disagrees with the variable that points to free memory
248. propriate safety procedures measure the voltage between all three pair phases at the main circuit breaker and write down the readings The voltage must be between 195 and 260 volts or 353 and 480 volts depending on which transformer is in the machine Note Wide voltage fluctuations are common in many industrial areas you need to know the minimum and maximum voltage which will be supplied to the machine while it is in operation U S National Electrical Code specifies that machines should operate with a variation of 5 to 5 around an average supply voltage If problems with the line voltage occur or low line voltage is suspected an external transformer may be required If you suspect voltage problems the voltage should be checked every hour or two during a typical day to make sure that it does not fluctuate more than 5 or 596 from an average MIN INPUT 2282037 447 429 V Han 226 260 244 TE Figure 4 5 Transformer connections CAUTION Make sure that the main breaker is set to OFF and the power is off at your supply panel BEFORE you change the transformer connections Make sure that all three black wires are moved to the correct terminal block and that they are tight 3 Check the connections on the transformer at the bottom right corner of the rear cabinet The three black wires labeled 74 75 and 76 must be moved to the terminal bloc
249. r Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 r D D GAIN FOR X Second derivative gain in servo loop D D GAIN FOR Y Second derivative gain in servo loop D D GAIN FOR Z Second derivative gain in servo loop D D GAIN FORA Second derivative gain in servo loop X ACC DEC T CONST Exponential acceleration time constant Units are 1 10000 seconds This parameter provides for a constant ratio between profiling lag and servo velocity It is also the ratio between velocity and acceleration Y ACC DEC T CONST Same definition as Parameter 113 Z ACC DEC T CONST Same definition as Parameter 113 A ACC DEC T CONST Same definition as Parameter 113 LUB CYCLE TIME If this is set nonzero it is the cycle time for the lube pump and the lube pressure switch option is checked for cycling in this time It is in units of 1 50 seconds SPINDLE REV TIME Time in milliseconds to reverse spindle motor SPINDLE DECEL DELAY Time in milliseconds to decelerate spindle motor SPINDLE ACC DECEL Accel decel time constant in 200ths of a step ms ms for spindle motor X PHASE OFFSET The motor phase offset for X motor This is arbitrary units Y PHASE OFFSET See Parameter 121
250. r is broken power to the servos will be removed instantly This will also shut off the turret spindle drive and coolant pump The EMERGENCY STOP switch will shut down motion even if the switch opens for as little 0 005 seconds Be careful of the fact that Parameter 57 contains a status switch that if set will cause the control to be powered down when EMERGENCY STOP is pressed You should not normally stop a tool change with EMERGENCY STOP as this will leave the tool changer in an abnormal position that takes special action to correct Note that tool changer alarms can be easily corrected by first correcting any mechanical problem pressing RESET until the alarms are clear selecting ZERO RETURN mode and selecting AUTO ALL AXES If the turret should become jammed the control will automatically come to an alarm state To correct this push the EMERGENCY STOP button and remove the cause of the jam Push the RESET key to clear any alarms Push the ZERO RETURN and the AUTO ALL AXES keys to reset the Z axis and turret Never put your hands near the turret when powered unless the EMERGENCY STOP button is pressed 96 8710 ALLA 107 SERVICE IVIANUAL TECHNICAL REFERENCE lt rie ap C January 1999 KEYBOARD BEEPER There is a speaker inside the control panel that is used as an audible response to pressing keyboard buttons and as a warning beeper The beeper is one kHz signal that sou
251. rameter is called C axis AIR BRAKE DELAY and is not used Reserved Reserved SPIN FAN OFF DELAY Delay for turning the spindle fan off after the spindle has been turned off COMMON SWITCH 2 This is a collection of general purpose single bit flags used to turn some functions on and off The left and right cursor arrows are used to select the function being changed All values are 0 or 1 only The function names are Designates control as a lathe Tool changer can be stopped with RESET button Not presently used Enables chip conveyor if machine is so equipped When 1 the control will support the new style keyboards with the 5096 rapid traverse key For controls without a 50 rapid keypad set this bit to 0 When enabled the control will look for an additional door switch and will generate an operator message Not presently used Reserved for future use For lathe only When enabled spindle encoder input is to the Y axis Reverses the direction of the chip conveyor Usually the chip conveyor motor and direction relays are attached to the user relays M21 M22 When this bit is set the control expects to see the conveyor hooked up to M27 and M28 When 1 user relay M25 is used to flash a beacon If the control is in a reset state the beacon will be off If the control is running normally the beacon will be steadily on If the control is in a M00 M01 M02 M30 feedhold or single block state then the beacon will flash
252. raulic cylinder then push the tailstock to the rear of travel Pull the hydraulic cylinder out from the frontside of the tailstock INSTALLATION 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 96 8710 With the new cylinder in position push the tailstock to the front of travel Install the 2 SHCS the mount the cylinder body to the base casting Before tightening move the tailstock to the front end of travel Thread the end block onto the end of the cylinder rod and tighten Install the 2 SHCS that attach the end block Install the 1 4 20 SHCS that holds the encoder rail to the bottom of the mounting block Attach the hydraulic lines to both the front and rear of the cylinder Check for leaks Reinstall waycovers Check the fluid level at the hydraulic tank to determine how much fluid needs to be added HAAS 85 SERVICE MANUAL MECHANICAL SERVICE y 7 January 1999 3 4 TRANSMISSION Tools Required Y Hoist and lifting straps OR floor jack and 4 wood blocks 1 Power off the machine 2 Remove the left side panel to access the spindle motor and transmission assembly Note If you are using a floor jack the bottom left front panel needs to be removed 3 Disconnect all electrical lines from the motor and transmission assembly 4 Position the hoist directly to the rear of the motor and place the lifting straps around the motor and transmissi
253. re are high voltages present on the amplifiers even when power is shut off The high voltage comes from the vector drive which does have a CHARGE light The servo drive cards are replaced by Brushless Servo Amplifiers and are controlled differently A low voltage power supply card is added to the servo drive assembly to supply the low voltage requirement to the amplifiers The CNC software is version 2 xx The user interface and motion profiling have not changed however and the user should not see any functional differences between a brush type machine and a brushless machine SERVO CHARACTERISTICS BRUSHLESS Servo characteristics are explained in detail in the previous section The following is an example of how to achieve 130 inches minute The exponential accel decel time constant is set by Parameters 113 114 115 116 and 168 It has units of 0 0001 seconds The speed limit at which exponential accel decel is not available is defined by the relationship between Parameters 7 and 113 for the X axis Thus if Parameter 7 is 8000000 steps sec sec and Parameter 113 is 375 0 0375 seconds the maximum velocity for accurate interpolation should be 8000000 x 0 0375 300000 steps second For an 8192 line encoder and 6 mm screw this would be 60 x 300000 138718 130 inches minute The brushless servo amplifier is a PWM based current source The PWM outputs control the current to a three phase brushless motor The PWM frequency is e
254. reful during removal or installation of ball screw to protect the surfaces Z Axis LEAD SCREW INSTALLATION Ensure all mating surfaces on the bearing sleeve motor housing nut housing and the lead screw nut are free of dirt burrs grease or other contaminants CAUTION Mating surfaces must be clean or misalignment may occur seriously affecting the proper operation of the machine For 32mm Lead Screw 1 Reinsert the lead screw with the motor housing bumper on it from the right hand side of the bearing support into the motor housing Align the lead screw with the bearing support end and insert the lead screw Prevent contact with the screw threads to avoid any possible damage 2 Hold the lead screw level on the motor side Slide the bearing sleeve onto the lead screw and insert bearing sleeve into motor housing Attach bearing sleeve to the housing with six 4 20 x 1 SHCS Place a drop of blue Loctite on each of the SHCS before inserting Torque the bearing sleeve SHCS to 15 FT LBS CAUTION Do not use more than one drop of Loctite An excessive amount will cause a film to develop between the sleeve and housing which could result in backlash HAAS 79 January 1999 SERVICE MANUAL MECHANICAL SERVICE Series 3 The following sequence is important to ensure proper installation of the lead screw a the bearing support end install the lock nut an 1 8 away from the bearing Tighten the lock nut screw Inst
255. ress the HANDLE JOG button on the control panel The Distance to go display on the lower right hand corner should read X 0 Z 0 3 Set rate of travel to 001 on the control panel and jog the machine 010 in the positive X direction Jog back to zero 0 on the display The dial indicator should read zero 0 0001 888710 l 13 SERVICE MANUAL n v nT January 1999 EZ TROUBLESHOOTING VVSVOSI TATY Series 14 Repeat Step 3 in the negative direction TOTAL DEVIATION BETWEEN THE DIAL INDICATOR AND THE CONTROL PANEL DISPLAY SHOULD NOT EXCEED 0002 An alternate method for checking backlash is to place the dial indicator as shown in Fig 4 1 and manually push on the turret in both directions The dial indicator should return to zero after releasing the turret Note The servos must be on to check backlash by this method Z AXIS Place a dial indicator and base on the spindle retaining ring with the indicator tip positioned on the face of the turret as shown in Fig 1 2 Fig 1 2 Dial indicator in position to check Z axis Set dial indicator and the Distance to go display in the HANDLE JOG mode to zero as follows e Zero the dial indicator e Press the MDI button on the control panel e Press the HANDLE JOG button on the control panel The Distance to go display on the lower right hand corner should read X20 7 0 Set the r
256. rive is notinstalled this parameter is called C axis FRICTION FACTOR and is not used SWITCH HYSTERESIS This name is used when a Vector Drive is installed This defines the hysteresis band around parameter 197 For example if par 197 is 85Hz and par 198 is 5Hz switching will take place at 90Hz when the spindle is speeding up and at 80Hz when the spindle is slowing down If a Vector Drive is not installed this parameter is called C axis FEED FORWARD and is not used HAAS January 1999 96 8710 January 1999 96 8710 Parameter 199 Parameter 200 Parameter 206 Parameter 207 Parameter 208 Parameter 209 LATHE RST STOPST C UNUSED ENACONVEYOR 50 RPD KBD FRONT DOOR RESERVED RESERVED RESERVED UNUSED T SUBROUTINE SPIN Y ENCDR REV CONVEYOR M27 M28 CONVYR RESERVED GREEN BEACON SERVICE MANUAL PRE SWITCH DELAY This name is used when a Vector Drive is installed This is the amount of time allowed for the current in the motor to drop before the winding change contactors are switched Units are in microseconds If a Vector Drive is not installed this parameter is called C axis THERMAL COMP COEF and is not used POST SWITCH DELAY This name is used when a Vector Drive is installed This is the amount of time allowed for the contactors to stabilize after a switch is commanded before current is applied to the motor Units are in microseconds If a Vector Drive is not installed this pa
257. rm 119 OVER VOLTAGE will be tolerated before the automatic shut down process is started MAX OVERHEAT TIME Specifies the amount of time in 50ths of a second that an overheat condition alarm 122 REGEN OVERHEAT will be tolerated before the automatic shut down process is started AUTOFEED STEP UP This parameter works with the AUTOFEED feature It specifies the feed rate step up percentage per second and should initially be set to 10 AUTOFEED STEP DOWN This parameter works with the AUTOFEED feature It specifies the feed rate step down percentage per second and should initially be set to 20 AUTOFEED MIN LIMIT This parameter works with the AUTOFEED feature It specifies the minimum allowable feed rate override percentage that the AUTOFEED feature can use and should initially be set to 1 For more information see AUTOFEED under the new features section NOTES When tapping the feed and spindle overrides will be locked out so the AUTOFEED feature will be ineffective although the display will appear to respond to the override buttons The last commanded feed rate will be restored at the end of the program execution or when the operator presses RESET orturns offthe AUTOFEED feature The operator may use the feed rate override buttons while the AUTOFEED feature is active As long as tool load limit is not exceeded these buttons will have the expected effect and the overridden feed rate will be recognized as the new comm
258. rmer has five different input connections and will accept a range of voltages from 354V RMS to 488 V RMS The 230 V is used to power the spindle drive which also develops the 325 VDC power for the axis servo amplifiers The 115 V is used by the video monitor solenoids fans and pumps in addition to supplying power to the main LVPS used by the control electronics The transformer assembly is located in the lower right hand corner of the main cabinet Besides the high low voltage variations two different power levels are available depending on the spindle motor used The small and large transformers have power ratings of 14 KVA and 28 KVA respectively They are protected by the main circuit breaker to the levels shown in the preceding table HIGH VOLT LOW VOLT TERMINALS FROM CONTACTOR 1 TERMINALS FROM CONTACTOR K1 34 488 458V 457 429V 428 403 402 377V 260 244V 243 227V 226 211 210 195V Fig 5 2a Transformer with 354 488V range Fig 5 2b Transformer with 195 260V range Primary CONNECTION To T 1 Input power to T1 is supplied through CB1 the 40 amp or 80 amp three phase main circuit breaker Three phase 230 to T1
259. ro the control will exact stop after a rapid only if the next motion is not a rapid move This bit must be set to 1 if a lathe has the hydraulic chuck clamping option Enables detection of spindle stall If spindle stalls the spindle motor is stopped and an alarm is generated When 1 the machine will not wait for the spindle to come up to speed immediately after an M03 or M04 command Instead it will check and or wait for the spindle to come up to speed immediately before the next interpolated motion is initiated This bit does not affect rigid tapping D Y CURRENT RATIO This name is used when a Vector Drive is installed This defines the ratio between the two winding configurations This default winding is Y and the parameters are set for the Y winding This number is used to adjust the parameters for the delta winding when the windings are switched If a Vector Drive is not installed this parameter is called C axis TOOL CHANGE OFFSET and is not used CAROUSEL OFFSET Parameter used to align tool 1 of tool changing carousel precisely Units are encoder steps CNVYR RELAY DELAY Delay time in 1 50 seconds required on conveyor relays before another action can be commanded Default is 5 CNVYR IGNORE OC TIM Amount of time in 1 50 seconds before overcurrent is checked after conveyor motor is turned on Default is 50 HAAS January 1999 96 8710 d January 1999 PARAMETERS erles Parameter 218 C
260. rting the board cable side up through the left side panel Attach with the two hex screws previously removed Ensure the board for Serial Port 1 is the upper connector and the board for Serial Port 2 is the lower connector 7 Replace the Serial Keyboard Interface KBIF board using the four screws previously removed starting at the top right Attach the screw and standoff loosely then all other screws and standoffs until all are mounted Tighten down completely 8 Reconnect all cables to the Serial KBIF board at their proper locations 96 8740 ll V zS H6 r Q amp T 95 SERVICE MANUAL ELECTRICAL SERVICE 96 January 1999 Series 4 5 FRONT PANEL Please read this section in its entirety before attempting to replace any component of the control panel CRT AssEMBLY REPLACEMENT 1 2 Turn the power off and disconnect power to the machine Remove the screws holding the cover panel on the back of the control panel Take care to hold the cover panel in place until all screws have been removed At this time remove the end cap on the support arm and unplug the white cable at the connection inside then unplug the black cable at the connection in the control panel It may be necessary to cut straps off the black cable s connector to unplug Unscrew the four hex nuts on the bottom row of the CRT bracket and remove along with the washers Set aside in a safe place While holding up the CRT
261. rvoltage could occur if regen load is not coming on but this does not usually happen The problem could also be the axis motor itself with leads either shorted to each other or to ground which is very rare Axis Overload The fuse function built into the MOCON has been overloaded due to a lot of motor accel decels or hitting a hard stop with the axis This safety function protects the amplifier and motor so find the cause and correct it If the current program is the cause change the program If the axis hits a hard stop the travel limits may be set wrong HAAS 96 8710 SERVICE MANUAL TROUBLESHOOTING 77 77 1 1999 Phasing Error e The MOCON did not receive the proper phasing information from the motors DO NOT RESET the machine if this alarm occurs Power the machine down and back up If the problem persists it is probably a broken wire or faulty MOCON connectors lt Servo Error Too Large e This alarm occurs when the difference between the commanded axis position and the actual position becomes larger the the maximum that is set in the parameter This condition occurs when the amplifier is blown is not receiving the commands or the 320 volt power source is dead If the MOCON is not sending the correct commands to the amplifier it is probably due to a broken wire or a PHASING ERROR that was generated lt Axis Z Fault or Z Channel Missing e During a self test the number of encoder cou
262. s are equipped with a microprocessor based brushless motor controller board MOCON that replaces the motor interface in the brush type controls It runs in parallel with the main processor receiving servo commands and closing the servo loop around the servo motors In addition to controlling the servos and detecting servo faults the motor controller board MOCON is also in charge of processing discrete inputs driving the 1 0 board relays commanding the spindle and processing the jog handle input Another significant feature is that it controls 6 axes so there is no need for an additional board for a 5 axis machine P1 Data Buss P2 X amplifier control and fault sensing 610 P3 Y amplifier control and fault sensing 620 P4 Z amplifier control and fault sensing 630 P5 A amplifier control and fault sensing 640 P32 B amplifier control and fault sensing 640B P33 C amplifier control and fault sensing 640C P6 X encoder input 660 P7 Y encoder input 670 P8 Z encoder input 680 P9 A encoder input 690 P30 Bencoder input 690B P31 C encoder input 6900 P18 Jog encoder input 750 P20 Spindle encoder output 1000 P10 Inputs from 1 0 board 550 P11 1 0 relays K1 8 510 P12 1 0 relays K9 16 520 110 n VY 5 96 8710 SERVICE MANUAL January 1999 Ge rie TECHNICAL REFERENCE P13 1 0 relays K17 24 530 14 1 0 relays K25 32 540 P15 Low Voltage Power 860 P16
263. s from the turret clamp unclamp solenoid see Figure 4 1 3 Unplug the solenoid electrical lead in the wire channel located on the rear of the lube air panel 4 Remove the two SHCS holding the assembly to the bracket and remove the assembly 83 SERVICE MANUAL ELECTRICAL SERVICE January 1999 Series INSTALLATION 5 Replace the air solenoid assembly and attach to the bracket with the two SHCS Tighten securely 6 Reconnect the electrical connection to the solenoid at the switch bracket 7 Reconnect the three air lines ensuring that all connections are tight and do not leak 8 Restore the air supply to the machine REMOVAL 1 84 Turn the machine power off and remove the air supply from the machine e Spindle lube solenoid Figure 4 2 Rear view of lube air panel Disconnect the lube line from the spindle lube air solenoid assembly Disconnect the electrical leads from the main air line pressure switch Unscrew the solenoid assembly pressure gauge from the assembly Unscrew the entire solenoid assembly from the T fitting 96 8710 SERVICE MANUAL ELECTRICAL SERVICE January 1999 lt 727 Pressure gauge n OF HO m Lube line Main air line
264. se try several other possible headings If the problem is still not found contact Haas Automation for further details BEFORE YOU BEGIN e USE COMMON SENSE Many problems are easily overcome by correctly evaluating the situation All machine operations are composed of a program tools and tooling You must look at all three before blaming one as the fault area If a bored hole is chattering because of an overextended boring bar don t expect the machine to correct the fault Don t suspect machine accuracy if the vise bends the part Don t claim hole mis positioning if you don t first center drill the hole e FIND THE PROBLEM FIRST Many mechanics tear into things before they understand the problem hoping that it will appear as they go We know this from the fact that more than half of all warranty returned parts are in good working order If the spindle doesn t turn remember that the spindle is connected to the spindle motor which is driven by the spindle drive which is connected to the 1 0 BOARD which is driven by the MOCON which is driven by the processor The moral here is don t replace the spindle drive if the belt is broken Find the problem first don t just replace the easiest part to get to e DON T TINKER WITH THE MACHINE There are hundreds of parameters wires switches etc that you can change in this machine Don t start randomly changing parts and parameters Remember there is a good chance that if you change somethin
265. set used This can occur when solving circular geometries Correct the geometry or change the tool radius A canned cycle using P amp Q is already executing A canned cycle can not be executed by another PQ canned cycle Same as alarm 333 Same as alarm 316 End Of List Note Alarms 1000 1999 are user defined AHAS January 1999 96 8710 SERVICE MANUAL January 1999 y 7 MECHANICAL SERVICE 3 MECHANICAL SERVICE RECOMMENDED TORQUE VALUES FOR MACHINE FASTENERS The following chart should be used as a reference guide for torquing machine fasteners where specified DIAMETER TORQUE 15 ft Ib 30 ft Ib 50 ft Ib 70 ft Ib 50 ft Ib 100 ft Ib 80 ft Ib 275 ft Ib 500 ft Ib Turret CRASH RECOVERY PROCEDURE 1 Change Setting 7 Parameter Lock to OFF Move to Parameter 43 on the Parameters Display This is the tool turret motor parameters Change INVIS AXIS from 1 to 0 zero 2 Move to the Alarm Display and type DEBUG and then press the WRITE key Verify that the debug line is displayed Note Ensure there is adequate clearance between the turret and chuck before perform ing the next step Press PRGRM CNVRS then the MDI key Type M43 into MDI and press CYCLE START This will unlock the turret by pushing it in the Z direction gt Press the HANDLE JOG key
266. sient loss of input power to the machine The Z channel pulse from the spindle encoder is missing for hard tapping synchronization The tool load monitor option is selected and the maximum load for a tool was exceeded in a feed This alarm can only occur if the tool load monitor function is installed in your machine A ground fault condition was detected in the 115V AC supply This can be caused by a short to ground in any of the servo motors the tool change motors the fans or the oil pump An overheat condition persisted for 4 5 minutes and caused an automatic shutdown An overvoltage condition persisted for 4 5 minutes and caused an automatic shutdown Software error or parameters are incorrect Call your dealer Cable from X axis encoder does not have valid differential signals AHAS ALARMS e C Sy e ALARMS 1 26 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191 192 193 194 195 197 198 199 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 Y Cable Fault Z Cable Fault A Cable Fault Spindle Not Turning B Servo Error Too Large B Servo Overload B Motor Overheat B Motor Z Fault B Limit Switch B Axis Z Ch Missing B Axis Drive Fault B Zero Ret Margin Too Small B Cable Fault 100 Hours Unpaid Bill Spindle Stalled Negative RPM Parameter CRC Error Setting CRC Error Lead Screw CRC Error Offset CRC Error Programs CRC Error
267. ssing the Power On switch on the front panel Check the high voltage bus voltage on the Vector Drive pin 2 with respect to pin 3 on the terminal bus at the bottom of the drive It must be between 310 and 360 volts If the voltage is outside these limits turn off the power and recheck steps 2 and 3 If the voltage is still outside these limits call the factory Check the DC voltage displayed in the second page of the Diagnostic data on the CRT It is labeled DC BUS Verify that the displayed voltage matches the voltage measured at pins 2 and 3 of the Vector Drive 7 VDC T Turn off the power rotate the shaft that engages the handle on the panel door counterclockwise until it snaps into the off position Also set the main switch handle on the panel door to off Both the handle and the switch must be set to off before the door can be closed Close the door latch the latches and turn the power back on 96 8740 9 January 1999 SERVICE MANUAL ELECTRICAL SERVICE Series 4 3 FUSE REPLACEMENT Please read this section in its entirety before attempting to replace any fuses TOOLS REQUIRED v REPLACEMENT FUSES OVERVOLTAGE Fuses WARNING The electrical panel will have residual voltage even after power has been shut off and or disconnected Never work inside this cabinet until the small red CHARGE light on the servo drive assembly goes out The servo drive assembly is on the left side of the main control cabinet and about
268. ssion mounting plate to the spindle head 4 Adjust the drive belt tension then tighten down screws completely Refer to the Spindle Installation section for proper belt tension procedures and tension chart 5 Reattach all electrical lines at this time 6 Replace the left side panel Note If you are using a floor jack replace the bottom left front panel 3 5 GRID OFFSET CALCULATION Please read this section in its entirety before attempting to set the grid offset GUIDELINES The encoder Z channel signal must occur between 1 8 and 7 8 revolution from where the home switch is released If DISTANCE GO is less than 1 8 0295 or greater than 7 8 2065 of a revolution it will alarm to Zero Return Margin Too Small In ZERO RETURN mode the DISTANCE TO GO is the amount the encoder rotated from when the switch was released until it found the Z channel signal The ideal amount for the DISTANCE TO GO are X axis 236 Z axis 118 B axis 050 This equals of a revolution of the encoder SETTING THE OFFSET 1 Set the grid offset to zero Parameter 125 127 129 depending on the axis being set Setting 7 PARAMETER LOCK must be OFF to reset grid offset 2 Press ZERO RET and ZERO SINGL AXIS the axis you are setting X Z or A 3 Calculate the grid offset using the following formula and write the result in Parameter 125 127 or 128 depending on the axis being set DISTANCE TO GO 236 x Ratio
269. st be to its end point when exact stop is programmed They apply only in 609 and G64 They are in units of encoder steps A value of 34 would give 34 138718 0 00025 inch Note To change the values of parameters 134 137 permanently the machine must be rebooted Parameter 138 X FRICTION FACTOR Parameter 139 Y FRICTION FACTOR Parameter 140 Z FRICTION FACTOR Parameter 141 A FRICTION FACTOR These parameters compensate for friction on each of the four axes The units are in 0 004V Parameter 142 HIGH LOW GEAR CHANG This parameter set the spindle speed at which an automatic gear change is performed Below this parameter low gear is the default above this high gear change is the default Parameter 143 LIVE TOOL CHNG VEL This parameter specifies the velocity to command the Live Tooling Drive motor for the period specified by parameter 72 This process is required to engage the live tooling motor and tooland is only performed prior to the first M133 or M134 after a tool change ATMA 5 96 8710 January 1999 96 8710 Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter 144 145 146 147 148 150 151 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 r RIG TAP FINISH DIST This parameter sets the finish tol
270. t 180 degrees and check reading of indicator for 0003 TIR or less 11 Tap on the turret until the readings are within tolerance 12 Retighten all ten turret bolts If the reading is within tolerance proceed to Chapter 2 Spindle Alignment Verification If the reading is greater than the tolerance specified proceed to the appropriate coupling adjustment procedure CENTERING INNER TURRET CoupLine Brass PLua This procedure should only be performed if there is not enough adjustment to perform an outer coupling alignment Note If the turret has a 1 4 brass plug proceed to the next section Before starting make sure tool pocket 1 is at top position Pull the turret air cylinder all the way forward unclamp and place something snugly between the back of the turret shaft and the casting to keep the turret shaft from shifting Remove the four bolts from the center turret shaft cover 96 8710 January 1999 96 8710 9 SERVICE MANUAL MECHANICAL SERVICE Series To gain access to the rear coupling either remove the turret or install a turret shaft extension and slide the turret onto it Be careful not to loosen the key way it will be facing down at this point Loosen the 10 bolts on the inner coupling and center the coupling to the bolt holes Retighten them to to the required specifications Refer to torque chart at beginning of the section Install the thrust bearing an
271. t all times except during installation and service At those times only qualified electricians should have access to the panel When the main circuit breaker is on there is high voltage throughout the electrical panel including the circuit boards and logic circuits and some components operate at high temperatures Therefore extreme caution is required 1 Hook up the three power lines to the terminal on top of the main switch at upper right of electrical panel and the separate ground line to the ground bus to the left of the terminals The hydraulic unitis a3 phase pump Refer to the Hydraulic Unit Phasing section for proper phasing instructions B Ground Line Main Switch Figure 4 4 Power lines hookup location 86 96 8710 SERVICE MANUAL January 1999 r di ELECTRICAL SERVICE Note Make sure that the service wires actually go into the terminal block clamps It is easy to miss the clamp and tighten the screw The connection looks fine but the machine runs intermittently or has other problems such as servo overloads To check simply pull on the wires after the screws are tightened 2 After the line voltage is connected to the machine make sure that main circuit breaker at top right of rear cabinet is off rotate the shaft that connects to the breaker counterclockwise until it snaps off Turn on the power at the source Using an accurate digital voltmeter and ap
272. t be changed while rotation is enabled S code has not been encountered Add an S code An attempt was made to use a control feature not enabled by a parameter bit Set the parameter bit to 1 Same as alarm 333 Rigid Tapping can only be in the Z minus G74 or G84 direction Make sure that the distance from the initial position to the commanded Z depth is in the minus direction The tailstock B axis has exceeded it s maximum range of travel Any canned cycle requiring a PQ path sequence may not have an M code in the same block That is G70 G71 G72 and 073 An Incremental and Absolute command can not be used in the same block of code For example X and U cannot be used in the same block In the context that the D code was used it had an invalid value Was it positive Aux axis servo shut off due to a fault In the context that the U code was used it had an invalid value Was it positive Cannot have more than 200 programs in memory Need name in programs when receiving ALL otherwise has no way to store them Check files being loaded Program name must be Onnnn and must be at beginning of a block A receive found bad data Check your program The program will be stored but the bad data is turned into a comment Check your program The program will be stored but the bad data is turned into a comment Check your program The program will be stored but the bad data is turned into a comment Bad Parameter or Setti
273. that the fixture stabilizes itself against the tailstock WARNING Keep hydraulic lines away from the blowtorch flame or serious injury could result Use the blow torch to heat the insert casting This will take approx 30 minutes Pump the hydraulic press to its maximum pressure while continuing to heat the casting Note When the pressure on the gauge begins to drop the insert should begin to slip out Once the press is fully extended run the nut down again and repeat step 6 Note Use a spacer if the adjustment screw on the press is not long enough to remove the insert Once the insert is removed use a small screw driver or chisel to remove any Devcon Make sure fill hole is clear Installation 1 2 3 Clean the tailstock bore and all mounting surfaces Mount the spindle alignment test bar onto the spindle Then mount a tenths indicator to the nose of the test bar Make sure the fill hole at the back of the tailstock casting is not clogged Install the tailstock insert and three mounting screws Insert the tailstock taper alignment bar Position the indicator tip at the base of the tailstock test bar HAAS r 83 SERVICE MANUAL MECHANICAL SERVICE y 7 January 1999 8 Adjust the insert until the runout at the base of the test bar is less than 0003 TIR Then tighten all three SCrews 9 Install the rear insert plate Tighten the three 1 4 x 20 but leave the three 10 x 32 screws lo
274. the spindle shaft with the mounting bolts Tolerance on the face of the adapter plate 0007 Check tolerance of large 1 0 bore 002 96 8710 January 1999 96 8710 15 16 17 18 19 20 SERVICE MANUAL MECHANICAL SERVICE Series Slide the hydraulic cylinder into spindle shaft Insert and tighten the mounting bolts Attach and clamp the oil drain hose and coolant drain hose onto hydraulic cylinder Attach and screw in clamp and unclamp hoses Set the magnetic base on top of the spindle housing with the indicator touching the top of the hydraulic cylinder indication point Spin the hydraulic cylinder and verify that the runout is under 0 003 inches If runout is over 0 003 inches spin the hydraulic cylinder to its high point and tap cylinder with a rubber mallet Tighten and torque the bolts Replace the left end panel with the panel mounting screws SPINDLE HEAD ALIGNMENT Tools Required 1 Dual Indicator Stand Depending on lathe model the following sheet metal pieces may need to be removed a The front left panel b The front bottom panel c The drain rail d The front door Loosen all spindle head mounting bolts Loosen the locknuts on the two jack screws adjustment bolts underneath the spindle head casting Bolt spindle alignment bar tool to spindle and attach a 0 0001 indicator onto the face of the turret Jog indicator such that the indicator runs tangent to
275. ubes onto the swivel fittings n 55 SERVICE MANUAL MECHANICAL SERVICE 10 11 12 13 14 56 January 1999 Series Align Oil Holes 2 Spindle Oil Nozzles 2 Figure 3 10 Alignment of oil mist holes Install the spindle drive pulley Install the drive belts onto the spindle and motor pulleys Apply proper tension to belts by wedging the T shaped belt tensioner tool underneath the spindle head casting web between the spindle head pulleys and motor gearbox pulleys and the motor gearbox mounting plate Attach the 1 2 drive torque wrench to tensioner tool and apply the required torque value The path of the applied torque should be inline with the motor assembly The following chart includes values for proper belt tensioning Lathe Tool P N Torque Value HL 1 2 T1510 95ft Ib HL 1 2 BB T1510 95140 HL 3 4 T1537 150ft Ib HL5 6 T1537 230ft Ib While applying correct torque amount tighten the four mounting motor gearbox plate bolts CAUTION This procedure should be performed with two service persons One will apply correct torque amount and the other will tighten mounting bolts simultaneously Place the 3 8 timing belt on the spindle pulley with the other end on the encoder pulley Mount the encoder onto the spindle housing below the spindle shaft with four mounting bolts Align and attach the hydraulic cylinder adapter onto
276. umber must be set to the lathe s configuration SPINDLE ORI DELAY Maximum delay allowed when orienting spindle Units are in milliseconds After this time an alarm is generated 5 TE 968710 January 1999 96 8710 Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter 68 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 SERVICE MANUAL GEAR CHANGE DELAY Maximum delay allowed when changing gears Units are milliseconds After this time an alarm is generated DRAWBAR MAX DELAY Maximum delay allowed when clamping and unclamping tool Units are milliseconds After this time an alarm is generated A AIR BRAKE DELAY Delay provided for air to release from brake prior to moving Units are milliseconds MIN SPIN DELAY TIME Minimum delay time in program after commanding new spindle speed and before proceeding Units are milliseconds SPIN STALL DET DLAY Time to delay after spindle is started before spindle stall checking is started Each unit represents 1 50 of a second LIVE TOOL CHNG DLAY This parameter specifies the amount of time in milli seconds to wait after commanding the Live Tooling Drive motor to turn at the velocity specified by parameter 143 This process is required to engage the live tooling motor and tool and is only performed prior to the first M133 or M134 after a tool chang
277. ure is set low and the tailstock does not home properly then increase this parameter Parameter 292 HYD TS RTRACT MARGN Hydraulic Tailstock Retract Margin This parameter sets the acceptable range in encoder steps forthe retract point When the tailstock stops anywhere within this range the control assumes it is at the retract point The default is 5 encoder steps This means that a 10 encoder step range is set around the retract point Parameter 293 HYD TS SLOW DISTNCE Hydraulic Tailstock Slow Distance This parameter sets the distance prior to a target point where the tailstock will transition from a rapid movement to a feed For example if this parameter is set to 30 the default this means the tailstock will slow to a feed 30 encoder steps before reaching the target point encoder steps 144 wll 968710 January 1999 96 8710 Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter 294 296 297 299 300 301 SERVICE MANUAL MIN BUSS VOLTAGE This parameter specifies the minimum Haas Vector Drive buss voltage If the machine has a Haas Vector Drive the paramter should be set to 200 volts Machines without a Vector Drive should be set to 0 Alarm 160 LOW VOLTAGE will be generated if the voltage falls below the minimum specified MAX OVER VOLT TIME Specifies the amount of time in 50ths of a second that an overvoltage condition ala
278. w Assembly 238 F PO A 96 8710 SERVICE MANUAL January 1999 n lt Fo N Sp es ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS BALL SCREW ASS Y BALL SCREW COUPLING ASSY B APPLICATION 30 0450 BS ASS Y 40mm 1 57 X 57 897 24 0003A BALLSCR 40mm 1 57 X 57 897 30 1219 5140 Z 30 0198 BS ASS Y 40mm 1 57 X 57 897 24 0003A _ BALLSCR 40mm 1 57 X 57 897 30 1215 VF 5 50 X 30 0202 BS ASS Y 40mm 1 57 X 32 696 24 0006A _ BALLSCR 40mm 1 57 X 32 696 30 1215 VF 5 50 Y Z 30 0470 BS ASS Y 40mm 1 57 X 71 935 24 99681C BALLSCR 40mm 1 57 X 71 935 30 1219 VF 6 8 X 30 0473 BS ASS Y 40mm 1 57 X 90 859 24 9970C BALLSCR 40mm 1 57 X 90 859 30 1219 7 9 X 30 0474 BS ASS Y 40mm 1 57 X 47 711 24 9960 BALLSCR 40mm 1 57 X 47 711 30 1219 VF 67 8 10 11 VR 11 2 30 0832 BS ASS Y 40mm 1 57 X 90 859 24 9970C BALLSCR 40mm 1 57 X 90 859 30 1215 VB 1 Y 30 0835 BS ASS Y 40mm 1 57 X 47 711 24 9960C BALLSCR 40mm 1 57 X 47 711 30 1215 VB 1 Z DESIGNATES REMOVED PART 96 8710 239 ASSEMBLY DRAWINGS 0 748 CD 32mm Coupling Assembly 240 n n n A 96 8710 January 1999 Series ASSEMBLY DR
279. w Gear 1022 Probe not home 1007 Emergency Stop 1023 spare 2b 1008 Door Switch 1024 Tool Unclamp Rmt 1009 M Code Finish 1025 Low phasing 115V 1010 Over voltage 1026 B F End of Bar 1011 Low Air Pressure 1027 Bar Feeder Fault 1012 Low Lube Press 1028 Ground fault 1013 Regen Overheat 1029 G31 Block Skip 1014 spare 1030 B F Spindle Intlk 1015 spare 1031 Conveyr Overcrnts DISCRETE OUTPUTS Description Name Description 1100 Hyd Pump Enable 1116 Move Spigot CW 1101 Spindle Forward Vector Drive Spare 1117 Move Spigot CCW 1102 Spindle Reverse Vector Drive Spare 1118 Pal Ready Light 1103 Reset Spindle Drv Vector Drive Spare 1119 T S High Pressure 1104 Spindle Brake 1120 Tool Turret Out 1105 Coolant Pump on 1121 T S Reverse 1106 Power Off 1122 T S Forward 1107 Way Lube Pump 1123 CE Door Locked 1108 Spare 1124 M21 1109 Spare 1125 M22 1110 Spare 1126 M23 1111 Spare 1127 TSC Coolant 1112 Spindle Hi Gear 1128 Green beacon On 1113 Spindle Low Gear 1129 Red beacon On 1114 Unclamp Chuck 1130 Enable Conveyor 1115 Lock Spindle 1131 Reverse Conveyor The 32 inputs are numbered the same as the 32 connections on the inputs printed circuit board The last eight outputs are reserved for expansion by HAAS The second page of diagnostic data is displayed using the PAGE UP and PAGE DOWN keys It contains 120 ALMA 5 96 8710 January 1999 96 8710 X axis Z Channel Y Axis Z Channel
280. y 1999 e gt ese sene 59 Q c lt 19 3 00000000 D 5 A A o gt H il lt ee CO pse C gnnannmnnnnnannaun co sl H 4 pO e 5 d 1 H3 5 5 p Uu 222002000 gt H a 7 o n iA dat al d ei ll a 2 er 2 2 lt d gt 5 Uu e 02 044 045 Ce o 11111 11111 PNE Sc 11111 2 111111 J n p 11111 e 11111 5 H H 11114 eee Le gt IL rE 2 9 HUUUUUUUUUUuUuuu 1 N 2 LILTLUILILILTIETLILILTILILTLTLTLILI GEN I w gt I D lt 8710 AIAS 96 MICRO PROCESSOR PCB
281. y 1999 96 8710 Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter Parameter 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 257 266 SERVICE MANUAL _ DLY AFTER CHUCK IS CLMPED The dwell time that is allowed after clamping the chuck an M10 command Program execution will not continue until this time has expired Units are in milliseconds DLY AFTER CHUCK IS UNCLMP The dwell time that is allowed after unclamping the chuck an M11 command Program execution will not continue until this time has expired Units are in milliseconds AUTO DOOR OPEN ERROR TIME Automatic door open timeout TAILSTOCK OVERLOAD DIR Determines the overload limit when the tailstock is traveling in the minus direction toward the spindle This is an arbitrary value based on the effective voltage being sent to the tailstock servo motor If this value is too low you may not be able to move the tailstock Increase the value until you are able to move the tailstock The value for Parameter 252 should be approximately 1 2 the value of Parameter 253 The default is 1500 TAIL STOCK OVERLOAD DIR Determines the overload limit when the tailstock is traveling in the positive direction away from the spindle The value for Parameter 253 should be approximately twice the value of Parameter 252 The default is 3000 SPINDLE CENTER Reserved for service use only CONVEYOR TIMEOUT The amount of time the

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

srE 231 E  User manual, IQANdevelop G3 Second edition  piano di sicurezza e coordinamento  XMLとデータベースを活用したドキュメント制作システムの概要  デジタル一眼カメラ  Philips 191V2 Computer Monitor User Manual  LG LDF900UR User Guide Manual - CaRadio  Matrix X User's Manual  Samsung 225UW Computer Monitor User Manual    

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file